Home

ABB ACS310 Drives User Manual

1. Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 292 Fault tracing Alarms generated by the Basic Control Panel The Basic Control Panel indicates Control Panel alarms with a code A5xxx ALARM CODE CAUSE WHAT TO DO 5001 Drive is not responding Check panel connection 5002 Incompatible Contact your local ABB representative communication profile 5010 Corrupted panel parameter Retry parameter upload backup file Retry parameter download 5011 Drive is controlled from Change drive control to local control mode another source 5012 Direction of rotation is Enable change of direction See parameter locked 1003 DIRECTION 5013 Panel control is disabled Start from the panel is not possible Reset the because start inhibit is emergency stop command orremove the 3 wire active stop command before starting from the panel See section 3 wire macro on page 103 and parameters 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS 7002 EXT2 COMMANDS and 2709 EMERG STOP SEL 5014 Panel control is disabled Reset drive fault and retry because of drive fault 5015 Panel control is disabled Deactivate local control mode lock and retry because local control See parameter 7606 LOCAL LOCK mode lock is active 5018 Parameter default value is Contact your local ABB representative not found 5019 Writing non zero Only parameter reset is allowed parameter value is prohibited 5020 Parameter or parameter Contact your local A
2. Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Control panels 67 Control panels What this chapter contains The chapter describes the control panel keys LED indicators and display fields It also instructs in using the panel in control monitoring and changing the settings About control panels Use a control panel to control the ACS310 read status data and adjust parameters The drive works with either of two different control panel types e Basic Control Panel This panel described in section Basic Control Panel on page 68 provides basic tools for manual entry of parameter values e Assistant Control Panel This panel described in section Assistant Control Panel on page 78 includes pre programmed assistants to automate the most common parameter setups The panel provides language support It is available with different language sets Compatibility The manual is compatible with the following versions e Basic Control Panel ACS CP C Rev M or later e Assistant Control Panel ACS CP A Rev E or later new panel series manufactured since 2007 with serial number XYYWWRXXXX where year YY 07 or greater and revision R E F G e Assistant Control Panel Asia ACS CP D Rev P or later See page 82 for how to find out the version of your Assistant Control Panel See parameter 9907 LANGUAGE to find out the languages supported by the different Assistant Control Pa
3. Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 20 Introduction to the manual Contents of this manual The manual consists of the following chapters Safety page 15 gives safety instructions you must follow when installing commissioning operating and servicing the drive Introduction to the manual this chapter page 19 describes applicability target audience purpose and contents of this manual It also contains a quick installation and commissioning flowchart Operation principle and hardware description page 23 describes the operation principle layout power connections and control interfaces type designation label and type designation information in short Mechanical installation page 29 tells how to check the installation site unpack check the delivery and install the drive mechanically Planning the electrical installation page 35 tells how to check the compatibility of the motor and the drive and select cables protections and cable routing Electrical installation page 45 tells how to check the insulation of the assembly and the compatibility with IT ungrounded and corner grounded TN systems as well as connect power cables control cables and embedded fieldbus Installation checklist page 45 contains a checklist for checking the mechanical and electrical installation of the drive Start up and control with I O page 57 tells how to start up the drive as well
4. 0 0 cc eee eae 54 Connection IACI AI iso i tae e ed ang is dh a tan twa a Je ange eA tio 54 7 Installation checklist Checking tne Installation gt xccesaniiasd abe ra wba ah are eae heh ee Sa Rona a 55 8 Start up and control with I O What this chapter contains 0 aana aeaaaee ee eee eee eens 57 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Table of contents 7 FIOW 16 startup UNG drive ss seri ni ak hewn be Se e ai ri ew abia 57 How to start up the drive without a control panel o o o oooooooooooo 58 How to perform a manual start up 0 eee ees 59 How to perform a guided start up 0 eee eens 62 How to control the drive through the I O interface 0 0 eee 65 9 Control panels What this chapter contains 0 0 00 eee ee eee eee 67 ADO CONTO pDanelS aers pirar kaa ea ea a dances Se Ooh to eee ba de ob een 67 COMPatbllWW amp tones bed urna oS ee prada a ee A Be he a ed as 67 Basic Control Panel css oe gino ede so oe od oie de dod She Hoe Pee GS Ee eet eee ou 68 Features see ae eee a ee ees eng ative eee hn ears ane ee ee ee eee oe 68 OvervieW 2 e220 died arar Aes eae eae eos oe eed eed eee ee ee eee 69 ODGIAUOM escrito bee Giants eee AS aus eee beet ees 70 es 2 cee oct Oe ea Bes on Bae Oboe ee obs heen eee eee e tes 12 Reference Mode gt mms ad a ee de e ets 13 Parameter mode A dogs ace Soca een a A 74 OD NOS sesi esate see
5. 3AUA0000051109 A Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Dimensions 329 Frame size R3 NEMA 1 5 831 148 Frame size R3 IP20 NEMA 1 O Da O AC lt O eh 50 lt sO 1 a ES O 3 5 FO S s O i z D lt X A Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 330 Dimensions Frame size R4 IP20 cabinet installation UL open Frame size R4 IP20 cabinet installation UL open JDOGggal bere Lar CODOpoga BEE i tl E 3AUA0000051130 A Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Dimensions 331 Frame size R4 NEMA 1 gl eo VI 6L Frame size R4 IP20 NEMA 1 NI NI a lt O p 3AUA0000051133 A Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com
6. Auxiliary motors 3 and 4 are started according to the same routine The motor stopping routine follows always the normal PFC routine The most important differences between PFC control and SPFC control default settings are in acceleration time 2202 deceleration time 2203 and auxiliary motor stop delay 8776 parameters See also section SPFC Control macro on page 109 E Settings Additional information Group 14 RELAY OUTPUTS Selections of relay outputs for starting and stopping of motors Group 44 PUMP PROTECTION Pump protection pressure monitoring settings Group 81 PFC CONTROL PFC control settings E Diagnostics Additional information AUTOCHANGE PFC Autochange function active PFC I LOCK PFC interlocks active INLET LOW INLET VERY LOW Pressure at pump fan inlet too low OUTLET HIGH OUTLET VERY Pressure at pump fan outlet too high HIGH Fan Additional information PAR PFC REF NEG 2007 lt 0 PAR PFC IO 1 Not enough relays parameterized for PFC Conflict between group 14 RELAY OUTPUTS parameter 8117 and parameter 8118 PAR PFC 10 2 Parameter 8127 does not match the PFC motors in group 14 RELAY OUTPUTS and parameter 8118 PAR PFC IO 3 Allocation of a digital input interlock for each PFC motor not possible INLET LOW INLET VERY LOW Pressure at pump fan inlet too low OUTLET HIGH OUTLET VERY Pressure at pump fan outlet too high HIGH Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info
7. Note Parameter is not effective if parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM setting is DIRECT Setting range depends on parameter 3407 setting E 3403 SIGNAL1 MAX Defines the maximum value for the signal selected by parameter 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM See the figure for parameter 3402 SIGNAL1 MIN Note Parameter is not effective if parameter 3404 A DSP FORM setting is DIRECT Xxx Settingrange depends on parameter 3407 setting range depends on parameter Setting range depends on parameter 3407 setting setting 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP Defines the format for the displayed signal selected by tir FORM parameter 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM Signed Unsigned value Unit is selected by parameter 34050 OUTPUT 1 UNIT 0 0 C Example PI 3 14159 0 0 00 0 000 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 204 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description BAR METER _ Bar graph DIRECT Direct value Decimal point location and units of measure are identical to the source signal Note Parameters 3402 3403 and 3405 3407 are not effective 3405 OUTPUT1 Selects the unit for the for the displayed signal selected by Hz UNIT parameter 3407 SIGNAL1 PARAM Note Parameter is not effective if parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM setting is DIRECT Note Unit selection does not convert values NO UNIT No unit selected A ampere Pp A AAA Hertz percent
8. 3301 FIRMWARE Displays the version of the firmware package 0000 FFFF Eg 241A hex hex 3302 LOADING Displays the version of the loading package PACKAGE 2101 21FF 2101 hex ACS310 0x Eur Industrial Drive hex 2102 hex ACS310 0x US Industrial Drive 3303 TEST DATE Displays the test date 0 00 A Date value in format YY WW year week 3304 DRIVE RATING Displays the drive current and voltage ratings 000 hex 0000 FFFF Value in format XXXY hex hex XXX Nominal current of the drive in Amperes An A indicates decimal point For example if XXX is 9A7 nominal current is 9 7 A Y Nominal voltage of the drive 2 3 phase 200 240 V 4 3 phase 380 480 V 3305 PARAMETER Displays the version of the parameter table used in the TABLE drive 0000 FFFF Eg 400E hex hex type oe Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Actual signals and parameters 203 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 3401 SIGNAL1 Selects the first signal to be displayed on the control panel 103 PARAM in display mode Assistant panel 3404 3405 DI R 0 101 178 Parameter index in group 01 OPERATING DATA Eg 102 1 1 0102 SPEED If value is set to 0 no signal is selected 3402 SIGNAL1 MIN Defines the minimum value for the signal selected by parameter 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM Display value 3407 Source 3402 3403 Value
9. text in the lower left corner of the LCD display indicates the function 4 Soft key 2 Function depends on the context The text in the lower right corner of the LCD display indicates the function 5 Up e Scrolls up through a menu or list displayed in the center of the LCD display e Increments a value if a parameter is selected e Increments the reference value if the upper right corner is highlighted Holding the key down changes the value faster e Decrements the reference value if the upper right corner is highlighted Holding the key down changes the value faster 7 LOC REM Changes between local and remote control of the drive Ka Help Displays context sensitive information when the key is pressed The information Down e Scrolls down through a menu or list displayed in the center of the LCD display e Decrements a value if a parameter is selected displayed describes the item currently highlighted in the center of the display STOP Stops the drive in local control START Starts the drive in local control Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 80 Control panels Status line The top line of the LCD display shows the basic status information of the drive Loc amp LOC UMAIN MENU 10 4 00 4 No Field Alternatives Significance 1 Control location LOC Drive control is local that is from the control panel D
10. DEV enabled When the level is reached PID is enabled PID is executed as parameterized If reference ramp times are set they are used 0 0 100 0 Value in percent of the maximum feedback 1 0 1 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Q Q ne Q a 0 Actual signals and parameters 235 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 4426 PIPEFILL Defines the maximum time Precharge is allowed to operate NOT SEL TIMEOUT If this time elapses PID is preset and PID is allowed to run as it is parameterized with or without reference ramps O NOT SEL 0 NOT SEL 1 60000 s 1 60000 s Max Precharge operating time 1 1s 4501 ENERGY Enables or disables the energy optimizer which optimizes OFF OPTIMIZER the flux so that the total energy consumption and motor noise level are reduced when the drive operates below the nominal load The total efficiency motor and drive can be improved by 1 10 depending on load torque and speed OFF Disable on Enae 4502 ENERGY Price of energy per kWh Used for reference when energy PRICE savings are calculated See parameters 0774 SAVED KWH 0175 SAVED MWH 0176 SAVED AMOUNT 1 0177 SAVED AMOUNT 2 and 0778 SAVED CO2 0 00 655 35 Price of energy per kWh 1 0 1 Currency 4507 CO2 CONV Conversion factor used for multiplying the saved energy in 0 5 FACTOR MWh to calculate the value of parameter 0
11. FUN1 amp 2 See parameter 7209 TIMED MODE SEL DI1 INV Speed defined by parameter 1202 CONST SPEED 1 is activated through inverted digital input DI1 O active 1 inactive DI2 INV Speed defined by parameter 7202 CONST SPEED 1 is activated through inverted digital input DI2 O active 1 inactive DI3 INV Speed defined by parameter 1202 CONST SPEED 1 is activated through inverted digital input DI3 O active 1 inactive DI4 INV Speed defined by parameter 7202 CONST SPEED 1 is activated through inverted digital input DI4 O active 1 inactive DI5 INV Speed defined by parameter 1202 CONST SPEED 1 is activated through inverted digital input DI5 O active 1 inactive Constant speed selection through inverted digital inputs D11 and DI2 1 DI active O DI inactive Constant speed selection through inverted digital inputs DI1 DI2 and DI3 1 DI active O DI inactive Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Actual signals and parameters 169 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 1204 CONST Defines constant speed drive output frequency 3 SPEED 3 0 0 500 0 Hz Output frequency in Hz 1 1205 CONST Defines constant speed drive output frequency 4 E 20 0 Hz SPEED 4 cm _ o O1 oo TI N N O I N C N N O L N 0 0 500 0 Hz Output frequency in Hz 1206 CONST Defines constant speed drive output fr
12. OUTPUT3 MAX Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 76 Control panels E Copy mode The Basic Control Panel can store a full set of drive parameters and up to two user sets of drive parameters to the control panel The control panel memory is non volatile In the Copy mode you can do the following Copy all parameters from the drive to the control panel uL Upload This includes all defined user sets of parameters and internal not adjustable by the user parameters Restore the full parameter set from the control panel to the drive dL A Download All This writes all parameters including the internal non user adjustable motor parameters to the drive It does not include the user sets of parameters Note Only use this function to restore a drive or to transfer parameters to systems that are identical to the original system Copy a partial parameter set from the control panel to a drive dL P Download Partial The partial set does not include user sets internal motor parameters parameters 9905 9909 1605 1607 5201 nor any group 53 EFB PROTOCOL parameters The source and target drives and their motor sizes do not need to be the same Copy USER S1 parameters from the control panel to the drive dL u1 Download User Set 1 A user set includes group 99 START UP DATA parameters and the internal motor parameters The function is only shown on the me
13. the Basic Control Panel indicates control panel alarms with a code of form A5xxx See section Alarms generated by the Basic Control Panel on page 292 for a list of the alarm codes and descriptions Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 78 Control panels Assistant Control Panel E Features The Assistant Control Panel features e alphanumeric control panel with an LCD display e language selection for the display e Start up Assistant to ease drive commissioning e copy function parameters can be copied to the control panel memory for later transfer to other drives or for backup of a particular system e context sensitive help e real time clock Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Control panels 79 E Overview The following table summarizes the key functions and displays on the Assistant Control Panel 3 IA LED Green for normal operation If LED is flashing or red see section LEDs on page 306 LCD display Divided into three main areas f Status line variable depending on the mode of operation see section Status line on page 80 g Center variable in general shows signal and parameter values menus or lists Shows also faults and alarms h Bottom line shows current functions of the two soft keys and if enabled the clock display Soft key 1 Function depends on the context The
14. 100 m s Max 100 m s ISTA 1A 330 ft s 11 ms 330 ft s 11 ms Not allowed 76 cm 30 in 76 cm 30 in Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Technical data 317 Materials Drive enclosure e PC ABS 2 mm PC 10 GF 2 5 3 mm and PA66 25 GF 1 5 mm all in color NCS 1502 Y RAL 9002 PMS 420 C e hot dip zinc coated steel sheet 1 5 mm thickness of coating 20 micrometers e extruded aluminium AISi Package Corrugated cardboard Disposal The drive contains raw materials that should be recycled to preserve energy and natural resources The package materials are environmentally compatible and recyclable All metal parts can be recycled The plastic parts can either be recycled or burned under controlled circumstances according to local regulations Most recyclable parts are marked with recycling marks If recycling is not feasible all parts excluding electrolytic capacitors and printed circuit boards can be landfilled The DC capacitors contain electrolyte which is classified as hazardous waste within the EU They must be removed and handled according to local regulations For further information on environmental aspects and more detailed recycling instructions please contact your local ABB distributor Applicable standards The drive complies with the following standards IEC EN 61800 5 1 Electrical thermal and functional safety requirements for adjustable 2003
15. ABB DRV FULL RAMP_HOLD RAMP_IN Enable ramp function Enter RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR ACCELERATOR ENABLED ene INHIBITED Effective if par 1604 is set to COMM Continue normal operation lI 7 RESET Not in use ABB DRV FULL Control Word 0 or Reference 0 Retain last Control Word and Reference Control Word O and Reference 0 Fieldbus control enabled Reference and deceleration acceleration ramp are locked EXT CTRLLOC 1 Select external control location EXT2 Effective if par 7702 is set to COMM Select external control location EXT1 Effective if par 7702 is set to COMM Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Note Bit 10 is supported only by ABB DRV FULL profile REMOTE_CMD Fieldbus control enabled 1 10 11 280 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus ABB Drives profile Control Word parameter 5319 Bit Name Value Comments o 12 Reserved 15 The following table and the state diagram later in this section describe the Status Word content for the ABB Drives profile The upper case boldface text refers to the states shown in the following block diagram ABB Drives profile EFB Status Word parameter 5320 A Correspond to states boxes in the state diagram RDY_ON a RDY_RUN en RDY_REF TRIPPED nn OFF_2_STA OFF_3_STA a DE SWC_ON_INHIB ALARM A AT_SETPOINT OPERATING Actual value equals reference value is wi
16. AUTOCHNG INTERV See parameters 8720 INTERLOCKS and 8127 MOTORS Check parameter 2670 USER DEFINED U1 2677 USER DEFINED F4 settings Disable frequency output or frequency input e change transistor output to digital mode value of parameter 1804 TO MODE DIGITAL or change frequency input selection to other value in parameter groups 11 REFERENCE SELECT 40 PROCESS PID SET 1 41 PROCESS PID SET 2 and 42 EXT TRIM PID Check parameter settings Following must apply e 3704 LOAD FREQ 1 3707 LOAD FREQ 2 3710 LOAD FREQ 3 3713 LOAD FREQ 4 3716 LOAD FREQ 5 3705 LOAD TORQ LOW 1 lt 3706 LOAD TORQ HIGH 1 3708 LOAD TORQ LOW 2 lt 3709 LOAD TORQ HIGH 2 3711 LOAD TORQ LOW 3 lt 3712 LOAD TORQ HIGH 3 3714 LOAD TORQ LOW 4 lt 3715 LOAD TORQ HIGH 4 3717 LOAD TORQ LOW 5 lt 3718 LOAD TORQ HIGH 5 IAIAIAIA Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 302 Fault tracing Embedded fieldbus faults Embedded fieldbus faults can be traced by monitoring group 53 EFB PROTOCOL parameters See also fault alarm SERIAL 7 ERR E No master device If there is no master device on line parameter 5306 EFB OK MESSAGES and 5307 EFB CRC ERRORS values remain unchanged What to do e Check that the network master is connected and properly configured e Check the cable connection E Same device address If two or more devices have the same address parameter 5307 EFB CRC ERRO
17. Example If parameter value is set to MONDAY timed function 1 is active from Monday midnight 00 00 00 If parameter is set to FRIDAY timed function 1 is 3604 deactivated on Friday midnight 23 59 58 3606 START TIME 2 See parameter 3602STARTTIME 1 3607 STOP TIME 2 See parameter 3603 STOP TIMET See parameter 3604 START DAY 1 See parameter 3605 STOP DAY 1 ala L W N 3610 START TIME 3 Seo parameter 3602 STARTTIME 1 S611 STOP TIMES Seo parameter 3603 STOP TIMET Seo parameter 3604 START DAY 1 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ZIN Oy Ww NM Ala 9 oy amp S lt Actual signals and parameters 211 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq See parameter 3605 STOP DAY 614 START TIME 4 615 STOP TIME 4 616 START DAV 4 Selects the source for the booster activation signal NOT SEL No booster activation signal Digital input DI1 1 active O inactive Defines the time inside which the booster is deactivated TIME after the booster activation signal is switched off hours minutes seconds 23 59 58 Example If parameter 3622 BOOSTER SEL is set to D11 and 3623 BOOSTER TIME is set to 01 30 00 the booster is active for 1 hour and 30 minutes after digital input DI is deactivated Booster active sA lt X A Booster time SRC function can consist of 0 4 time periods and a booster 2 Time per
18. Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 277 E Function codes Supported function codes for the holding 4xxxx register are Code Additional information Preset multiple 4X Presets values into a sequence of registers 4X references When registers broadcast the function presets the same register references in all attached slaves Read Write 4X Performs a combination of one read operation and one write 23 registers operation function codes 03 and 10 in a single Modbus transaction Write operation is performed before the read operation Note In the Modbus data message register 4xxxx is addressed as xxxx 1 For example register 40002 is addressed as 0001 E Exception codes Exception codes are serial communication responses from the drive The drive supports the standard Modbus exception codes listed in the following table Name Description 2 01 Illegal Function Unsupported command 02 lllegal Data Address Address does not exist or is read write protected Illegal Data Value Incorrect value for the drive Value is outside minimum or maximum limits Parameter is read only Message is too long Parameter write is not allowed when start is active Parameter write is not allowed when factory macro is selected Drive parameter 5378 EFB PAR 18 holds the most recent exception code Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 278 Fieldbus control with embedded field
19. SPEED 7 WARNING Make sure that it is safe to continue operation in case of a panel communication break LAST SPEED The drive generates alarm PANEL LOSS and freezes the speed to the level the drive was operating at The speed is determined by the average speed over the previous 10 seconds WARNING Make sure that it is safe to continue operation in case of a panel communication break 3003 EXTERNAL Selects an interface for an external fault 1 signal NOT SEL FAULT 1 NOT SEL Not selected Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Actual signals and parameters 195 All parameters No Name Value Description DI1 External fault indication through digital input DI1 1 Fault trip EXT FAULT 1 Motor coasts to stop 0 No external fault DI2 See selection DI1 DI3 See selection DI1 DI4 See selection DI1 DI5 See selection DI1 DI1 INV External fault indication through inverted digital input DI1 0 1 Fault trip EXT FAULT 1 Motor coasts to stop 1 No external fault INV See selection DI1 INV INV See selection DI1 INV DI4 INV See selection DI1 INV DI5 INV See selection DI1 INV 3004 EXTERNAL Selects an interface for an external fault 2 signal NOT SEL FAULT 2 siie B N See parameter 3003 EXTERNAL FAULT 1 3005 MOT THERM _ Selects how the drive reacts when the motor ROT overtemperature is detected NOT SEL Protection is inactive
20. SW Bit8 1 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 283 DCU communication profile Because the DCU profile extends the control and status interface to 32 bits two different signals are needed for both the control 0307 and 0302 and status 0303 and 0304 words The following tables describe the Control Word content for the DCU profile DCU Profile Control Word parameter 0301 a REVERSE Pp o ten 5 EXT2 epa _DISABLE Ye R eo EM eae 10 RAMP_2 RAMP_OUT_0 RAMP_HOLD Stop according to either the stop mode parameter 2102 or the stop mode requests bits 7 and 8 Note Simultaneous STOP and START commands result in a ee command Note Simultaneous STOP and START commands result in a stop command Reverse direction The direction is defined by using E XOR operation on bit 2 and 31 sign of the Co res values O Forward direction Forward aecton Enter ocal contor moas SSS 0 Enter external controlmode SS 0 Swich to extemal contol x1 I Activa Run Disable SS p cial un Enable O ooo oo E along e active oo ramp bit 10 E 0 value must be 1 STOP No operation Reopen o Emergency stop Bit O value must be 1 STOP 0 Nooperation S S o o o y 1 Coast to stop Bit0 value mustbe 1 E STOP o Pooran SSS S S 1 Use acceleration deceleration ramp pair 2 defined by parameters 2205 2207 Use a
21. www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 122 Program features Programmable digital inputs The drive has five programmable digital inputs The update time for the digital inputs is 2 ms Itis possible to delay the state change of digital inputs with delays defined in group 18 FREQ IN 8 TRAN OUT This enables very simple program sequences by connecting several functions with the same physical wire eg to remove branches and leaves from a pipe by running the fan in reverse before normal operation One digital input DI5 can be programmed as a frequency input See section Frequency input on page 123 E Settings Group 16 SYSTEM CONTROLS DI as external Run Enable fault reset or user macro change signal Group 18 FREQ IN 8 TRAN OUT Delays in DI state changes 2109 DI as external emergency stop command source 2201 DI as acceleration and deceleration ramp selection signal 4406 4414 DI as connection signal source for pump inlet outlet pressure switch Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Program features 123 E Diagnostics Actual signal Additional information 0160 DI status 0414 DI status at the time the latest fault occurred Programmable relay output The drive has one programmable relay output It is possible to add three additional relay outputs with the optional Relay Output Extension Module MREL 0 For more information see MREL 01 Relay Output Extension Module U
22. www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 316 Technical data Ambient conditions Environmental limits for the drive are given below The drive is to be used in a heated indoor controlled environment Operation Storage Transportation installed for in the protective in the protective stationary use package package Installation site altitude O to 2000 m 6600 ft above sea level above 1000 m 3300 ft see section Derating on page 309 Air temperature 10 to 50 C 14to 40 to 70 C 40 to 40 to 70 C 40 to 122 F No frost 158 F 158 F allowed See section Derating on page 309 Relative humidity 0 to 95 Max 95 Max 95 No condensation allowed Maximum allowed relative humidity is 60 in the presence of corrosive gases Contamination levels No conductive dust allowed IEC 60721 3 3 IEC 60721 3 1 IEC 60721 3 2 IEC 60721 3 1 chemical gases chemical gases chemical gases Class 3C2 Class 1C2 Class 2C2 solid particles Class solid particles Class solid particles Class 382 1S2 2S2 The drive must be installed in clean air according to enclosure classification Cooling air must be clean free from corrosive materials and electrically conductive dust Sinusoidal vibration Tested according to IEC 60721 3 3 IEC 60721 3 3 mechanical conditions Class 3M4 2 9 Hz 3 0 mm 0 12 in 9 200_Hz 10 m s 33 ft s Shock According to ISTA 1A According to ISTA 1A IEC 60068 2 27 Max
23. 0 0 s TIME from 100 to 0 0 1800 0 s Deceleration time 0 1s 4034 PID REF Freezes the input reference PID setpoint of the process NOT SEL FREEZE PID controller fat aR oln a o o o 0 0 12 I3 14 Dran Reference is frozen on the faling edge of digital input DIT DIN See selection OMINY Si Dian See selection ONY E DIAN See selection ONY E DIN See selection ONY E 4035 PID OUT Freezes the output of the process PID controller NOT SEL FREEZE NOT SEL Not selected Output is frozen on the rising edge of digital input DI1 See selection DI1 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com i Actual signals and parameters 225 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq TE 4036 INTERNAL Selects a constant value as the process PID controller SETPNT2 reference which becomes active when parameter 4010 SET POINT SEL value is set to INTERNAL and setpoint 2 is selected with the input defined by parameter 4039 INT SETPNT SEL 100 0 100 0 Value in percent 1 0 1 4037 INTERNAL Selects a constant value as the process PID controller SETPNT3 reference which becomes active when parameter 4070 SET POINT SEL value is set to INTERNAL and setpoint 3 is selected with the input defined by parameter 4039 INT SETPNT SEL 100 0 100 0 Value in percent 1 0 1 4038 INTERNAL Selects a constant value as the process PID c
24. 03x25A44 50 osama eo 80 00578903 xls D Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Technical data 311 Dimensions weights and free space requirements E Dimensions and weights Dimensions and weights IP20 cabinet UL open H1 H2 H3 W B Weight mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in kg Ib Ro 169 6 65 202 7 95 2 76 6 65 202 7 95 276 161 634 6 65 202 7 95 413 165 6 50 6 65 7 95 9 29 6 65 6 65 7 13 7 95 9 61 10 24 169 6 65 00578903 xls D Dimensions and weights IP20 NEMA 1 H4 H5 W D Weight mm in mm in mm in mm in kg Ib Ro 257 10 12 280 11 02 70 276 10 12 280 11 02 2 76 6 65 10 12 282 11 10 105 4 13 6 65 4 2 6 65 177 697 10 63 12 60 10 24 6 97 00578903 xls D Symbols IP20 cabinet UL open H1 height without fastenings and clamping plate H2 height with fastenings without clamping plate H3 height with fastenings and clamping plate IP20 NEMA 1 H4 height with fastenings and connection box H5 height with fastenings connection box and hood E Free space requirements Frame Free space required size Above Below On the sides mm in mm in mm in Ro Ra 75 3 7 3 o o 00578903 xls D Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 312 Technical data Losses cooling data and noise Mi Losses and cooling data Frame size RO has natural convection cooli
25. 1401 RELAY OUTPUT A 1806 DO ON DELAY Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 0 1s Actual signals and parameters 181 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 1807 DO OFF Defines the release delay for digital output DO 0 0s DELAY 0 0 3600 0s Delay time 1808 FO CONTENT Selects a drive signal to be connected to frequency output 104 SEL FO X Parameter index in group 01 OPERATING DATA Eg 102 0102 SPEED IN 1809 FO CONTENT Defines the minimum frequency output FO signal value Signal is selected with parameter 1808 FO CONTENT SEL FO minimum and maximum correspond to 1811 MINIMUM FO and 1812 MAXIMUM FO settings as follows FO FO 1812 1812 1811 1811 1809 1810 FO 1809 1810 FO content content X Setting range depends on parameter 1808 FO CONTENT SEL setting 1810 FO CONTENT Defines the maximum frequency output FO signal value MAX Signal is selected with parameter 1808 FO CONTENT SEL See parameter 1809 FO CONTENT MIN X Setting range depends on parameter 1808 FO CONTENT SEL setting 1811 MINIMUM FO Defines the minimum value for frequency output FO 10 Hz 10 16000 Hz Minimum frequency See parameter 1809 FO CONTENT MIN N 1812 MAXIMUM FO Defines the maximum value for frequency output FO 1000 Hz 10 16000 Hz Maximum frequency See parameter 1809 FO CONTENT MIN 1813 FILTER FO Defines the filt
26. 313 Terminal and lead through data for the power cables oooooooooooo 313 Terminal and lead through data for the control cables o oooooooo 313 Electric power network specification o oooooocooooo eee ee eee 314 Motor connection data sess adamis id dew dele ah die Hi Sls His doe at Sia ee ah adds Bde has bares 8 314 ConWol Conmecion dala 242262 cecees4 56008 26 25 oes eee arabic 315 es a a ao gait Atte ctu ae Bk ahd pee A add eee Ba ah oe ea a gtd cara gicte ed 315 Degrees Of protection auc ee ti cic deed Baek OEE ENTS d oa dhe REDO a ee Chee we 315 AMBDICNY CONGIIONS vs feos wd dt Chee eee ee dd ee eee ee ee Ee 316 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Table of contents 13 MAtenalS ad ie aia ura e ei ct ee eave da Bae dupe vance ares 317 Applicable standards scooter ai a da Ee a 317 CE MAKNI seres nto ssp ean a AS 318 Compliance with the European EMC Directive o o ooooooocoonoo 318 Compliance with EN 61800 3 2004 o ooooooocooonooo eens 318 Definitions 22222240 ains AAA A a e 318 dilo oy OA A O Ue 318 ec A E UU 319 UEM creara ena aaa ada eae eee aca Ree iia asa eee ae a 319 UR In eee bears eee ee oot ad ee 319 CICK MARIA iach 6 0 0o ae oe Seared Coad ad ldo he Oe Boek Mane oh Ved Hh he Ba a Os 320 ROHS MANNO oie ht presa ba da ted de oh e OE ted So as aa 320 PPA IMIS UMN AAA sc gees os arcs Pen 321 Pate
27. 3402 SIGNAL1 MIN Setting range depends on parameter 3408 setting 3414 OUTPUT2 Sets the maximum display value for the signal selected by MAX parameter 3408 SIGNAL2 PARAM See parameter 3402 SIGNAL1 MIN Setting range depends on parameter 3408 setting Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Actual signals and parameters 207 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 3415 SIGNAL3 Selects the third signal to be displayed on the control panel 105 PARAM in display mode See par 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM 0 101 178 Parameter index in group 01 OPERATING DATA Eg 102 1 1 0102 SPEED If value is set to 0 no signal is selected 3416 SIGNAL3 MIN Defines the minimum value for the signal selected by parameter 3415 See parameter 3402 SIGNAL1 MIN XiX Setting range depends on parameter 3415 SIGNAL 3 PARAM setting 3417 SIGNAL3 MAX Defines the maximum value for the signal selected by parameter 3415 SIGNAL3 PARAM See parameter 3402 SIGNAL1 MIN liek Setting range depends on parameter 3475 SIGNAL3 PARAM setting 3418 OUTPUT3DSP Defines the format for the displayed signal selected by DIRECT FORM parameter 3475 SIGNAL3 PARAM pF See parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM 3419 OUTPUT3 Selects the unit for the for the displayed signal selected by UNIT parameter 3475 SIGNAL3 PARAM See parameter 3405 OUTPUT1 UNIT 3420 OUTPUT3 MIN Sets the minimum display value for the signal sele
28. CUSTOM U F Incorrect U f ratio Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Program features 129 IR compensation When IR compensation is activated the drive gives an extra voltage boost to the motor at low speeds IR compensation is useful in applications that require high breakaway torque Motor voltage IR compensation E Settings Parameter 2603 IR COMP VOLT No compensation f Hz Programmable protection functions E Al lt Min Al lt Min function defines the drive operation if an analog input signal falls below the set minimum limit Settings Parameters 3007 Al lt MIN FUNCTION 3027 Al1 FAULT LIMIT and 3022 Al2 FAULT LIMIT E Panel Loss Panel Loss function defines the operation of the drive if the control panel selected as control location for the drive stops communicating Settings Parameter 3002 PANEL COMM ERR E External Fault External Faults 1 and 2 can be supervised by defining one digital input as a source for an external fault indication signal Settings Parameters 3003 EXTERNAL FAULT 1 and 3004 EXTERNAL FAULT 2 E Stall Protection The drive protects the motor in a stall situation It is possible to adjust the supervision limits frequency time and choose how the drive reacts to the motor stall condition alarm indication fault indication amp drive stop no reaction Settings Parameters 3010 3012 Phone 800 894
29. DI1 INV 1607 PARAM SAVE Saves the valid parameter values to the permanent memory Note A new parameter value of a standard macro is saved automatically when changed from the panel but not when altered through a fieldbus connection DONE Saving completed SAVE Saving in progress DI1 DI2 DI3 DI5 ON Ol a Al O Z m Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Actual signals and parameters 179 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 1608 START Selects the source for the Start Enable 1 signal NOT SEL ENABLE 1 Note Functionality of the Start Enable signal is different from the Run Enable signal Example External damper control application using Start Enable and Run Enable Motor can start only after the damper is fully open Drive started Start Stop command group 10 Start Enable signals 1608 and 1609 Relay energized Started output status group 14 Damper open l Damper l closed Damper status Damper opening time Run Enable signal rom the damper end switch when the damper is full opened 1601 Motor status Acceleration Deceleration time 2202 time 2203 NOT SEL Start Enable signal is on External signal required through digital input DI1 1 Start Enable If Start Enable signal is switched off the drive will not start or it coasts to stop if it is running and alarm START ENABLE 1 MISSING is activate
30. Day on which the peak value was detected Format Date if the real time clock is operating The number of days elapsed after the power on if the real time clock is not used or was not set 408 PEAK TIME 2 Time of the peak value detection 0 00 00 y 00 00 00 hours minutes seconds 23 59 58 6411 FREQ AT Solal BI wm O gt 410 UDC AT PEAK DC voltage at the moment of the peak value 0 8888 Y Output frequency at the moment of the peak value 0 0 Hz PEAK A 6412 TIME OF Last reset date of the peak logger and amplitude logger 2 RESET 1 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com o lt lt 6409 CURRENT AT Current at the moment of the peak value 0 0 A PEAK 0 0 68885A OyO O on O I N 242 Actual signals and parameters All parameters o Name Value Description 0 65535 d Day of the last reset Format Date if the real time clock is operating The number of days elapsed after the power on if the real time clock is not used or was not set Last reset time of the peak logger and amplitude logger 2 00 00 00 RESET 2 00 00 00 hours minutes seconds 23 59 58 6414 AL1RANGEOT Amplitude logger 1 current in percent of maximum current 0 0 10 0 10 distribution TA O VELL 6415 AL1RANGE10 Amplitude logger 1 current in percent of maximum current 0 0 TO20 10 20 distribution gt Ru l iE O E o
31. During the delay the functions keeps the speed controller live The inverter modulates motor is magnetized and the drive is ready for a quick restart 0 0 60 0 s Delay time If parameter value is set to zero zero speed 1 0 1s delay function is disabled 2113 START DELAY Defines the start delay After the conditions for start have 0 00 s been fulfilled the drive waits until the delay has elapsed and then starts the motor Start delay can be used with all start methods If start delay is zero the delay is disabled During the start delay alarm START DELAY is shown 0 2 Os e time 2201 ACC DEC 1 2 Defines the source from which the drive reads the signal SEL that selects between the two ramp pairs acceleration deceleration pair 1 and 2 Ramp pair 1 is defined by parameters 2202 2204 Ramp par 2 is defined by parameters 2205 2207 norseL Ramppairtisuse O b Do o Digital input DI1 1 ramp pair 2 O ramp pair 1 A a Ses selection DAR Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Actual signals and parameters 187 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq COMM Fieldbus interface as the source for ramp pair 1 2 selection 7 ie control word 0307 FB CMD WORD 1 bit 10 The control word is sent by the fieldbus controller via the embedded fieldbus Modbus to the drive For the control word bits see section DCU communication profile on page
32. E saree ras a a od ed etek ee Rok teh tv eq art da oath ela ees Mo ae te a aaa le 76 Basic Control Panel alarm codes naaa ee eee eae 77 Assistant Control Panel 0 00 00 00000 ee ee eee 78 A A A rae Gas Ba ec ee 78 OVErVIEW 20 ee ee ees 19 OPEralON aunando rd eo tera epee Ged wl ind wed eae aed a E a 80 CINDULMOde oot re es octal Sah es nop accession sa Soto Bude ea pia E A Parameters mode essa air weak had eee ne ee Rees Gee eo ee eee 86 ASSiIStants MOJE tas bcs aie dro Be es ated ace osa aces ta So ec ea 88 Changed Parameters mode 0 00 cece eee eee nee n eens 90 Fault Logger MOUE 0 aire oe ate ect aa ee a dee ae dae ee Ae lada do UA 91 Time and Date Mode sica ti ida de DE Date Ge a were ese a 92 Parameter Backup mode o o ooocooo eee eee eens 94 VO SCUINOS MOJO ves a4 94d ote peepee be SS ooh S Se OO w ire he ee Os con ee 97 10 Application macros What this chapter contains 2224 9 2ecG8 dee k ed ee eRe AA SRE RES ESS 99 Overview of macros session eos 99 Summary of the I O connections of the application macros ooooooooooo 101 ABB Standard macro y suicida e a 102 Default I O connections o 102 3 wire Macro 2 saco oe ce oe ee ed ce ee eee ee eee Peo eee ee eee wat 103 Default VO connections sien bs ed eh Rs heed wed ew he eae De ES Oe ere ee ewer es 103 Alternate macro sexis ds Canaria ciar eee Rado Chess Sooo 104 Default VO CONMNMECHIONS hee eee bees wee eee eee eee 10
33. FAULT The drive trips on fault MOT OVERTEMP when the 1 temperature exceeds 110 C and the motor coasts to a stop ALARM The drive generates alarm MOTOR TEMP when the motor 2 temperature exceeds 90 C 3006 MOT THERM Defines the thermal time constant for the motor thermal TIME model ie the time within the motor temperature has reached 63 of the nominal temperature with steady load For thermal protection according to UL requirements for NEMA class motors use the rule of thumb Motor thermal time 35 t6 t6 in seconds is specified by the motor manufacturer as the time the motor can safely operate at six times its rated current Thermal time for a Class 10 trip curve is 350 s for a Class 20 trip curve 700 s and for a Class 30 trip curve 1050 s Motor load t ONA u alal dol po Oo BI DM Temp rise 100 63 Par 3006 256 9090 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 196 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 3007 MOT LOAD Defines the load curve together with parameters 3008 100 CURVE ZERO SPEED LOAD and 3009 BREAK POINT FREQ With the default value 100 motor overload protection is functioning when the constant current exceeds 127 of the parameter 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR value The default overloadability is at the same level as what motor manufacturers typically allow belo
34. Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Application macros 109 SPFC Control macro This macro provides parameter settings for pump and fan control SPFC applications with a soft start function To enable the macro set the value of parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO to 15 SPFC CONTROL For the parameter default values see section Default values with different macros on page 757 If you use other than the default connections presented below see section I O terminals on page 49 Note Parameter 2708 START INHIBIT must remain in the default setting O OFF E Default I O connections X1A eft sen Sina cate si n O O afan 10 SE a a 4 Hov Reference voltage 10 V DC max 10 mA D gt s a2 Process actual value 4 20mA7 I eno Analog input ccltcommon D 7 AO Output frequency value 0 20mA 2048 enD Analog output circuit common 240 aut volage output 24 V DC max 200 mA 10 GND Auxiliary voltage output common Jr pcom bigtaimputcommon 12 pm stop Start 1 Hand 13 D12 Hand 0 PIDIPFC 1 control selection 14 D13__ Interlock Deactivation always stops the drive hs Di4 Interlock Deactivation stops constant speed motor 16 015 Stop 0 Start 1 PIDPFC X1B 17 ROCOM Relay output 1 1e RoNc PFC 8 9 Rono po posre O Pr 22 DOGND Digital output max 100 mA Hand 0 10 V gt 0 50 HZ 6 The signal source must be powered PID PFC
35. Go to the Main menu by pressing if you are in the Output mode otherwise by pressing repeatedly until you get to the Main menu Go to the Assistants mode by selecting ASSISTANTS on the menu keys 45 and SY 7 and pressing al Select the assistant keys a and SY 7 and press LOC OPAR EDIT __ Dl 9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT If you select any other assistant than the Start up 0 0 V Assistant it guides you through the task of specification of its parameter set as shown in steps 4 and 5 below After that you can select another assistant on the Assistants menu or exit the Assistants mode The Motor Set up Assistant is used here as an example EXIT 100 00 SAVE If you select the Start up Assistant it activates the first LOC CHOICE assistant which guides you through the task of Do y u want to specification of its parameter set as shown in steps 4 Ao ee ale lai up and 5 below The Start up Assistant then asks if you Continue want to continue with the next assistant or skip it select Ip the appropriate answer with keys aS and Ty and EXIT 1100 00 OK press If you choose to skip the Start up Assistant asks the same question about the next assistant and so on Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 90 Control panels Sep Aeon TO y e To specify a new value press keys A and y ILOC uPAR EDIT 9905 SO EXIT 100 00 SAVE e To ask for informatio
36. O Reserved Bit 2 3 Reserved Bit 4 CURR MEAS Bit 5 SUPPLY PHASE Bit 6 Reserved Bit 7 OVERSPEED Bit 8 Reserved Bit 9 DRIVE ID Bit 10 CONFIG FILE Bit 11 SERIAL 1 ERR Bit 12 EFB CON FILE Bit 13 FORCE TRIP Bit 14 MOTOR PHASE Bit 15 OUTP WIRING g g Bit 5 DC UNDERVOLT Bit 1 THERM FAIL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 158 Actual signals and parameters All actual signals No Name Value Description 0307 FAULT WORD A 16 bit data word For the possible causes and remedies 3 and fieldbus equivalents see chapter Fault tracing on page 87 Bit 0 EFB 1 Bit 1 EFB 2 Bit 2 EFB 3 Bit 3 INCOMPATIBLE SW Bit 4 USER LOAD CURVE Bit 5 UNKNOWN EXTENSION Bit 6 INLET VERY LOW Bit 7 OUTLET VERY HIGH Bit 8 INLET LOW Bit 9 OUTLET HIGH Bit 15 Parameter setting fault A 16 bit data word For the possible causes and remedies and fieldbus equivalents see chapter Fault tracing on page 287 An alarm can be reset by resetting the whole alarm word Write zero to the word Bit 0 OVERCURRENT Bit 1 OVERVOLTAGE Bit 2 UNDERVOLTAGE Bit 3 DIRLOCK Bit 4 IO COMM Bit 5 Al1 LOSS Bit 6 Al2 LOSS Bit 7 PANEL LOSS Bit 8 DEVICE OVERTEMP Bit 9 MOTOR TEMP Bit 10 Reserved Bit 11 MOTOR STALL Bit 12 AUTORESET Bit 13 PFC AUTOCHANGE Bit 14 PFC ILOCK Bit 15 Reserved 0309 ALARM WORD A 16 bit
37. active when its command signal is absent an interlock is inactive when its command signal is present the drive will not start if a start command occurs when the speed regulated motor s interlock is active the control panel displays an alarm 2015 PFC LOCK Wire each Interlock circuit as follows e Wire a contact of the motor s On Off switch to the Interlock circuit the drive s PFC logic can then recognize that the motor is switched off and start the next available motor Wire a contact of the motor thermal relay or other protective device in the motor circuit to the Interlock input the drive s PFC logic can then recognize that a motor fault is activated and stop the motor NOT SEL Disables the Interlock function All digital inputs are available for other purposes Requires 8178 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 The Autochange function must be disabled if Interlock function is disabled Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 254 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq DI1 Enables the Interlock function and assigns a digital input 1 starting with DI1 to the interlock signal for each PFC relay These assignments are defined in the following table and depend on e the number of PFC relays number of parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 with value 31 PFC e the Autochange function status disabled if 8778 AUTO
38. adjust the drive parameters in the conventional way without using the assistant at all See section Assistants mode on page 89 on how to start the Start up Assistant or other assistants Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 112 Program features E Default order of the tasks Depending on the selection made in the Application task parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO the Start up Assistant decides which consequent tasks it suggests The default tasks are shown in the table below Application selection Default tasks ABB STANDARD Language Select Motor Set up Application Option Modules Speed Control EXT1 Speed Control EXT2 Start Stop Control Timed Functions Protections Output Signals 3 WIRE Language Select Motor Set up Application Option Modules Speed Control EXT1 Speed Control EXT2 Start Stop Control Timed Functions Protections Output Signals ALTERNATE Language Select Motor Set up Application Option Modules Speed Control EXT1 Speed Control EXT2 Start Stop Control Timed Functions Protections Output Signals MOTOR POT Language Select Motor Set up Application Option Modules Speed Control EXT1 Speed Control EXT2 Start Stop Control Timed Functions Protections Output Signals HAND AUTO Language Select Motor Set up Application Option Modules Speed Control EXT1 Speed Control EXT2 Start Stop Control Timed Functions Protections Output Signals PID CONTR
39. as how to start stop change the direction of the motor rotation and adjust the motor speed through the I O interface Application macros page 99 gives a brief description of each application macro together with a wiring diagram showing the default control connections It also explains how to save a user macro and how to recall it Program features page 111 describes program features with lists of related user settings actual signals and fault and alarm messages Actual signals and parameters page 149 describes actual signals and parameters It also lists the default values for the different macros Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus page 265 tells how the drive can be controlled by external devices over a communication network using embedded fieldbus Fault tracing page 287 tells how to reset faults and view fault history It lists all alarm and fault messages including the possible cause and corrective actions Maintenance and hardware diagnostics page 303 contains preventive maintenance instructions and LED indicator descriptions Technical data page 307 contains technical specifications of the drive eg ratings sizes and technical requirements as well as provisions for fulfilling the requirements for CE and other marks Dimensions page 323 shows dimension drawings of the drive Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Introduction to the manual 21 e Furt
40. backup file Check that file is compatible with drive restoring error 5050 Parameter upload aborted Retry parameter upload 5051 Contact your local ABB representative 5052 Parameter upload has Retry parameter upload failed 5060 Parameter download Retry parameter download aborted 5062 Parameter download has Retry parameter download failed 5070 Panel backup memory Contact your local ABB representative write error 5071 Panel backup memory Contact your local ABB representative read error 5080 Operation is not allowed Switch to local control mode because drive is not in local control mode 5081 Operation is not allowed Check cause of fault and reset fault because of active fault 5083 Operation is not allowed Check parameter 1602 PARAMETER LOCK because parameter lock is setting on 5084 Operation is not allowed Wait until task is completed and retry because drive is performing task 5085 Parameter download from Check that source and destination drive types source to destination drive are same ie ACS310 See the type designatim has failed label of the drive 5086 Parameter download from Check that source and destination drive type source to destination drive designations are the same See type has failed designation labels of the drives Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 294 Fault tracing ALARM CODE CAUSE WHAT TO DO 5087 Parameter
41. board OK state If a control panel is attached to the drive switch to remote control otherwise a fault will be generated and then remove the panel to be able Drive in a fault Drive in a fault state state To reset To reset the fault the fault press switch off the drive RESET from the power control panel or switch off the drive power to see the LEDs At the top left Panel has no Green Drivein anormal Green Drive in an alarm corner of the power or no state state Assistant Control drive Panel connection Drive in a fault state To reset the fault press RESET from the control panel or switch off the drive power Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Technical data 307 Technical data What this chapter contains The chapter contains the technical specifications of the drive eg ratings sizes and technical requirements as well as provisions for fulfilling the requirements for CE and other marks Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 308 Technical data Ratings Type Input Output Frame ACS310 in lomax size x E U A A i s7 o8 tos w2 22 1 osoasa 66 33 36 58 osxoeaz4 106 56 62 08 138 55 1 E EMC filter connected metal EMC filter screw installed 00578903 xIs D U EMC filter disconnected plastic EMC filter screw installed US parametr
42. clrwtr com 296 Fault tracing CODE FAULT CAUSE WHAT TO DO 0009 MOTOVERTEMP Motor temperature is Check motor ratings load and cooling 4310 dls o to Check start up data l e too high due to 0305 bit 8 excessive load Check fault function parameters oe nee fault insufficient motor unction l power inadequate 3005 3009 3504 cooling or incorrect start up data Measured motor Check value of fault limit temperature has _ Check that actual number of sensors exceeded fault limit set corresponds to value set by parameter by parameter 3504 1 SENSOR TYPE FAULT LIMIT ane Let motor cool down Ensure proper motor cooling Check cooling fan clean cooling surfaces etc 0010 PANEL LOSS Control panel selected Check panel connection 5300 as active control Check fault function parameters 0305 bit 9 penal for drive has Check control panel connector programmable fault communicating Refit control panel in mounting function 3002 platform If drive is in external control mode REM and is set to accept start stop direction commands or references via control panel Check group 10 START STOP DIR and 11 REFERENCE SELECT settings 0012 MOTOR STALL Motor is operating in Check motor load and drive ratings 7121 Stall region due to eg Check fault function parameters 0305 bit 11 excessive load or insufficient motor programmable fault power function 3010 3012 0014 EXT FAULT 1 Ex
43. control signal 0734 COMM RO WORD 0 de 36 energize output 1 energize output o134value Binary DO RO o 000000 000001 1 0 000010 o Tt oon o 0 5 TIMED FUNC 1 Timed function 1 is active See parameter group 36 TIMED 37 FUNCTIONS TIMED FUNC 2 Timed function 2 is active See parameter group 36 TIMED 38 FUNCTIONS TIMED FUNC 3 Timed function 3 is active See parameter group 36 TIMED 39 FUNCTIONS TIMED FUNC 4 Timed function 4 is active See parameter group 36 TIMED 40 FUNCTIONS M TRIG FAN Cooling fan running time counter is triggered See 1 parameter group 29 MAINTENANCE TRIG M TRIG REV Revolutions counter is triggered See parameter group 29 42 MAINTENANCE TRIG M TRIG RUN Run time counter is triggered See parameter group 29 3 MAINTENANCE TRIG M TRIG MWH MWh counter is triggered See parameter group 29 4 MAINTENANCE TRIG START DELAY Start delay is active USER LOAD C Alarm Fault from the user load curve See parameter group 47 37 USER LOAD CURVE PIPE FILL Pipe Fill function is active See parameters 4421 4426 PROFILE Actual signal 0116 APPL BLK OUTPUT 0732 PID 1 54 HIGH DEVIATION or 0733 PID 2 DEVIATION has stayed over limit 4479 PROFILE OUTP LIM longer than the time defined by parameter 4420 PROF LIMIT ON DLY See parameters 4418 4420 INLET PROT Pump inlet protection function is active or has caused the 55 drive to trip See parameters 4407 4408 OUTLET PROT Pum
44. da eee Geom hod Pea nea ae 301 15 Maintenance and hardware diagnostics What this chapter contains 0 0 naaa aaaea ee ee ene eens 303 Maintenance intervals zii iid sd ie dr ceeded ad eke ene e di dd dc ewan 303 COOING TAN 2344 0 a gett aanw Al bene ea i eed E ence ewes ea ad ce ee ee 304 Replacing the cooling fan frame sizes R1 R4 0 0 0 0 0 es 304 5 o AAA 305 Reforming the capacitors o o oooooocoroon no 305 Power CONNECUONS s i sores tise ene dw es no od dl wea e eck Ted we 305 Conto PANG pines shee eos ee II 306 Cleaning the control panel 0 cc eee eens 306 Changing the battery in the Assistant Control Panel o o oooooooo 306 DEDS charro nes a bea ad dd eee gas Ae oe 306 16 Technical data What this chapter contains o o ooocooooorono eee ee ee ee eas 307 RCS eee eee ee eee ee ee eee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee er eee 308 DEMOS 0555 tii Get a dd aan 308 4 AAA A A aE he ene Sse 309 Der sas ana er R A A Reet E Ra oe ees 309 Power cable sizes and fuses o o ooocoooo eee eee eens 310 Dimensions weights and free space requirements 0 0 00 cee ee eee eee 311 Dimensions and weights kis wa ei wt ws SE ee a ee a le ee de 311 Free space requirements 0 0 00 eee eee 311 Losses cooling data and noise ce eee eee eens 312 Losses and cooling data ccc eee eee eee teens 312 NOISE carros nasa senora dae daria dee o id ee
45. data word For the possible causes and remedies 2 and fieldbus equivalents see chapter Fault tracing on page 287 An alarm can be reset by resetting the whole alarm word Write zero to the word Bit 0 Reserved Bit 1 PID SLEEP Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Actual signals and parameters 159 All actual signals No Name Value Description Bit 2 Reserved Bit 3 Reserved Bit 4 START ENABLE 1 MISSING Bit 5 START ENABLE 2 MISSING Bit 6 EMERGENCY STOP Bit 7 Reserved Bit 8 FIRST START Bit 9 Reserved Bit 10 USER LOAD CURVE Bit 11 START DELAY Bit 12 Reserved Bit 13 INLET LOW Bit 14 OUTLET HIGH Bit 15 PIPE FILL 0310 ALARM WORD A 16 bit data word For the possible causes and remedies 3 and fieldbus equivalents see chapter Fault tracing on page 287 An alarm can be reset by resetting the whole alarm word Write zero to the word Bit O INLET VERY LOW Bit 1 OUTLET VERY HIGH Bit 2 15 Reserved 0401 LAST FAULT Code of the latest fault See chapter Fault tracing on page 1 1 287 for the codes 0 Fault history is clear on panel display NO RECORD 0402 FAULT TIME 1 Day on which the latest fault occurred 1 1 Format Date if the real time clock is operating The days number of days elapsed after the power on if the real time clock is not used or was not set 0403 FAULT TIME 2 Time at which the latest fault occu
46. delivery and install the drive mechanically Checking the installation site The drive may be installed on the wall or in a cabinet Check the enclosure requirements for the need to use the NEMA 1 option in wall installations see chapter Technical data on page 307 The drive can be installed in three different ways depending on the frame size a back mounting all frame sizes b side mounting frame sizes RO R2 c DIN rail mounting all frame sizes The drive must be installed in an upright position Check the installation site according to the requirements below Refer to chapter Dimensions on page 323 for frame details E Requirements for the installation site Operation conditions See chapter Technical data on page 307 for the allowed operation conditions of the drive Wall The wall should be as close to vertical and even as possible of non flammable material and strong enough to carry the weight of the drive Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 30 Mechanical installation Floor The floor material below the installation should be non flammable Free space around the drive The required free space for cooling above and below the drive is 75 mm 3 in No free space is required on the sides of the drive so drives can be installed side by side Required tools To install the drive you need the following tools e screwdrivers as appropriate for t
47. devices connected on the bus are the same Note High electromagnetic noise levels generate errors 0 65535 Number of characters 5207 BUFFER Number of characters which overflow the buffer ie number OVERRUNS of characters which exceed the maximum message length 128 bytes 0 65535 Number of characters 5208 CRC ERRORS Number of messages with an CRC cyclic redundancy check error received by the drive If the number is high check CRC calculation for possible errors Note High electromagnetic noise levels generate errors 0 65535 Number of messages 5301 EFB Contains the identification and program revision of the ai PROTOCOL ID protocol 0000 FFFF Format XXYY hex where XX protocol ID and hex YY program revision of the protocol 5302 EFB STATION Defines the address of the device Two units with the same 1 ID address are not allowed on line 0 65585 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Actual signals and parameters 239 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 5303 EFB BAUD Defines the transfer rate of the link RATE 1 2 12 Koi 2 4 Koil 48 C os pows SSCS The same setting must be used in all on line stations 8NONE1 No parity bit one stop bit 8 data bits P Odd parity indication bit one stop bit 8 data bits PROFILE Communication profiles on page 278 LIM ABBORVLIM ABB Drive limited profile O 5307 EFB CRC Number of messa
48. during which daylight saving time is used in each country or area whose daylight saving changes you can select to be followed e To disable automatic clock transitions according to the daylight saving changes select Off and press To enable automatic clock transitions select the EYI T 100 00 country or area whose daylight saving changes are followed and press wl To return to the previous display without making changes press 3 gt Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Control panels 95 E Parameter Backup mode The Parameter Backup mode is used to export parameters from one drive to another or to make a backup of the drive parameters Uploading to the panel stores all drive parameters including up to two user sets to the Assistant Control Panel The full set partial parameter set application and user sets can then be downloaded from the control panel to another drive or the same drive The control panel memory is non volatile and does not depend on the panel battery In the Parameter Backup mode you can e Copy all parameters from the drive to the control panel UPLOAD TO PANEL This includes all defined user sets of parameters and internal not adjustable by the user parameters e View the information about the backup stored to the control panel with UPLOAD TO PANEL BACKUP INFO This includes eg the type and rating of the drive where the backup was made It is
49. following suppliers trade names in parentheses e Anixter Wire amp Cable Philsheath e BICC General Corp Philsheath e Rockbestos Co Gardex e Oaknite CLX Shielded power cable is available from the following suppliers e Belden e LAPPKABEL LFLEX e Pirelli Selecting the control cables E General rules All analog control cables and the cable used for the frequency input must be shielded Use a double shielded twisted pair cable Figure a for example JAMAK by Draka NK Cables for analog signals Employ one individually shielded pair for each signal Do not use common return for different analog signals Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Planning the electrical installation 39 A double shielded cable is the best alternative for low voltage digital signals but a single shielded or unshielded twisted multipair cable Figure b is also usable However for frequency input always use a shielded cable Double shielded twisted Single shielded twisted multipair cable multipair cable Run analog and digital signals in separate cables Relay controlled signals providing their voltage does not exceed 48 V can be run in the same cables as digital input signals It is recommended that the relay controlled signals are run as twisted pairs Never mix 24 V DC and 115 230 V AC signals in the same cable E Relay cable The cable type with braided metallic
50. for static or overvoltage trip limit is transient overvoltage 420 V for 200 V drives and 840 V for 400 V drives 0003 DEV OVERTEMP Drive IGBT Check ambient conditions See also 4210 temperature is section Derating on page 309 Check deceleration time 2203 2206 0305 bit 2 o al trip Check air flow and fan operation a te Ae Check motor power against unit power 0004 SHORT CIRC Short circuit in motor Check motor and motor cable 2340 cable s or motor 0305 bit 3 0006 DC UNDERVOLT Intermediate circuit DC Check that undervoltage controller is 3220 voltage is not sufficient on parameter 2006 UNDERVOLT 0305 bit 5 due to missing input CTRL power line phase Check input power supply and fuses blown fuse rectifier bridge internal fault or too low input power 0007 Al1 LOSS Analog input Al1 signal Check fault function parameter 8110 has fallen below limit settings 0305 bit 6 defined by parameter Check for proper analog control signal 3021 Al1 FAULT programmable fault LIMIT levels function 3001 3021 Check connections 0008 Al2 LOSS Analog input Al2 siqnal Check fault function parameter 8110 has fallen below limit settings 0305 bit 7 defined by parameter Check for proper analog control signal 3022 Al2 FAULT programmable fault LIMIT levels function 3001 3022 Check connections Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info
51. frequency a c power drives IEC EN 60204 1 Safety of machinery Electrical equipment of machines Part 1 2006 General requirements Provisions for compliance The final assembler of the machine is responsible for installing an emergency stop device a supply disconnecting device IEC EN 61800 3 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems Part 3 EMC 2004 requirements and specific test methods e UL508C UL Standard for Safety Power Conversion Equipment third edition Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 318 Technical data CE marking The CE mark is attached to the drive to verify that the drive follows the provisions of the European Low Voltage and EMC Directives Directive 73 23 EEC as amended by 93 68 EEC and Directive 2004 108 EC E Compliance with the European EMC Directive The EMC Directive defines the requirements for immunity and emissions of electrical equipment used within the European Union The EMC product standard EN 61800 3 2004 covers requirements stated for drives See section Compliance with EN 61800 3 2004 on page 378 Compliance with EN 61800 3 2004 E Definitions EMC stands for Electromagnetic Compatibility It is the ability of electrical electronic equipment to operate without problems within an electromagnetic environment Likewise the equipment must not disturb or interfere with any other product or system within its locality Fir
52. in this manual 3 The drive is installed according to the instructions given in this manual 4 Motor cable length maximum 30 m 100 ft with 4 kHz switching frequency WARNING In a domestic environment this product may cause radio inference in which case supplementary mitigation measures may be required E Category C3 The immunity performance of the drive complies with the demands of IEC EN 61800 3 second environment see page 378 for IEC EN 61800 3 definitions The emission limits are complied with the following provisions 1 The internal EMC filter is connected the metal screw at EMC is in place or the optional EMC filter is installed 2 The motor and control cables are selected as specified in this manual 3 The drive is installed according to the instructions given in this manual 4 With the internal EMC filter motor cable length 30 m 100 ft with 4 kHz switching frequency WARNING A drive of category C3 is not intended to be used on a low voltage public network which supplies domestic premises Radio frequency interference is expected if the drive is used on such a network Note It is not allowed to install a drive with the internal EMC filter connected on IT ungrounded systems The supply network becomes connected to ground potential through the EMC filter capacitors which may cause danger or damage the drive Note It is not allowed to install a drive with the internal EMC filter connected on a corner groun
53. limits PID Control Selecting the source for the process reference If Al1 is used Setting analog input Al limits scale inversion Setting the reference limits Setting the speed reference limits Setting the source and limits for the process actual value Start Stop Control Selecting the source for start and stop signals of the two external control locations EXT1 and EXT2 Selecting between EXT1 and EXT2 Defining the direction control Defining the start and stop modes Selecting the use of Run Enable signal Setting the motor data 9905 9909 9902 parameters associated to the macro Group 35 MOTOR TEMP MEAS group 52 PANEL COMM 9802 1103 1301 1303 3001 1104 1105 2007 2008 2202 2203 1106 1301 1303 3001 1107 1108 1106 1301 1303 3001 1107 1108 2007 2008 4016 4018 4019 1001 1002 1102 1003 2101 2103 1601 Setting the current limits 2003 Output Signals Selecting the signals indicated through relay output RO Selecting the signals indicated through analog output AO Setting the minimum maximum scaling and inversion Group 14 RELAY OUTPUTS Group 15 ANALOG OUTPUTS Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 114 Program features Name Description Set parameters Timed Functions Setting the timed functions 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS Selecting the timed start stop control for 1001 1002 external contr
54. otherwise a fault is generated before removing the panel and verifying that the red LED is not lit and the green LED is lit but not blinking Assistant Control Panel Check that there are no faults or alarms shown on the display and that the panel LED is green and does not blink Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 62 Start up and control with I O E How to perform a guided start up To be able to perform the guided start up you need the Assistant Control Panel Before you start ensure that you have the motor nameplate data on hand Apply input power The control panel first asks if you want to use the Start up Assistant Press lt when is highlighted to run the Start up Assistant EXIT Press 77 if you do not want to run the Start up Assistant Press key 17 to highlight Ii and then press lt gt if you want to make the panel ask or not ask the question about running the Start up Assistant again the next time you switch on the power to the drive If you decided to run the Start up Assistant the display then asks you to select the language Scroll to the desired language with keys caN Cv and SAVE press 7 to accept EXIT If you press the Start up Assistant is stopped z The Start up Assistant now guides you through the set up tasks starting with the motor set up Set the motor data to exactly the same vdue as on the motor nameplate Scr
55. parameter 1405 RO 1 OFF DELAY 0 0s DELAY 1501 AO1 Connects a drive signal to analog output AO 103 CONTENT SEL X X Parameter index in group 07 OPERATING DATA Eg 102 0102 SPEED Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Actual signals and parameters 175 All parameters No Name Value Description Defines the minimum value for signal selected with CONTENT MIN parameter 7507 AO1 CONTENT SEL AO minimum and maximum correspond the 1504 MINIMUM AO1 and 1505 MAXIMUM AO1 settings as follows AO mA AO mA 1505 1505 1502 1503 AO 1503 1502 AO content content X X Setting range depends on parameter 7507 AO1 CONTENT SEL setting 1503 AO1 Defines the maximum value for signal selected with CONTENT parameter 7507 AO1 CONTENT SEL See the figure for parameter 1502 AO1 CONTENT MIN External signal required through digital input DI1 1 Run Enable If Run Enable signal is switched off the drive will not start or coasts to stop if it is running See selection DI1 See selection DI1 See selection DI1 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 176 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description COMM Fieldbus interface as the source for inverted Run Enable signal Run Disable ie control word 0307 FB CMD WORD 1 bit 6 with ABB drives profile 5379 EFB PAR 19 bit 3 The control w
56. parameters 223 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 4025 WAKE UP DEV Defines the wake up deviation for the sleep function The drive wakes up if the process actual value deviation from the PID reference value exceeds the set wake up deviation 4025 longer than the wake up delay 4026 Wake up level depends on parameter 4005 ERROR VALUE INV settings If parameter 4005 is set 0 Wake up level PID reference 4070 Wake up deviation 4025 If parameter 4005 is set to 1 Wake up level PID reference 4070 Wake up deviation 4025 Wake up level when 4005 1 PID reference Wake up level when 4005 0 t See also figures for parameter 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL Unit and range depend on the unit and scale defined by parameters 4026 WAKE UP DELAY and 4007 UNIT SCALE 4026 WAKE UP Defines the wake up delay for the sleep function See DELAY parameter 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL 0 00 60 00s Wake up delay 0 01 s 4027 PID 1 PARAM Defines the source from which the drive reads the signal Xx uk SET that selects between PID parameter set 1 and 2 PID parameter set 1 is defined by parameters 4007 4026 PID parameter set 2 is defined by parameters 4707 4126 SET 1 PID SET 1 is active Digital input DI1 1 PID SET 2 0 PID SET 1 SET2 SET 1 timed function 1 active PID SET 2 See parameter group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS TIMED FUNC 2 See selection TIMED FUNC 1 TIMED FUNC 3 See selection T
57. reacts to a motor stall condition The NOT SEL FUNCTION protection wakes up if the drive has operated in a stall region see the figure below longer than the time set by parameter 3012 STALL TIME Current A Stall region 0 95 User defined limit User defined limit 2003 MAX CURRENT Par 3011 NOT SEL Protection is inactive FAULT The drive trips on fault MOTOR STALL and the motor coast to a stop ALARM The drive generates alarm MOTOR STALL 3011 STALL Defines the frequency limit for the stall function See 20 0 Hz FREQUENCY parameter 3010 STALL FUNCTION Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 198 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 05 600H2 Frequency OO OOOO O i i 3012 STALL TIME Defines the time for the stall function See parameter 3010 20 s STALL FUNCTION 104005 3017 EARTH FAULT Selects how the drive reacts when an earth ground fault is ENABLE detected in the motor or the motor cable Note Changing this parameter setting is not recommended DISABLE ENABLE The drive trips on fault EARTH FAULT 3018 COMM FAULT Selects how the drive reacts in a fieldbus communication NOT SEL FUNC break The time delay is defined by parameter 3019 COMM FAULT TIME NOT SEL Protection is inactive FAULT Protection is active The drive trips on fault SERIAL 1 ERR 1 and coasts to stops CONST SP 7 Protectio
58. reference not reset by a stop command The reference is not saved if the control source is changed from EXT1 to EXT2 from EXT2 to EXT1 or from LOC to REM Al1 Al2 Reference is calculated with the following equation REF Al1 Al2 50 Al1 AI2 Reference is calculated with the following equation REF Al Al2 50 Al1 Al2 Reference is calculated with the following equation REF Al1 50 Al2 Al1 Al2 Reference is calculated with the following equation REF Al1 50 Al2 INTERNAL A constant value defined by parameter 4077 INTERNAL SETPNT 4036 INTERNAL SETPNT2 4037 INTERNAL SETPNT3 or 4038 INTERNAL SETPNT4 See also parameter 4039 INT SETPNT SEL DI4U 5D NC See selection DI3U 4D NC FREQ INPUT Frequency input 4011 INTERNAL Selects a constant value as process PID controller 40 SETPNT reference when parameter 4070 SET POINT SEL value is set to INTERNAL gt Unit and range depend on the unit and scale defined by parameters 4006 UNITS and 4007 UNIT SCALE 4012 SETPOINT Defines the minimum value for the selected PID reference 0 0 MI signal source See parameter 4070 SET POINT SEL 500 0 500 0 Value in percent Example Analog input Al1 is selected as the PID reference source value of parameter 4070 is Al1 The reference minimum and maximum correspond the 7307 MINIMUM Al1 and 1302 MAXIMUM Al1 settings as follows Ref Ref MAX gt MIN MIN gt MAX 4013 4012 MAX MIN 4012 40
59. reference REF2 is used 40003 for REF2 SELECT COMM AI1 when EXT2 is selected as the active COMM AI1 control location See section Fieldbus information on the alternative settings OUTPUT SIGNAL SOURCE SELECTION ABB DRV DCU 1501 AO1 135 Directs the contents of fieldbus 40135 for signal 0135 CONTENT SEL reference 0735 COMM VALUE 1 to analog output AO SYSTEM CONTROL INPUTS ABB DRV DCU COMM Enables the control of the inverted 40001 bit 3 40031 bit 6 Run Enable signal Run Disable through 0307 FB CMD WORD 1 bit 6 with ABB drives profile 5379 EFB PAR 19 bit 3 0 1 location REQUEST 1002 The direction control is 1103 REF1 COMM Fieldbus reference REF1 is used 40002 for REF1 SELECT COMM AI1 when EXT1 is selected as the active COMM AI1 control location See section Fieldbus references on page 271 for information on the alternative settings references on page 271 for 1401 RELAY COMM Enables relay output RO control by 40134 for signal 0134 OUTPUT 1 COMM 1 signal 0134 COMM RO WORD Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 269 Parameter Setting for Function Information Modbus register fieldbus address control 1604 FAULT COMM Enables fault reset through fieldbus 40001 bit 7 40031 bit 4 RESET SEL 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 bit 4 with ABB drives profile 5379 EFB PAR 19 bit 7 1606 LOCAL COMM Local control mode lock signal 40031 bit LOCK through 03
60. screen for example LFLEX by LAPPKABEL has been tested and approved by ABB E Control panel cable In remote use the cable connecting the control panel to the drive must not exceed 3 m 10 ft The cable type tested and approved by ABB is used in control panel option kits Routing the cables Route the motor cable away from other cable routes Motor cables of several drives can be run in parallel installed next to each other It is recommended that the motor cable input power cable and control cables are installed on separate trays Avoid long parallel runs of motor cables with other cables to decrease electromagnetic interference caused by the rapid changes in the drive output voltage Where control cables must cross power cables make sure that they are arranged at an angle as near to 90 degrees as possible The cable trays must have good electrical bonding to each other and to the grounding electrodes Aluminium tray systems can be used to improve local equalizing of potential Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 40 Planning the electrical installation A diagram of the cable routing is shown below Motor cable Drive orbe min 300 mm 12 in Motor cable Input power cable min 200 mm 8 in 90 min 500 mm 20 in Control cables Control cable ducts 24V 230V 24V 230V Lead 24 V and 230 V control cables in Not allowe
61. the SCR terminal terminal 1 8 Secure all cables outside the drive mechanically 9 Slide the terminal cover back in place A Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 54 Electrical installation Connecting the embedded fieldbus Embedded fieldbus can be connected to the drive with RS 485 or RS 232 E Connection diagram RS 485 The figure below shows the fieldbus connection Negative GND_A Fieldbus common Terminate the RS 485 bus with a 120 ohm resistor at the end of the network by setting the jumper J701 shunts as in the figure below Fieldbus controller Jumper shunts Fieldbus connect the termination resistor RS 232 Plug a communication cable into the control panel connection X2 The cable must be shorter than 3 meters Fieldbus RS 232 controller Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Installation checklist 55 Installation checklist Checking the installation Check the mechanical and electrical installation of the drive before start up Go through the checklist below together with another person Read chapter Safety on page 75 of this manual before you work on the drive The ambient operating conditions are allowed See Mechanical installation Checking the installation site on page 29 as well as Technical data Losses cooling da
62. the duration of each forward step in the pump 0 0s cleaning sequence in seconds 0 0 1000 0 s Forward step duration 4606 REV TIME Defines the duration of each reverse step in the pump 0 0s cleaning sequence in seconds 0 0 1000 0s Reverse step duration 1 1 018 1 1 018 4607 TRIG TIME Defines the time for setting TIMER TRIG of parameter 4607 0 0 h PUMP CLEAN TRIG 0 0 200 0 h Trigger time in hours 1 0 1h 4608 COUNT Number of steps to be performed in the pump cleaning sequence 5201 STATION ID Defines the address of the drive Two units with the same address are not allowed on line Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 238 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value SESENPMOn Def FbEq 5202 BAUD RATE Defes the tansteraleotellik e6 9 5 kbit s 19 2 kbit s must be used in all on line stations BNONE1 No parity bit onestopbt O PEs ao P MESSAGES normal operation this number increases constantly 5205 PARITY Number of characters with a parity error received from the ERRORS Modbus link If the number is high check that the parity settings of the devices connected on the bus are the same Note High electromagnetic noise levels generate errors 0 65535 Number of characters 5206 FRAME Number of characters with a framing error received by the ERRORS Modbus link If the number is high check that the communication speed settings of the
63. there Increase the frequency reference from zero to a small value with key lt a gt Press to start the motor Check that the actual direction of the motor is the same as indicated on the display means forward and J reverse Press to stop the motor To change the direction of the motor rotation e If parameter 9914 PHASE INVERSION is not visible first set parameter 7677 PARAMETER VIEW to 3 LONG VIEW e Invert the phases by changing the value of parameter 9914 to the opposite ie from 0 NO to 1 YES or vice versa e Verify your work by applying input power and repeating the check as described above e Set parameter 9914 back to 2 SHORT VIEW REM UPAR EDIT 9902 or MACRO ABB STANDARD 1 EXIT 100 00 SAVE M uCHOI CE ou want to inue with reference setup Ip EXIT 100 00 OK R D C E E ant XT reverse direction direction 1611 PARAMETER VIEW LONG VIEW 3 CANCEL 00 00 SAVE REM UPAR EDIT 9914 PHASE INVERSION YES 1 CANCEL 1 00 00 SAVE Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 64 Start up and control with I O After the whole set up is completed check that there are no faults or alarms shown on the display and the panel LED is green and does not blink Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Start up and control with VO 65 How to
64. ungrounded and corner grounded TN systems on page 46 Install the drive on a wall or in a cabinet Mechanical installation on page 29 Route the cables Planning the electrical installation Routing the cables on page 39 Check the insulation of the input cable and the Electrical installation Checking the insulation motor and the motor cable of the assembly on page 45 Connect the power cables Electrical installation Connecting the power cables on page 47 Connect the control cables Electrical installation Connecting the control cables on page 49 Check the installation Installation checkliston page 55 Commission the drive Start up and control with I O on page 57 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Operation principle and hardware description 23 Operation principle and hardware description What this chapter contains The chapter briefly describes the operation principle layout type designation label and type designation information It also shows a general diagram of power connections and control interfaces Operation principle The ACS310 is a wall or cabinet mountable drive for controlling AC motors The figure below shows the simplified main circuit diagram of the drive The rectifier converts three phase AC voltage to DC voltage The capacitor bank of the intermediate circuit stabilizes the DC voltage The inverter converts the DC voltage back to AC volta
65. useful to check this information when you are going to copy the parameters to another drive with DOWNLOAD FULL SET to ensure that the drives match e Restore the full parameter set from the control panel to the drive DOWNLOAD FULL SET This writes all parameters including the internal non user adjustable motor parameters to the drive It does not include the user sets of parameters Note Only use this function to restore a drive from a backup or to transfer parameters to systems that are identical to the original system e Copy a partial parameter set part of the full set from the control panel to a drive DOWNLOAD APPLICATION The partial set does not include user sets internal motor parameters parameters 9905 9909 1605 1607 5201 nor any group 53 EFB PROTOCOL parameters The source and target drives and their motor sizes do not need to be the same e Copy USER S1 parameters from the control panel to the drive DOWNLOAD USER SET1 A user set includes group 99 START UP DATA parameters and the internal motor parameters The function is only shown on the menu when User Set 1 has been first saved using parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO see section User macros on page 110 and then uploaded to the control panel with UPLOAD TO PANEL e Copy USER S2 parameters from the control panel to the drive DOWNLOAD USER SET2 As DOWNLOAD USER SET1 above e Start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control Pho
66. voltage ripple exceeds 14 of nominal DC voltage Motor is turning faster than highest allowed speed due to incorrectly set minimum maximum speed Operating range limits are set by parameters 2007 MINIMUM FREQ and 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ Internal drive ID fault Internal configuration file error Fieldbus communication break Configuration file reading error Trip command received from fieldbus Fault tracing 297 WHAT TO DO Contact your local ABB representative Contact your local ABB representative Check input power line fuses Check for input power supply imbalance Check fault function parameters Check minimum maximum frequency settings Check adequacy of motor braking torque Contact your local ABB representative Contact your local ABB representative Check status of fieldbus communication See chapter Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus on page 265 Check fault function parameter settings Check connections Check if master can communicate Contact your local ABB representative See appropriate communication module manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 298 Fault tracing CODE FAULT CAUSE WHAT TO DO 0031 EFB 1 Error from the See chapter Fieldbus contro with FF92 EP pe fieldbus embedded fieldbus on page 265 EFB protocol eee De application The 0032 EFB 2 meaning is protocol FF93 dependen
67. word 0307 FB CMD WORD 1 bits 0 1 The control word is sent by the fieldbus controller via the fieldbus adapter or embedded fieldbus Modbus to the drive For the control word bits see section DCU communication profile on page 283 TIMED FUNC 1 Timed start stop control Timed function 1 active start timed function 1 inactive stop See parameter group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS TIMED FUNC 2 See selection TIMED FUNC 1 TIMED FUNC 3 See selection TIMED FUNC 1 TIMED FUNC 4 See selection TIMED FUNC 1 DI5 Start and stop through digital input DI5 O stop 1 start 0 Direction is fixed according to parameter 1003 DIRECTION setting REQUEST FORWARD DI5 4 Start and stop through digital input DI5 O stop 1 start Direction through digital input DI4 O forward 1 reverse To control direction parameter 7003 DIRECTION must be REQUEST SUPRV1 Start when the value of supervision parameter 1 goes over 27 OVER the supervision high limit Stop when the value goes below the low limit See parameter group 32 SUPERVISION SUPRV1 Start when the value of the supervision parameter 1 goes 28 UNDER below the low limit Stop when the value goes over the high limit See parameter group 32 SUPERVISION SUPRV2 See selection SUPRV1 OVER 29 OVER SUPRV2 See selection SUPRV1 UNDER 30 UNDER SUPRV3 See selection SUPRV1 OVER 31 OVER SUPRV3 See selection SUPRV1 UNDER 3 UNDER 3 SUP1OVER Start and stop as for SUPRV1 OVER Directi
68. 0 10 V gt 0 100 PID setpoint externally See the manufacturer s instructions An example of a connection using a two wire sensor is given on page 51 Tightening torque 0 4 N m 3 5 Ibf in 5 360 degree grounding under a clamp Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 110 Application macros User macros In addition to the standard application macros it is possible to create two user macros The user macro allows the user to save the parameter settings including group 99 START UP DATA into the permanent memory and recall the data at a later time The panel reference is also saved if the macro is saved and loaded in local control The remote control setting is saved into the user macro but the local control setting is not The steps below show how to create and recall User macro 1 The procedure for the User macro 2 is identical only the parameter 9902 values are different To create User macro 1 e Adjust the parameters e Save the parameter settings to the permanent memory by changing parameter 9902 to 1 USER S1 SAVE MENU e Press lt Assistant Control Panel or Sul Basic Control Panel To recall User macro 1 e Change parameter 9902 to 0 USER S1 LOAD MENU e Press Sul Assistant Control Panel or Basic Control Panel to load The user macro can also be switched through digital inputs see parameter 1605 Note User macro load restores th
69. 0 currency units See parameter 0176 SAVED AMOUNT 1 Local energy price is set with parameter 4502 ENERGY PRICE Can be reset with parameter 4509 ENERGY RESET resets all energy calculators at the same time See group 45 ENERGY SAVING 0178 SAVED CO2 Reduction on carbon dioxide emissions in tn CO conversion factor is set with parameter 4507 CO2 CONV FACTOR Can be reset with parameter 4509 ENERGY RESET resets all energy calculators at the same time See group 45 ENERGY SAVING 0301 FB CMD A 16 bit data word See section DCU communication profile WORD 1 on page 283 0302 FB CMD A 16 bit data word See section DCU communication profile WORD 2 on page 283 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Actual signals and parameters 157 All actual signals No Name Value Description 0303 FB STS WORD JA 16 bit data word See section DCU communication profile 1 on page 0304 FBSTS WORD A 16 bit data word See section DCU communication profile 2 on page 0305 FAULT WORD A 16 bit data word For the possible causes and remedies 1 and fieldbus equivalents see chapter Fault tracing on page 287 Bit 0 OVERCURRENT Bit 1 DC OVERVOLT Bit 2 DEV OVERTEMP Bit 3 SHORT CIRC l B page 283 p 283 t 4 Reserved Bit 15 EARTH FAULT 0306 FAULT WORD A 16 bit data word For the possible causes and remedies 2 and fieldbus equivalents see chapter Fault tracing on page 287 Bit
70. 00 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Start up and control with VO 57 Start up and control with I O What this chapter contains The chapter tells how to e perform the start up e start stop change the direction of the motor rotation and adjust the speed of the motor through the I O interface Using the control panel to do these tasks is explained briefly in this chapter For details on how to use the control panel refer to chapter Contro panels on page 67 How to start up the drive h A WARNING The start up may only be carried out by a qualified electrician The safety instructions given in chapter Safety on page 15 must be followed during the start up procedure The drive will start up automatically at power up if the external run command is on and the drive is in the remote control mode Check that the starting of the motor does not cause any danger De couple the driven machine if there is a risk of damage in case of incorrect direction of rotation Note By default parameter 1611 PARAMETER VIEW is set to 2 SHORT VIEW and you cannot see all actual signals and parameters To be able to view them set parameter 1611 PARAMETER VIEW to 3 LONG VIEW Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 58 Start up and control with I O e Check the installation See the checklist in chapter Installation checklist on page 9a How you
71. 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 130 Program features E Motor Thermal Protection The motor can be protected against overheating by activating the Motor Thermal Protection function The drive calculates the temperature of the motor on the basis of the following assumptions 1 The motor is in the ambient temperature of 30 C when power is applied to the drive 2 Motor temperature is calculated using either the user adjustable or automatically calculated motor thermal time constant and motor load curve see the figures below The load curve should be adjusted in case the ambient temperature exceeds 30 C Output current relative to motor nom current m0 Break point Motor load curve P 3007 100 127 P 3008 50 Zero speed load Motor thermal time constant Settings Parameters 3005 3009 Note It is also possible to use the motor temperature measurement function See section Motor temperature measurement through the standard I O on page 139 E Earth Fault Protection The Earth Fault Protection detects earth faults in the motor or motor cable The protection is active only during start An earth fault in the input power line does not activate the protection Settings Parameter 3077 EARTH FAULT E Incorrect wiring Defines the operation when incorrect input power cable connection is detected Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr c
72. 07 FB CMD WORD 1 bit 14 14 1607 PARAM DONE Saves parameter value changes SAVE SAVE including those made through fieldbus control to permanent memory 1608 START COMM Inverted Start Enable 1 Start Disable ENABLE 1 through 0302 FB CMD WORD 2 bit 18 1609 START COMM Inverted Start Enable 2 Start Disable ENABLE 2 through 0302 FB CMD WORD 2 bit 19 LIMITS ABB DRV 2201 ACCIDEC COMM ACC DEC ramp pair selection 40031 bit 1 2 SEL through 0307 FB CMD WORD 1 bit 10 10 2209 RAMP COMM Ramp input to zero through 0307 FB 40001 bit 6 40031 bit INPUT O CMD WORD 1 bit 13 with ABB drives 13 profile 5379 EFB PAR 19 bit 6 COMMUNICATION FAULT FUNCTIONS DCU 3018 COMM NOT SEL Determines drive action in case FAULT FUNC FAULT fieldbus communication is lost CONST SP 7 LAST SPEED 3019 COMM 0 1 60 0 s Defines the time between FAULT TIME communication loss detection and the action selected with parameter 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC PID CONTROLLER REFERENCE SIGNAL SOURCE SELECTION ABBDRV DCU 40003 for REF2 COMM AI1 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 270 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus Fieldbus control interface The communication between a fieldbus system and the drive consists of 16 bit input and output data words with ABB Drives profile and 32 bit input and output words with DCU profile E Control Word and Status Word The Control Word CW is th
73. 08 AREXTERNAL Activates deactivates the automatic reset for the DISABLE FLT EXTERNAL FAULT 1 2 Automatically resets the fault after the delay set by parameter 3703 DELAY TIME DISABLE mave O OOOO ooo 3201 SUPERV 1 Selects the first supervised signal Supervision limits are 103 PARAM defined by parameters 3202 SUPERV 1 LIM LO and 3203 SUPERV 1 LIM HI Example 1 If 3202 SUPERV 1 LIM LO lt 3203 SUPERV 1 LIM HI Case A 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 value is set to SUPRV1 OVER Relay energizes when value of the signal selected with 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM exceeds the supervision limit defined by 3203 SUPERV 1 LIM HI The relay remains active until the supervised value drops below the low limit defined by 3202 SUPERV 1 LIM LO Case B 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 value is set to SUPRV 1 UNDER Relay energizes when value of the signal selected with 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM drops below the supervision limit defined by 3202 SUPERV 1 LIM LO The relay remains active until the supervised value rises above the high limit defined by 3203 SUPERV 1 LIM HI Value of supervised parameter HI par 3203 LO par 3202 t Pp Case A Energized 1 0 t Case B Energized 1 0 t Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Actual signals and parameters 201 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq Example 2 If 3202 SUPERV 1 LIM LO gt 3203 SUPERV 1 L
74. 10 10 mA 50 50 Example If Al1 is selected as the source for external reference REF1 this value corresponds to the value of parameter 7705 REF1 MAX Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Actual signals and parameters 171 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 100 0 100 0 Value in percent of the full signal range Example If the maximum value for analog input is 10 mA the percent value for 0 20 mA range is 10 mA 20 mA 100 50 1303 FILTER Al1 Defines the filter time constant for analog input Al1 e the time within 63 of a step change is reached Unfiltered signal Filtered signal ov Time constant 0 10 0 s Filter time constant 0 1s 1304 MINIMUM AI2 Defines the minimum value that corresponds to minimum 1 0 mA V signal for analog input Al2 See parameter 1301 MINIMUM Al1 100 0 100 0 See parameter 7307 MINIMUM AI1 0 1 0 1305 MAXIMUM Al2 Defines the maximum value that corresponds to 100 0 maximum mA V signal for analog input Al2 See parameter 1302 MAXIMUM Al1 1306 FILTER Al2 Defines the filter time constant for analog input Al2 See 0 1s parameter 1303 FILTER Al1 0 100 0 100 0 See parameter 1302 MAXIMUM AI 0 1 0 10 0s Filter time constant Dh 0 1s 1401 RELAY Selects a drive status indicated through relay output RO 1 FAULT 1 OUTPUT 1 The relay energizes when t
75. 13 MIN MAX 1301 1302 A 1 1301 1302 Ali 4013 SETPOINT Defines the maximum value for the selected PID reference 100 0 MAX signal source See parameters 4070 SET POINT SEL and 4012 SETPOINT MIN 500 0 500 0 Value in percent 1 0 1 4014 FBK SEL Selects the process actual value feedback signal for the ACT1 process PID controller The sources for the variables ACT 1 and ACT2 are further defined by parameters 4076 ACT 1 INPUT and 4077 ACT2 INPUT ACT1 ACT1 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com wl _ _ _ _ _ NO gt oO N O al Eh N Actual signals and parameters 219 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq ACTIACTZ Subtraction of ACTI and ACT2 p AGTHPACT2 Multiplication of ACTI and AGT2 A 7 sqA1 sqA2 Addition of the square root of ACT1 and the square root of ACT2 4015 FBK Defines an extra multiplier for the value defined by MULTIPLIER parameter 4074 FBK SEL Parameter is used mainly in applications where feedback value is calculated from a other variable eg flow from pressure difference Multiplier If parameter value is set to zero no multiplier is 32 767 used Defines the source for actual value 1 ACT1 See also A parameter 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM 7 FREQ INPUT parameter 4020 ACT2 MINIMUM SS See parameter 4076 ACT1 INPUT O Olalla olj N O O 1 0 001 2 Phone 800 894 0
76. 14 3 14 03142 3 142 31416 3 1416 4008 0 VALUE Defines together with parameter 4009 100 VALUE the scaling applied to the PID controller s actual values Units 4006 Scale 4007 1000 an Internal a scale Unit and range depend on the unit and scale defined by parameters 4006 UNITS and 4007 UNIT SCALE 4009 100 VALUE Defines together with parameter 4008 0 VALUE the scaling applied to the PID controller s actual values e Unit and range depend on the unit and scale defined by parameters 4006 UNITS and 4007 UNIT SCALE 4010 a POINT Selects the source for the process PID controller reference Al1 signal e CI COMM Al1 Summation of fieldbus reference REF2 and analog input Al1 See section Reference selection and correction on page 271 COMM AI1 Multiplication of fieldbus reference REF2 and analog input 10 Al1 See section Reference selection and correction on page 271 DI3U 4D RNC Digital input DI3 Reference increase Digital input D14 Reference decrease Stop command resets the reference to zero The reference is not saved if the control source is changed from EXT1 to EXT2 from EXT2 to EXT1 or from LOC to REM Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 218 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description DI3U 4D NC _ Digital input DI3 Reference increase Digital input DI4 Reference decrease The program stores the active
77. 20 nominal must apply 0307 bit 15 speed frequency 1 lt 60 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ setting 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED lt 16 e 0 8 lt 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED 120 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ Motor poles lt 0 992 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 1012 1013 1014 1015 1017 1026 FAULT PAR PFC 10 1 6320 0307 bit 15 PAR PFC IO 2 6320 0307 bit 15 PAR PFC IO 3 6320 0307 bit 15 PAR CUSTOM U F 6320 0307 bit 15 PAR SETUP 1 6320 0307 bit 15 PAR USER LOAD C 6320 0307 bit 15 Fault tracing 301 CAUSE WHAT TO DO I O configuration for PFC not complete I O configuration for PFC not complete I O configuration for PFC not complete The drive is unable to allocate a digital input interlock for each PFC motor Incorrect voltage to frequency U f ratio voltage setting It is not allowed to use frequency input signal and frequency output signal simultaneously Incorrect user load curve parameter setting Check parameter settings Following must apply e There are enough relays parameterized for PFC e No conflict exists between parameter group 14 RELAY OUTPUTS parameter 8117 NR OF AUX MOT and parameter 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV Check parameter settings Following must apply e The actual number of PFC motors parameter 8127 MOTORS matches the PFC motors in parameter group 14 RELAY OUTPUTS and parameter 8118
78. 207 SUPERV 1 PARAM X Parameter index in group 07 OPERATING DATA Eg 102 1 1 0102 SPEED 104 om 3205 SUPERV 2 LIM Defines the low limit for the second supervised signal LO selected by parameter 3204 SUPERV 2 PARAM Supervision wakes up if the value is below the limit XX Setting range depends on parameter 3204 setting Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 202 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description 3206 SUPERV 2 LIM Defines the high limit for the second supervised signal HI selected by parameter 3204 SUPERV 2 PARAM Supervision wakes up if the value is above the limit Setting range depends on parameter 3204 setting 3207 SUPERV 3 Selects the third supervised signal Supervision limits are 105 PARAM defined by parameters 3208 SUPERV 3 LIM LO and 3209 SUPERV 3 LIM HI See parameter 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM X X Parameter index in group 07 OPERATING DATA Eg 102 1 1 0102 SPEED 3208 SUPERV 3 LIM Defines the low limit for the third supervised signal selected LO by parameter 3207 SUPERV 3 PARAM Supervision wakes up if the value is below the limit Setting range depends on parameter 3207 setting 3209 SUPERV 3 LIM Defines the high limit for the third supervised signal selected HI by parameter 3207 SUPERV 3 PARAM Supervision wakes up if the value is above the limit Setting range depends on parameter 3207 setting
79. 283 Note This setting applies only for the DCU profile DIN inverted digital input DI1 O ramp pair 2 1 ramp pair PDN See selection DIVINE DIS INV See selection Dn Ci DIAN See selection DIN Oi See selection DI1 INV Defines the acceleration time 1 ie the time required for the 5 0 s speed to change from zero to the speed defined by parameter 2208 MAXIMUM FREQ e If the speed reference increases faster than the set acceleration rate the motor speed will follow the acceleration rate If the speed reference increases slower than the set acceleration rate the motor speed will follow the reference signal If the acceleration time is set too short the drive will automatically prolong the acceleration in order not to exceed the drive operating limits Actual acceleration time depends on parameter 2204 RAMP SHAPE 1 setting 0 1800 DE 2203 DECELER Defines the deceleration time 1 ie the time required for the 5 0 s TIME 1 speed to change from the value defined by parameter 2208 MAXIMUM FREQ to zero If the speed reference decreases slower than the set deceleration rate the motor speed will follow the reference signal If the reference changes faster than the set deceleration rate the motor speed will follow the deceleration rate If the deceleration time is set too short the drive will automatically prolong the deceleration in order not to exceed drive operating limits If a short deceleration time is nee
80. 31 D510 319 D510 320 D511 137 D511 150 D512 026 D512 696 D521 466 D541 743S D541 744S D541 745S D548 182S D548 183S Other patents pending Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 322 Technical data Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Dimensions 323 Dimensions Dimension drawings of the ACS310 are shown below The dimensions are given in millimeters and inches Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 324 Dimensions Frame sizes RO and R1 IP20 cabinet installation UL open R1 and RO are identical except for the fan at the top of R1 DIN rail 35 mm 20 lt 7 6 45 164 PORTE Liel 4 Frame sizes RO and R1 IP20 cabinet installation UL open 3AUA0000050967 A Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Dimensions 325 Frame sizes RO and R1 IP20 NEMA 1 R1 and RO are identical except for the fan at the top of R1 1 64 42 20 sE E wee 10 Frame sizes RO and R1 IP20 NEMA 1 A Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwt
81. 3GAA 202 001 ADA 6312 03 la 6210 03 IEC 34 1 os e motor nominal voltage parameter 9905 Setting of parameter 9905 is shown below as an example of parameter setting with the Basic Control Panel You find more detailed instructions in section Basic Control Panel on page 68 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 60 Start up and control with I O _ To go to the Main menu press 37 if the bottom line shows OUTPUT otherwise press C7 repeatedly until you see MENU at the bottom N Press keys CASI until you see PAr and press 7 3 Find the appropriate parameter group with keys CaN SYY and press 5 3 Find the appropriate parameter in the group with keys LAS al Press and hold 37 for about two seconds until the parameter value is shown with under the value 4 0 PAR FWD Change the value with keys lt a v The value 3 8 changes faster while you keep the key pressed down 9 PAR BEAN FWO a Save the parameter value by pressing 37 Enter the rest of the motor data e motor nominal current parameter 9906 Allowed range 0 2 2 0 gt by A e motor nominal frequency parameter 9907 e motor nominal speed parameter 9908 e motor nominal power parameter 9909 O Select the application macro parameter 9902 according to how the control cables are connected The default value 1 A
82. 4 Motor Potentiometer macro eee 105 Default I O connections 0 00 00 00 ee ees 105 Hand Auto macro nic Sa aaa oo Re ee oe Oe ee ee ee ee 106 Default I O connections ee eee 106 PID Control MaChO s 4 s 2 deve sens oases bbe Cowes ohn oes Hoa eee 107 Default I O connections cc ee eee 107 PPC Control macro estorba ria rss irrita da A 108 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 8 Table of contents Default I O connections a anaana ee ee eee 108 SPFC Control macro 22 2 6 3 a1 ouce tio Se yde dhe ed eae Dawe Bees E SEES SE do 109 Default I O connections 4 lt 22 lt c 0 0045 28405 4464 onde len dsessb Gees Sae0aees 109 User macros A Ou es Oe oem Sho een Oh eee Let ose cae 110 11 Program features What this Chapter contains ind seekers eet ea den de a dead 111 Start up o A o II eee eeee hoe tbe reece eee 111 ese ene e ee er eee Ser ee te ee er ere er 111 Default order of the taSkS 0 0 ccc eee eee teens 112 List of the tasks and the relevant drive parameters 00 000 eee e eee 113 Contents of the assistant displays 0 0 cc eee ees 115 Local control vs external control 25 2 ose cow ee cde heehee ask god deed Mow ede Kee ea 115 Hole o Se re ere ar a ea kere eee ee ee ere ee ane eer eae ae or ee ere rere ere ar a Fe 116 is rays 2a det te Be oe hes Mesa whe ea eames oe Ses Mesa wh ues hoe 116 DOWNS ar
83. 4 FBK SEL See parameter 4014 FBK SEL Ld 4215 FBK See parameter 4075 FBK MULTIPLIER MULTIPLIER 216 ACT1 INPUT See parameter 4016 ACT1 INPUT hed 217 ACT2 INPUT See parameter 4017 ACT2 INPUT 4218 ACT1 See parameter 4078 ACT1 MINIMUM MINIMUM 4219 ACT1 See parameter 4079 ACT1 MAXIMUM MAXIMUM 4220 ACT2 See parameter 4020 ACT2 MINIMUM MINIMUM 4221 ACT2 See parameter 4027 ACT2 MAXIMUM MAXIMUM 4228 ACTIVATE Selects the source for the external PID function activation NOT SEL signal Parameter 4230 TRIM MODE must be set to NOT SEL NOT SEL No external PID control activation selected Digital input DI1 1 active O inactive ON Activation at drive power up Power up drive powered active TIMED FUNC 1 Activation by a timed function Timed function 1 active PID control active See parameter group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS TIMED FUNC 2 See selection TIMED FUNC 1 10 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Actual signals and parameters 229 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq TIMED FUNC 3 See selection TIMED FUNC 1 TIMED FUNC 4 See selection TIMED FUNC 1 DI1 INV Inverted digital input DI1 O active 1 inactive INV See selection nn SS INV See selection Diin SSCS DISUNV See selection DI INV SSS 4229 OFFSET Defines the offset for the external PID controller output When PID controller is activated controller output starts from t
84. 412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 220 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 4018 ACT1 Sets the minimum value for ACT 1 0 MINIMUM Scales the source signal used as the actual value ACT 1 defined by parameter 4076 ACT1 INPUT For parameter 4016 values 6 COMM ACT 1 and 7 COMM ACT 2 scaling is not done aoe ee 4016 3 euren o 2 nominal current A Normal B Inversion ACT1 minimum gt ACT1 maximum ACT1 ACT1 ZI Source min Source max Source min Source max Source signal Source signal 1000 1000 Value in percent 4019 ACT1 Defines the maximum value for the variable ACT1 if an MAXIMUM analog input is selected as a source for ACT1 See parameter 4076 ACT1 INPUT The minimum 4078 ACT1 MINIMUM and maximum settings of ACT1 define how the voltage current signal received from the measuring device is converted to a percentage value used by the process PID controller See parameter 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM 1000 1000 Value in percent 4020 ACT2 See parameter 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM 0 MINIMUM 1000 1000 See parameter 4018 4021 ACT2 See parameter 4079 ACT1 MAXIMUM 100 MAXIMUM 1000 1000 See parameter 4019 4022 SLEEP Activates the sleep function and selects the source for the NOT SEL SELECTION activation input See section Sleep function for the process PID PID1 control on page 137 NOT SEL No sleep func
85. 4214 4221 1 REF1 or REF2 depending on which is active See parameter 1102 2 When par 4232 PID2REF the maximum trimming reference is defined by parameter 1105 when REF 1 is active and by parameter 1108 when REF2 is active When par 4232 PID2 OUTPUT the maximum trimming reference is defined by parameter 2008 value E Settings Additional information 1102 REF 1 2 selection 4230 4232 Trimming function settings 4201 4229 PID control settings Group 20 LIMITS Drive operation limits Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 120 Program features E Example The drive runs a conveyor line It is speed controlled but the line tension also needs to be taken into account If the measured tension exceeds the tension setpoint the speed will be slightly decreased and vice versa To accomplish the desired speed correction the user e activates the trimming function and connects the tension setpoint and the measured tension to it e tunes the trimming to a suitable level Speed controlled conveyor line Drive rollers pull Tension measurement Simplified block diagram Add Output frequency reference Trimmed output frequency reference Tension measurement Tension setpoint Programmable analog inputs The drive has two programmable analog voltage current inputs The inputs can be inverted filtered and the maximum and minimum va
86. 5 How to reset The drive can be reset either by pressing the keypad key tiia Basic Control Panel or ES Assistant Control Panel through digital input or fieldbus or by switching the supply voltage off for a while The source for the fault reset signal is selected by parameter 1604 FAULT RESET SEL When the fault has been removed the motor can be restarted Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 288 Fault tracing Fault history When a fault is detected it is stored in the Fault History The latest faults are stored together with the time stamp Parameters 0407 LAST FAULT 0472 PREVIOUS FAULT 1 and 0473 PREVIOUS FAULT 2 store the most recent faults Parameters 0404 0409 show drive operation data at the time the latest fault occurred The Assistant Control Panel provides additional information about the fault history See section Fault Logger mode on page 92 for more information Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Fault tracing 289 Alarm messages generated by the drive 2001 OVERCURRENT Output current limit Check motor load 0308 bit O controller is active Check acceleration time 2202 and programmable fault 2205 function 1610 Check motor and motor cable including phasing Check ambient conditions Load capacity decreases if installation site ambient temperature exceeds 40 C See section Derating on
87. 5 Free DI5 Free 2 DI2 Free DI2 Free Speed reg motor First PFC relay First PFC relay Second PFC relay Second PFC relay Free 3 4 Not allowed DI2 Free First PFC relay Second PFC relay Third PFC relay Not allowed Not allowed Enables the Interlock function and assigns a digital input starting with DI4 to the interlock signal for each PFC relay These assignments are defined in the following table and depend on e the number of PFC relays number of parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 with value 31 PFC e the Autochange function status disabled if 8778 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 and otherwise enabled No of Autochange disabled Autochange enabled PFC Parameter 8118 Parameter 8118 relays DI1 DI3 Free Not allowed DI4 Speed reg motor DI5 Free DI1 DI3 Free DI1 DI3 Free DI4 Speed reg motor DI4 First PFC relay DI5 First PFC relay DI5 Free 2 Not allowed DI1 DI3 Free DI4 First PFC relay DI5 Second PFC relay 3 5 Not allowed Not allowed Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Actual signals and parameters 257 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq DI5 5 Enables the Interlock function and assigns a digital input starting with DI5 to the interlock signal for each PFC relay These assignments are defined in the following table and depend on e the number of PFC relays number of par
88. 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 50 Electrical installation Voltage and current connection for analog inputs Bipolar voltage 10 10 V and current 20 20 mA are also possible If a bipolar connection is used instead of a unipolar one see section Programmable analog inputs on page 120 for how to set parameters accordingly Unipolar voltage Bipolar voltage Unipolar Bipolar current 0 ISCR Al a A 10 Use external power supply 10 V GND 10 V PNP and NPN configuration for digital inputs You can wire the digital input terminals in either a PNP or NPN configuration PNP connection source NPN connection sink X1 X1 9 24V SpV mzn 13 D maD 15 Da 16 D5 External power supply for digital inputs For using an external 24 V supply for the digital inputs see the figure below PNP connection source NPN connection sink X1 Opa 0VDC 24 V DC wavoe e IDCOM o voce 4 Decon mn m e 14 Dis 15 boa 16 Dis Frequency input If DI5 is used as a frequency input see section Frequency input on page 123 for how to set parameters accordingly Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Electrical installation 51 Connection example of a two wire sensor Hand Auto PID Control PFC Control and SPFC Control macros see section Applicat
89. 773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 108 Application macros PFC Control macro This macro provides parameter settings for pump and fan control PFC applications To enable the macro set the value of parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO to 7 PFC CONTROL For the parameter default values see section Default values with different macros on page 757 If you use other than the default connections presented below see section I O terminals on page 49 Note Parameter 2708 START INHIBIT must remain in the default setting O OFF E Default I O connections X1A aft sen Sina cable shied O O afan 10 DS e a Hov Reference voltage 10 V DC max 10mA Dope 5 2 Process actual value 4 20mA7 TTS No Analog input cut common D 7 AO Output frequency value 0 20mA 2448 GND Analog output circuit common e240 pi votage output 24 V DC max 200 mA ofend Auxiliary voltage output common m pcom Pigitalinputcommon 12 DH fStop Start 1 Hany X1B 17 ROCOM Relay output 1 18 ronc PFC 8 19 RONO Digital output max 100 mA e No fault Fault 1 1 Hand 0 10 V gt 0 50 Hz 3 The signal source must be powered PID PFC 0 10 V gt 0 100 PID setpoint externally See the manufacturer s instructions An example of a connection using a two wire sensor is given on page 51 Tightening torque 0 4 N m 3 5 Ibf in 2 360 degree grounding under a clamp Phone 800 894 0412
90. 778 SAVED CO2 tn MWh 0 0 6553 5 Conversion factor 1 0 1 tn MWh tn MWh 4508 PUMP POWER Pump power when connected directly to supply Used for 100 0 reference when energy savings are calculated See parameters 0774 SAVED KWH 0775 SAVED MWH 0176 SAVED AMOUNT 1 0777 SAVED AMOUNT 2 and 0178 SAVED CO2 0 0 1000 0 Pump power in percent of nominal motor power 1 0 1 4509 ENERGY Resets energy calculators 0774 SAVED KWH 0775 SAVED DONE RESET MWH 0776 SAVED AMOUNT 1 0777 SAVED AMOUNT 2 and 0178 SAVED CO2 DONE Reset not requested normal operation Oo RESET Reset energy counters The value reverts automatically to DONE Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 236 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 4601 PUMP CLEAN Defines how Pump cleaning is triggered The pump TRI cleaning sequence consists of forward and reverse steps y Y Revers A e e cd 4607 4605 4604 4606 4604 4605 4604 4608 WARNING Before enabling the Pump cleaning function ensure it is safe to perform the Pump cleaning sequence with the connected equipment Notes The Pump cleaning overrides parameter 7003 DIRECTION The Pump cleaning function observes the maximum forward and reverse frequencies parameters 2007 MINIMUM FREQ and 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ The Pump cleaning always uses acceleration time 2 parameter 2205 and dec
91. 94 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 279 The following table and the state diagram later in this section describe the Control Word content for the ABB Drives profile The upper case boldface text refers to the states shown in the following block diagram ABB Drives profile Control Word parameter 5319 Value Enter READY TO OPERATE Stop along currently active deceleration ramp 2203 2206 Enter OFF1 ACTIVE proceed to READY TO SWITCH ON unless other interlocks OFF2 OFF3 are active Continue operation OFF2 inactive Emergency OFF drive coast to stop Enter OFF2 ACTIVE proceed to SWITCH ON INHIBITED Continue operation OFF3 inactive Emergency stop drive stops within time defined by par 2208 Enter OFF3 ACTIVE proceed to SWITCH ON INHIBITED Warning Ensure motor and driven machine can be stopped using this stop mode Enter OPERATION ENABLED Note The Run Enable OFF2 CONTROL signal must be active see parameter 1601 If par 1601 is set OFF3 CONTROL to COMM this bit also activates the Run Enable signal 3 INHIBIT OPERATION Inhibit operation Enter OPERATION INHIBITED Dh OFF1 CONTROL Dh Note Bit 4 is supported only by ABB DRV FULL profile Enter RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR OUTPUT ENABLED Force Ramp Function Generator output to zero Drive ramps to stop current and DC voltage limits in force RAMP_OUT_ ZERO
92. ACS310 User s Manual ACS310 Drives Ak ED ED PAIDID Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com User s Manual ACS310 Table of contents AE i 1 Safety UNG 4 Mechanical installation Fl 6 Electrical installation DIR 8 Start up and control with I O 3AUA0000044201 Rev A EN 2008 ABB Oy All Rights Reserved EFFECTIVE 15 11 2008 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Table of contents 5 Table of contents List of related Manuals cisne so Ue oa lada he ce opa hee E Ah one 4 as wk 2 1 Safety What this Chapter contains a 688 ode oe al a a Wea eee eS 15 USB OF WAarmiNdS go enc cara doo a aE ea de Ste a a dc a GE hee E a os ea ae A 15 Safety in installation and maintenance o o o oooooocron ees 16 Elecifical SSW 12 24 cece raciones in eee es ae 16 EA eta aae A A Se 17 Safe start up and operation oo ooocoooo eee eee eens 17 General Safety 0 0 0 0 ccc eee eee nee nee des Gane A 2 Introduction to the manual What this chapter contains 2 4206 s644 ese deed eed dt A a RR eS 19 ADDICADINY 222d26004 448046 008 0884 hoo e eee EAE Se dee hee idea das 19 Target UdISneES ca ita ie a cathe th hee Ack o a ded eh eo Ae tok A a ws 19 Purpose of ihe manual 22 02 2 220006 63 246800049 0G0 oa
93. AY 0140 RUN TIME Elapsed drive running time counter thousands of hours 1 0 01 Runs when the drive is modulating Counter cannot be kh reset 0141 MWH MWH counter Counter cannot be reset 1 1 COUNTER MWh 0142 REVOLUTION Motor revolution counter millions of revolutions The 1 1 counter can be reset by pressing UP and DOWN buttons Mrev simultaneously when the control panel is in the Parameter mode 0143 DRIVE ON Drive control board power on time in days Counter cannot 1 1 TIME HI be reset 0144 DRIVE ON Drive control board power on time in 2 second ticks 30 1 2s TIME LO ticks 60 seconds Counter cannot be reset 0145 MOTOR TEMP Measured motor temperature Unit depends on the sensor 1 1 type selected by group 35 MOTOR TEMP MEAS parameters 0158 PID COMM Data received from fieldbus for PID control PID1 and PID2 1 1 VALUE 1 0159 PID COMM Data received from fieldbus for PID control PID1 and PID2 1 1 VALUE 2 0160 DI 1 5 STATUS Status of digital inputs Example 10000 DI1 is on DI2 DI5 are off 0161 PULSE INPUT Value of frequency input in Hz 1 1 Hz FRE Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Q Mm lt 0 156 Actual signals and parameters All actual signals No Name Value Description FbEq 0162 RO STATUS Status of relay output 1 1 RO is energized 0 RO is de 1 1 energized 0163 TO STATUS Status of transistor output when transistor output i
94. Autochange enabled PFC Parameter 8118 Parameter 8118 relays DI2 Speed reg motor Free Free DI3 DI5 Free First PFC relay DI5 Free Speed reg motor First PFC relay DI5 Free Free Speed reg motor First PFC relay Second PFC relay DI5 Free Free Speed reg motor First PFC relay Second PFC relay Third PFC relay Not allowed Free First PFC relay Second PFC relay DI5 Free Free First PFC relay Second PFC relay Third PFC relay Free Free First PFC relay Second PFC relay Third PFC relay Fourth PFC relay 5 Not allowed Not allowed Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 256 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq DI3 Enables the Interlocks function and assigns a digital input 3 starting with DI3 to the interlock signal for each PFC relay These assignments are defined in the following table and depend on e the number of PFC relays number of parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 with value 31 PFC e the Autochange function status disabled if 8778 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 and otherwise enabled No of Autochange disabled Autochange enabled PFC Parameter 8118 Parameter 8118 relays DI2 Free Not allowed Speed reg motor DI5 Free 1 DI2 Free DI2 Free Speed reg motor First PFC relay First PFC relay DI
95. BB STANDARD is suitable in most cases Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Start up and control with VO 61 Check the direction of the motor rotation e If the drive is in remote control REM shown on the left switch to local control by pressing 2 To go to the Main menu press S if the bottom line shows OUTPUT otherwise press CY repeatedly until you see MENU at the bottom Press keys A3SCw 7 until you see rEF and press 37 Increase the frequency reference from zero to a small value with key lt a Press to start the motor Check that the actual direction of the motor is the same as indicated on the display FWD means forward and REV reverse Press to stop the motor orwa reverse direction direction To change the direction of the motor rotation e If parameter 9914 PHASE INVERSION is not lloc 1 6 1 1 visible first set parameter 7677 PARAMETER VIEW to 3 LONG VIEW PAR F WD Invert the phases by changing the value of LOC parameter 9914 to the opposite ie from O NO Q Q 4 to 1 YES or vice versa PAR F WD Verify your work by applying input power and repeating the check as described above Set parameter 9914 back to 2 SHORT VIEW Check that the drive state is OK Basic Control Panel Check that there are no faults or alarms shown on the display If you want to check the LEDs on the front of the drive switch first to remote control
96. BB representative group does not exist or parameter value is inconsistent 5021 Parameter or parameter Contact your local ABB representative group is hidden 5022 Parameter is write Parameter value is read only and cannot be protected changed 5023 Parameter change is not Stop drive and change parameter value allowed when drive is running 5024 Drive is executing task Wait until task is completed 5025 Software is being uploaded Wait until upload download is complete or downloaded 5026 Value is at or below Contact your local ABB representative minimum limit 5027 Value is at or above Contact your local ABB representative maximum limit 5028 Invalid value Contact your local ABB representative Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Fault tracing 293 ALARM CODE CAUSE WHAT TO DO 5030 Invalid request Contact your local ABB representative 5031 Drive is not ready for Check input power supply operation eg due to low DC voltage 5032 Contact your local ABB representative 5040 Parameter download error Selected parameter setis Perform upload function before download not in current parameter backup file 5041 Parameter backup file Contact your local ABB representative does not fit into memory 5042 Parameter download error Selected parameter set is Perform upload function before download not in current parameter backup file 5044 Parameter
97. CAUSE WHAT TO DO Esad PANEL LOSS Control panel selected Check panel connection 0308 bit 7 ae eat i Check fault function parameters programmable eana or drive Nas Check control panel connector fault function 3002 Tape Refit control panel in mounting communicating platform If drive is in external control mode REM and is set to accept start stop direction commands or references via control panel Check group 10 START STOP DIR and 11 REFERENCE SELECT settings 2009 DEVICE Drive IGBT Check ambient conditions See also OVERTEMP temperature is section Derating on page 309 0308 bit 8 O Alarm limit Check air flow and fan operation Check motor power against unit power 2010 MOTOR TEMP Motor temperature is Check motor ratings load and cooling 0305 bit 9 too di appears to Check start up data programmable fault be too hig 1 i la Check fault function parameters chan excessive load 3005 3009 3503 insufficient motor power inadequate cooling or incorrect start up data Measured motor Check value of alarm limit temperature has Check that actual number of sensors exceeded alarm limit corresponds to value set by parameter set by parameter 3503 3501 SENSOR TYPE ALARM LIMIT Let motor cool down Ensure proper motor cooling Check cooling fan clean cooling surfaces etc 2012 MOTOR STALL Motor is operating in Check motor load and drive ratings 0308 bit 11 A apes eg Check fault f
98. CELER Defines the acceleration time 1 TIME 1 2203 DECELER Defines the deceleration time 1 TIME 1 9901 LANGUAGE Selects the display language ENGLISH 9902 APPLIC Selects the application macro ABB MACRO STANDA RD 9905 MOTOR NOM Defines the nominal motor voltage 9906 MOTOR NOM Defines the nominal motor current CURR 9907 MOTOR NOM Defines the nominal motor frequency E 50 0 Hz FREQ U 60 0 Hz 9908 MOTOR NOM Defines the nominal motor speed Type SPEED dependent 9909 MOTOR NOM Defines the nominal motor power PN POWER Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 154 Actual signals and parameters All actual signals All actual signals No Name Value Description FbEq i LAS LE 1 1 0101 SPEED amp DIR Calculated motor speed in rpm A negative value indicates 1 1 rpm reverse direction 0102 SPEED Calculated motor speed in rpm 1 1 rpm 0103 OUTPUT Calculated drive output frequency in Hz Shown by default 1 0 1 Hz FREQ on the panel Output mode display 0104 CURRENT Measured motor current in A Shown by default on the 1 0 1A panel Output mode display 0105 TORQUE Calculated motor torque in percent of the motor nominal 1 0 1 torque 0106 POWER Measured motor power in kW 0107 DC BUS Measured intermediate circuit voltage in V DC VOLTAGE 0109 OUTPUT Calculated motor voltage in V AC VOLTAGE 1 0110 DRIVE TEMP Measured IGBT temperature in C 0 0111 E
99. CHNG INTERV 0 and otherwise enabled No of Autochange disabled Autochange enabled PFC Parameter 8118 Parameter 8118 relays DI1 Speed reg motor Not allowed DI2 DI5 Free DI1 Speed reg motor DI1 First PFC relay DI2 First PFC relay DI2 DI5 Free DI3 DI5 Free Speed reg motor First PFC relay First PFC relay Second PFC relay Second PFC relay DI5 Free DI5 Free Speed reg motor First PFC relay First PFC relay Second PFC relay Second PFC relay Third PFC relay Third PFC relay DI5 Free DI5 Free Speed reg motor First PFC relay First PFC relay Second PFC relay Second PFC relay Third PFC relay Third PFC relay Fourth PFC relay Fourth PFC relay Free Not allowed First PFC relay Second PFC relay Third PFC relay Fourth PFC relay Fifth PFC relay Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Actual signals and parameters 255 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq DI2 Enables the Interlock function and assigns a digital input 2 starting with DI2 to the interlock signal for each PFC relay These assignments are defined in the following table and depend on e the number of PFC relays number of parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 with value 31 PFC e the Autochange function status disabled if 8778 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 and otherwise enabled No of Autochange disabled
100. D 2 SETPNT Setpoint signal reference for the PID2 controller Unit depends on parameter 4706 UNIT and 4707 UNIT SCALE settings Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Actual signals and parameters 155 All actual signals No Name Value Description 0130 PID 1 FBK Feedback signal for the process PID1 controller Unit depends on parameter 4006 UNIT 4007 UNIT SCALE and 4027 PID 1 PARAM SET settings 0131 PID 2 FBK Feedback signal for the PID2 controller Unit depends on parameter 4706 UNIT and 4707 UNIT SCALE settings 0132 PID 1 Deviation of the process PID1 controller ie the difference DEVIATION between the reference value and the actual value Unit depends on parameter 4006 UNIT 4007 UNIT SCALE and 4027 PID 1 PARAM SET settings 0133 PID 2 Deviation of the PID2 controller ie the difference between DEVIATION the reference value and the actual value Unit depends on parameter 4706 UNIT and 4707 UNIT SCALE settings 0134 COMM RO Relay output Control Word through fieldbus decimal See 1 1 WORD parameter 7407 RELAY OUTPUT 1 0135 COMM VALUE Data received from fieldbus 1 0136 COMM VALUE Data received from fieldbus 2 DISPLAY 1 1 1 1 0137 PROCESS Process variable 1 defined by parameter group 34 PANEL VAR 1 0138 PROCESS Process variable 2 defined by parameter group 34 PANEL VAR 2 DISPLAY 0139 PROCESS Process variable 3 defined by parameter group 34 PANEL VAR 3 DISPL
101. EL External reference REF 2 is in use CONSTANT SPEEDS DRIVE TEMP Alarm Fault by drive overtemperature protection function NDERVOLTA Alarm Fault by undervoltage protection function 24 GE Al1 LOSS Analog input Al1 signal is lost Al2 LOSS Analog input Al2 signal is lost T MOTOR TEMP Alarm Fault by motor overtemperature protection function 27 See parameter 3005 MOT THERM PROT STALL Alarm Fault by stall protection function See parameter 3070 28 STALL FUNCTION PID SLEEP PID sleep function See parameter group 40 PROCESS PID 30 SET 1 41 PROCESS PID SET 2 PFC Start stop motor in PFC control See parameter group 87 PFC CONTROL Use this option only when PFC control is used Selection activated deactivated when the drive is not running AUTOCHANGE PFC autochange operation is performed Use this option 32 ee only when PFC control is used FLUX READY Motor is magnetized and able to supply nominal torque USER MACRO User Macro 2 is active 34 2 h O oO NIN NINININ gt gt OO oO Oo W NM gt O COO N O oy gt Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Actual signals and parameters 173 All parameters No Name Value Description COMM Fieldbus control signal 0134 COMM RO WORD 0 de 3 energize output 1 energize output o Ot34value Binary DO RO o 000000 o o w o 1 2 o 1 o 3 000011 COMM 1 Fieldbus
102. ERNATE Alternate macro for start forward and start reverse applications MOTOR POT Motor potentiometer macro for digital signal speed control applications HAND AUTO Hand Auto macro to be used when two control devices are 5 connected to the drive e Device 1 communicates through the interface defined by external control location EXT 1 e Device 2 communicates through the interface defined by external control location EXT2 EXT1 or EXT2 is active at a time Switching between EXT 1 2 through digital input PID CONTROL PID control For application in which the drive controls a process value Eg pressure control by the drive running the pressure boost pump Measured pressure and the pressure reference are connected to the drive PFC PFC pump and fan control macro for pump alternation CONTROL applications Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 4 win ala U Polish ooo e AN 262 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq SPFC SPFC soft pump and fan control macro for pump CONTROL alternation applications where lower pressure peaks are desirable when a new auxiliary motor is started LOAD FD SET FlashDrop parameter values as defined by the FlashDrop file Parameter view is selected by parameter 1611 PARAMETER VIEW FlashDrop is an optional device for fast copying of parameters to unpowered drives FlashDrop allows easy
103. Go to the Parameters mode by selecting PARAMETERS 0C wPAR GROUPS on the menu with keys aS and SY 7 and pressing O RATING DA Select the appropriate parameter group with keys a and vw Select the appropriate parameter with keys 4S and Cv The current value of the parameter is shown below the selected parameter EDIT Press s5 LOC UPAR EDIT 9902 APPLIC MACRO ABE STANDARD CANCEL 1 00 00 SAVE Specify a new value for the parameter with keys 4 gt LOC UPAR EDIT col 9902 APPLIC MACRO Pressing the key once increments or decrements the F value Holding the key down changes the value faster Pressing the keys simultaneously replaces the displayed value with the default value 2 CANCEL 1 00 00 SAVE Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Control panels 87 EXILE A e To save the new value press i e To cancel the new value and keep the original press How to select the monitored signals Sein OOOO O oS You can select which signals are monitored in the Output mode and how they are displayed with group 34 PANEL DISPLAY parameters See page 86 for detailed instructions on changing parameter values By default the display shows three signals Signal 1 0103 OUTPUT FREQ Signal 2 0104 CURRENT Signal 3 0105 TORQUE To change the default signals select up to three signals from group 01 OPERATING DATA to be shown Signal 1 Change the value of p
104. I HI 0 0 500 0 Hz See parameter 2503 1 0 1 Hz 2506 CRIT SPEED 3 See parameter 2502 CRIT SPEED 1 LO LO 0 0 500 0 Hz See parameter 2502 1 0 1 Hz 2507 CRIT SPEED 3 See parameter 2503 CRIT SPEED 1 HI HI 0 0 500 0 Hz See parameter 2503 1 0 1 Hz 2603 IR COMP Defines the output voltage boost at zero speed IR VOLT compensation The function is useful in applications with dependent high break away torque when vector control cannot be applied To prevent overheating set IR compensation voltage as low as possible The figure below illustrates the IR compensation Typical IR compensation values 200 240 V units 200 240 V units 380 480 V units Motor voltage A IR compensated B No compensation 0 0 100 0V Voltage boost 1 0 1V 2604 IR COMP Defines the frequency at which the IR compensation is 0 V 80 FREQ See the figure for parameter 2603 IR COMP VOLT Note If parameter 2605 U F RATIO is set to USER DEFINED this parameter is not active The IR compensation frequency is set by parameter 2670 USER DEFINED U1 0 100 Value in percent of the motor frequency 1 1 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Actual signals and parameters 191 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 2605 U F RATIO Selects the voltage to frequency U f ratio below the field ie weakening point LINEAR Linear ratio for constant torque ap
105. ID controller The derivation makes the control more responsive for disturbances The derivative is filtered with a 1 pole filter Filter time constant is defined by parameter 4004 PID DERIV FILTER Error Process error value 100 po t D part of controller output 0 0 10 0s Derivation time If parameter value is set to zero the 0 1s derivative part of the PID controller is disabled 4004 PID DERIV Defines the filter time constant for the derivative part of the FILTER process PID controller Increasing the filter time smooths the derivative and reduces noise 4005 ERROR Selects the relationship between the feedback signal and N VALUE INV drive speed Normal A decrease in feedback signal increases drive NO speed Error Ref Fbk YES Inverted A decrease in feedback signal decreases drive 1 speed Error Fbk Ref 4006 UNITS Selects the unit for PID controller actual values See parameter 3405 OUTPUT1 UNIT selections LN 4007 UNIT SCALE Defines the decimal point location for the display parameter 1 selected by parameter 4006 UNITS 1 0 1 0s 0 0 10 0s Filter time constant If parameter value is set to zero the 1 0 1s derivative filter is disabled l x O Yo Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Actual signals and parameters 217 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 0 4 Example Pl 3 141593 4007 value eee o ow 1 00031 003
106. IM HI The lower limit 3203 SUPERV 1 LIM HI remains active until the supervised signal exceeds the higher limit 3202 SUPERV 1 LIM LO making it the active limit The new limit remains active until the supervised signal drops below the lower limit 3203 SUPERV 1 LIM HI making it the active limit Case A 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 value is set to SUPRV1 OVER Relay is energized whenever the supervised signal exceeds the active limit Case B 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 value is set to SUPRV1 UNDER Relay is de energized whenever the supervised signal drops below the active limit Value of supervised parameter Active limit HI par 3203 LO par 3202 Case A Energized 1 0 Case B Energized 1 0 Parameter index in group 07 OPERATING DATA Eg 102 1 1 0102 SPEED 0 not selected 0 3202 SUPERV 1 LIM Defines the low limit for the first supervised signal selected LO by parameter 3207 SUPERV 1 PARAM Supervision wakes up if the value is below the limit xX H XX Setting range depends on parameter 3201 setting o XK 3203 SUPERV 1 LIM Defines the high limit for the first supervised signal selected by parameter 3207 SUPERV 1 PARAM Supervision wakes up if the value is above the limit Setting range depends on parameter 3207 setting 3204 SUPERV 2 Selects the second supervised signal Supervision limits are PARAM defined by parameters 3205 SUPERV 2 LIM LO and 3206 SUPERV 2 LIM HI See parameter 3
107. IMED FUNC 1 TIMED FUNC 4 See selection TIMED FUNC inverted digital input OM 0 PID SET 2 1 PID SETT Seseto See selection O N See selection ONY See selection D11 INV Gel ell ol ng NI on BR oa rm oa O 77 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 224 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 4028 PID OUT MIN Defines the minimum value of PID output 100 0 500 0 500 0 Value in percent 0 1 4029 PID OUT MAX Defines the maximum value of PID output 00 0 500 0 500 0 Value in percent 0 1 4030 SLEEP BOOST Defines the boost time for the sleep boost step See parameter 4037 SLEEP BOOST STEP Reference 4030 SLEEP 4031 SLEEP 4 BOOST TIME BOOST STEP x a o 0 0 0 3600 0s Sleep boost time 0 1s 4031 SLEEP BOOST When the drive is entering sleep mode the reference PID 0 0 STEP setpoint is increased by this percentage for the time defined by parameter 4030 SLEEP BOOST TIME 0 0 100 0 Sleep boost step 1 0 1 4032 PID REF ACC Defines the time for the reference PID setpoint increase from 0 to 100 Note Parameters 4032 4036 are active even if the process PID set 2 41 PROCESS PID SET 2 is used 0 1800 0 s Acceleration time 0 1s 4033 PID REF DEC Defines the time for the reference PID setpoint decrease
108. IMUM FREQ lt MAXIMUM FREQ Allowed Allowed frequency range frequency range Allowed frequency range 500 0 500 0 Hz Minimum frequency 2008 MAXIMUM Defines the maximum limit for the drive output frequency FREQ 0 0 500 0 Hz Maximum frequency 2101 START Selects the motor starting method AUTO FUNCTION AUTO The drive starts the motor instantly from zero frequency If 1 flying start is required use selection SCAN START DC MAGN The drive pre magnetizes the motor with DC current before 2 the start The pre magnetizing time is defined by parameter 2103 DC MAGN TIME Note Starting to a rotating machine is not possible when DC MAGN is selected WARNING The drive will start after the set pre magnetizing time has passed even if the motor magnetization is not completed Ensure always in applications where a full break away torque is essential that the constant magnetizing time is long enough to allow generation of full magnetization and torque Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 184 Actual signals and parameters All parameters o Name Value Description Def FbEq TORQ BOOST Torque boost should be selected if a high break away 4 torque is required The drive pre magnetizes the motor with DC current before the start The pre magnetizing time is defined by parameter 2103 DC MAGN TIME Torque boost is applied at start Torque boost is stopped when output freq
109. IN Al 50 MAX MIN Setting When COMM gt 0 When COMM lt 0 Corrected reference Hz COMM Max limit REF 100 50 0 r Min limit 0 Min limit 0 50 100 COMM 0 MEPS Corrected reference Hz Corrected reference Hz COMM REF 100 50 0 Min limit Max limit Min limit 0 COMM 0 50 100 REF Corrected reference Hz Maximum limit is defined by parameter 7705 REF1 MAX 1108 REF2 MAX Minimum limit is defined by parameter 1104 REF1 MIN 7707 REF2 MIN Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 272 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus Setting When COMM gt 0 When COMM lt 0 COMM COMM Al 50 MAX MIN COMM Al 50 MAX MIN A11 MIN MIN Corrected reference Hz COMM Max limit REF 100 50 0 ea 0 Min limit e 2 0 Ale 50 Min limit Max limit Corrected reference Hz Corrected reference Hz COMM REF 100 50 0 Max limit Min limit A 9 ig Min limit Max limit A750 COMM Corrected reference Hz Maximum limit is defined by parameter 7705 REF1 MAX 1108 REF2 MAX Minimum limit is defined by parameter 7704 REF1 MIN 7707 REF2 MIN Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Fieldbus control wi
110. L SPEED SEL 1401 RELAY FAULT 1 FAULT 1 FAULT 1 FAULT 1 FAULT 1 FAULT 1 OUTPUT 1 2008 MAXIMUM 50 0Hz 50 0Hz 50 0Hz 50 0Hz 50 0Hz 50 0Hz 520Hz 52 0 Hz FREQ ioe 1 2 NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL INOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL SEL 2202 ACCELER 30 0s TIME 1 2203 DECELER 50s 30 0 s TIME 1 UE oca o Ee so no so Ps es aR HTOJSAN to 10 fio ps ps TIME 8116 AUX MOT 20 0s STOP D oo NOT SEL NOT SEL NOTSEL NOTSEL NOT SEL NOTSEL NOT SEL INTERV 8123 PFC ENABLE NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOTSEL NOT SEL NOTSEL ACTIVE SPFC ACTIVE Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 152 Actual signals and parameters Actual signals in the short parameter view Actual signals in the short parameter view No Name Value Description FbEq 04 FAULT HISTORY Fault history read only See group 04 FAULT HISTORY in the list of all parameters 0401 LAST FAULT Code of the latest fault Parameters in the short parameter view Parameters in the short parameter view No Name Value Description Default 11 REFERENCE Panel reference type external control location selection and SELECT external reference sources and limits See group 77 REFERENCE SELECT in the list of all parameters 1105 REF1 MAX Defines the maximum value for external reference REF 12 CONSTANT Constant speed drive output frequency selection and SPEEDS values See group 12 CONSTANT SPEEDS in the lis
111. MIT cs eAciceae eet ee neseaeae Soe era weet Nae AeA eee 150 Default values with different macros 0 0 0 eee eee nes 151 Actual signals in the short parameter view 0 00 cece ee eee 152 A UIE Fd Pe ura ee a er RU eee ee ee ee 152 Parameters in the short parameter VIEW 2 6 eee eens 152 REFERENCE SELECT ou sae dae ds io a bead hed Re ees eed 152 12 CONSTANT SPEEDS ape5 22465565 5466056 cee ee ra oe 54 oa een 152 Loon ee GAINES 225 cage trad oe chon eee eee eee eee ees Hebe weet 152 TE RELAY OUTPUTS oir rabia Save 152 16 SYSIEM CONTROLS cccn e6 44a 48i0 646402508 a ad eee nm ede dais due 152 O A tek 20S Gye Rite eet ease seen tee eden os eer oe Srdew ee ow Beene aided eesti act 152 RSF oO aia ton thats aries oes os Sle ee eradcle Searls jon Hale Os Se Pee cree eae He ae Geo ye ad 152 2 AOC REDE CEL 2ugnceaceeee seh A EEE aes abria a dada 153 STAR UF DATA eatery oe boc e eee sardinas dees eee 153 PAMAC MASONS soi e c55 0 52 eset te eh ces woke ares TE ee hh ath Se Gee ee Ae ch ae 154 OTOPERATING DATA 24404 4ue ede we oe eee aes eek Ae oes OEE EE ae 154 OS FB ACTUAL SIGNALS si han Oe Ole Sedo Bree he Khe Mile eR Gos tia 156 OE FAULT AIS WORRY cone dadas eee Goa od wile Sao ae 159 Pll paramet 222466452402 Tenn seroacs oth ere wan sash eues sesh ease esetreare 4 161 lO SIAR SIOPIOIR record a a e eee eee eee 161 11 REFERENCE gt ELECT 4 script deen ed end de eee ete i oe eae 163 T2 CONSTANT SPEEDS 222 2 lt auecdaddeses
112. OF TRIALS If delay time is set to zero the drive resets immediately 00 12005 Activates deactivates the automatic reset for the OVERCURRE overcurrent fault Automatically resets the fault NT OVERCURRENT after the delay set by parameter 3103 DELAY TIME DISABLE macte OOOO oOo o ENABLE 3105 AR Activates deactivates the automatic reset for the DISABLE OVERVOLTAG intermediate link overvoltage fault Automatically resets the E fault DC OVERVOLT after the delay set by parameter 3103 DELAY TIME DISABLE macte O O O O OoOo O O O o ENABLE 3106 AR Activates deactivates the automatic reset for the DISABLE UNDERVOLTA intermediate link undervoltage fault Automatically resets GE the fault DC UNDERVOLTAGE after the delay set by parameter 3703 DELAY TIME DISABLE inactive SSCSC ONSCSCS Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 200 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 3107 AR AI lt MIN Activates deactivates the automatic reset for fault AI lt MIN DISABLE analog input signal under the allowed minimum level Automatically resets the fault after the delay set by parameter 3703 DELAY TIME DISABLE inactive SSOSC OC ENABLE Active 1 WARNING The drive may restart even after a long stop if the analog input signal is restored Ensure that the use of this feature will not cause danger 31
113. OL Language Select Motor Set up Application Option Modules PID Control Speed Control EXT2 Start Stop Control Timed Functions Protections Output Signals PFC CONTROL Language Select Motor Set up Application Option Modules Speed Control EXT1 Speed Control EXT2 Start Stop Control Timed Functions Protections Output Signals SPFC CONTROL Language Select Motor Set up Application Option Modules Speed Control EXT1 Speed Control EXT2 Start Stop Control Timed Functions Protections Output Signals Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Program features 113 E List of the tasks and the relevant drive parameters Depending on the selection made in the Application task parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO the Start up Assistant decides which consequent tasks it suggests Set parameters Language Select Selecting the language 9901 Motor Set up Application Selecting the application macro Option Modules Activating the option modules Speed Control EXT1 Selecting the source for the speed output frequency reference If Al1 is used Setting analog input Al limits scale inversion Setting the reference limits Setting the frequency limits Setting the acceleration and deceleration times Selecting the source for the speed output frequency reference Speed Control EXT2 If Al1 is used Setting analog input Al limits scale inversion Setting the reference
114. OT SEL CTRL pressure supervision function The function uses the analog input selected by parameter 4402 Al MEASURE INLET NOT SEL Secondary inlet pressure supervision not used STOP Detection of very low inlet pressure stops the drive The 1 drive will start again if the pressure exceeds the supervision level FAULT Detection of very low inlet pressure trips the drive on a fault 4405 Al IN VERY Supervision level for the secondary inlet pressure 0 00 LO monitoring function See parameter 4407 INLET PROT CTRL 0 00 100 00 Supervision level 1 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Actual signals and parameters 231 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 4406 DI STATUS Selects the digital input for connection of a pressure switch NOT SEL INLET at the pump fan inlet The normal state is 1 active If the selected input switches to 0 inactive the action defined by parameter 4407 INLET PROT CTRL is executed after the delay set by parameter 4407 INLET CTRL DLY expires NOT SEL No digtalinput selected SiS o seteton oF 4407 INLET CTRL _ Sets the delay after which the action defined by parameter 60 0s DLY 4401 INLET PROT CTRL is taken on detection of low inlet pressure 0 1 1800 0s Delay time This reference is used after detection of low inlet pressure FORCED REF See parameter 4407 INLET PROT CTRL WARNING Make sure that it is safe to conti
115. OT SEL No constant speed in use O DI1 Speed defined by parameter 7202 CONST SPEED 1 is activated through digital input DI1 1 active O inactive DI2 Speed defined by parameter 1202 CONST SPEED 1 is activated through digital input DI2 1 active O inactive DI3 Speed defined by parameter 7202 CONST SPEED 1 is activated through digital input DI3 1 active O inactive DI4 Speed defined by parameter 1202 CONST SPEED 1 is activated through digital input DI4 1 active O inactive DI5 Speed defined by parameter 1202 CONST SPEED 1 is activated through digital input DI5 1 active O inactive 2 3 4 5 Constant speed selection through digital inputs DI1 and 7 DI2 1 DI active O DI inactive See selection DI1 2 8 See selection DI1 2 9 See selection DI1 2 Constant speed selection through digital inputs DI1 DI2 and 12 DI3 1 DI active O DI inactive 1202 CONST SPEED 1 or speed defined by parameter 1203 CONST SPEED 2 is used depending on parameter 7209 TIMED MODE SEL and timed function 1 See parameter group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS TIMED FUNC 2 See selection TIMED FUNC 1 1 TIMED FUNC 3 See selection TIMED FUNC 1 1 TIMED FUNC 4 See selection TIMED FUNC 1 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 168 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq TIMED Speed selection with TIMED FUNC 1 and TIMED FUNC 2
116. RS value increases with every read write command What to do e Check the device addresses No two devices on line may have the same address E Incorrect wiring If the communication wires are swapped terminal A on one device is connected to terminal B on another device parameter 5306 EFB OK MESSAGES value remains unchanged and parameter 5307 EFB CRC ERRORS increases What to do e Check the RS 232 485 interface connection Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Maintenance and hardware diagnostics 303 Maintenance and hardware diagnostics What this chapter contains The chapter contains preventive maintenance instructions and LED indicator descriptions Maintenance intervals If installed in an appropriate environment the drive requires very little maintenance The table lists the routine maintenance intervals recommended by ABB Maintenance Instruction Reforming of capacitors Every year when See Capacitors on page 305 stored Check of dustiness corrosion Every year and temperature Replacement of the cooling fan Every three years See Cooling fan on page 304 frame sizes R1 R4 Check and tightening of the Every six years See Power connections on page 305 power terminals Replacement of the battery in Every ten years See Changing the battery in the the Assistant Control Panel Assistant Control Panel on page 306 Consult your local ABB Service representat
117. RT FREQ Sets the frequency limit used to start the third auxiliary 3 motor See 8109 START FREQ 1 for a complete description U 60 0 Hz of the operation The third auxiliary motor starts if e two auxiliary motors are running e drive output frequency exceeds limit 8777 1 Hz e output frequency stays above the relaxed limit 8777 1 Hz for at least time 8775 AUX MOT START D 0 0 500 0 Hz Frequeney O 8112 LOW FREQ 1 Sets the frequency limit used to stop the first auxiliary motor E 25 0 Hz The first auxiliary motor stops if U 30 0 Hz e only one the first auxiliary motor is running e drive output frequency drops below limit 8712 1 Hz e output frequency stays below the relaxed limit 8772 1 Hz for at least time 8776 AUX MOT STOP D After the first auxiliary motor stops output frequency increases by value 8709 START FREQ 1 8772 LOW FREQ 1 In effect the output of the speed regulated motor increases to compensate for the loss of the auxiliary motor Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 246 Actual signals and parameters All parameters o Name Value Description Def FbEq See the figure where A 8109 START FREQ 1 8772 LOW FREQ 1 B Output frequency decrease during the stop delay C Diagram showing auxiliary motor s run status as frequency decreases 1 On Grey path Shows hysteresis if time is reversed the path backwards is not
118. Rey m Ko 0 1 O O O a m O TI C O E 6416 AL1RANGE20 Amplitude logger 1 current in percent of maximum current 0 0 TO30 20 30 distribution TA SSS 6417 AL1RANGE30 Amplitude logger 1 current in percent of maximum current 0 0 TO40 30 40 distribution 00 100 O OT E 0 6418 AL1RANGE40 Amplitude logger 1 current in percent of maximum current 0 TO50 40 50 distribution 0 1 0 0 100 0 fo 00 1000 A ET 6421 AL1RANGE70 Amplitude logger 1 current in percent of maximum current 0 0 TO80 70 80 distribution 0 1 A 6422 AL1RANGE80 Amplitude logger 1 current in percent of maximum current 0 0 TO90 80 90 distribution A 6423 AL1RANGE9O Amplitude logger 1 current in percent of maximum current 0 0 O 90 100 distribution A E O60 50 60 distribution 00 100 O LAT 6420 AL1RANGE6O Amplitude logger 1 current in percent of maximum current 0 0 TO7O 60 70 distribution 0 1 0 1 TA O HELL 6425 AL2RANGE10 Amplitude logger 2 selection with parameter 6404 0 0 TO20 10 20 distribution TA O SH 6426 AL2RANGE20 Amplitude logger 2 selection with parameter 6404 0 0 TO30 20 30 distribution Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 6424 AL2RANGEOT Amplitude logger 2 selection with parameter 6404 0 10 0 0 010 distribution Actual signal
119. Stop OQ Sat o X1B 17 ROCOM Relay output 1 as Ronc No fault Fault 1 19 RONO 1 See parameter group 12 CONSTANT 2 0 ramp times according to parameters SPEEDS 2202 and 2203 DI3 DI4 Operation parameter 1 ramp times according to parameters Set speed through Al1 2205 and 2206 O O Setspeed through Alt 1 0 Speed 1 1202 3 360 degree grounding under a clamp eae gt oan Tightening torque 0 4 N m 3 5 Ibf in Digital output max 100 mA y No fault Fault 1 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Electrical installation 53 E Connection procedure 1 Remove the terminal cover by simultaneously pushing the recess and sliding the cover off the frame 2 Digital signals Strip the outer insulation of the digital signal cable 360 degrees and ground the bare shield under the clamp 3 Connect the conductors of the cable to the appropriate terminals 4 For double shielded cables twist also the grounding conductors of each pair in the cable together and connect the bundle to the SCR terminal terminal 1 5 Analog signals Strip the outer insulation of the analog signal cable 360 degrees and ground the bare shield under the clamp 6 Connect the conductors to the appropriate terminals 7 Twist the grounding conductors of each pair in the analog signal cable together and connect the bundle to
120. UUUNTNTA OTT T EN TATATETTETTTTTTI U1l_3 380 480 V 3AUA0000039632 11 15 0 A f1 48 63 Hz U2 3 0 U1V 2 97A f2 0 500 Hz Type designation see section Type designation key on page 27 Degree of protection by enclosure IP and UL NEMA Nominal ratings see section Ratings on page 308 4 Serial number of format MYYWWRXXXX where M Manufacturer YY 08 09 10 for 2008 2009 2010 WW 01 02 03 for week 1 week 2 week 3 R A B C for product revision number XXXX Integer starting every week from 0001 CE marking and C Tick C UL US and RoHS marks the label of your drive shows the valid markings Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Operation principle and hardware description 27 Type designation key The type designation contains information on the specifications and configuration of the drive You find the type designation on the type designation label attached to the drive The first digits from the left express the basic configuration for example ACS310 03E 09A7 4 The optional selections are given after that separated by signs for example J404 The explanations of the type designation selections are described below ACS310 03E 09A7 4 J404 ACS310 product series A 3 phase 03 3 phase input Configuration E EMC filter connected 50 Hz frequency U EMC filter disconnected 60 Hz frequency Output curr
121. Value Description Def FbEq 2608 SLIP COMP Defines the slip gain for the motor slip compensation 0 RATIO control 100 means full slip compensation 0 means no slip compensation Other values can be used if a static speed error is detected despite the full slip compensation Example 35 Hz constant speed reference is given to the drive Despite the full slip compensation SLIP COMP RATIO 100 a manual tachometer measurement from the motor axis gives a speed value of 34 Hz The static speed error is 35 Hz 34 Hz 1 Hz To compensate the error the slip gain should be increased 0 200 Slip gain 2609 NOISE Enables the noise smoothing function Noise smoothing DISABLE SMOOTHING _ distributes the acoustic motor noise over a range of frequencies instead of a single tonal frequency resulting in lower peak noise intensity A random component with an average of 0 Hz is added to the switching frequency set by parameter 2606 SWITCHING FREQ Note Parameter has no effect if parameter 2606 SWITCHING FREQ is set to 16 kHz DISABLE Disabled O ENABLE Enabled 1 2610 USER Defines the first voltage point of the custom U f curve at the 19 of DEFINED U1 frequency defined by parameter 2677 USER DEFINED F1 Uy See section Custom U f ratio on page 128 0 120 of Un V Voltage 2611 USER Defines the first frequency point of the custom U f curve 10 0 Hz DEFINED F1 010 600 0H2 Frequency O ET 2612 USER Defines the second volt
122. XTERNAL External reference REF1 in Hz 0 REF 1 0112 EXTERNAL External reference REF2 in percent Depending on the use 1 0 1 REF 2 100 equals the maximum motor speed nominal motor torque or maximum process reference 0113 CTRL Active control location 0 LOCAL 1 EXT1 2 EXT2 See 1 1 LOCATION section Local control vs external control on page 115 0114 RUN TIME R Elapsed drive running time counter hours Runs when the 1 1 h drive is modulating The counter can be reset by pressing the UP and DOWN buttons simultaneously when the control panel is in the Parameter mode 0115 KWH kWh counter The counter can be reset by pressing UP and 1 1 kWh COUNTER R DOWN buttons simultaneously when the control panel is in the Parameter mode 0116 APPL BLK Application block output signal Value is from either PFC 1 0 1 OUTPUT control if PFC control is active or from parameter 0772 EXTERNAL REF 2 0120 Al 1 Relative value of analog input Al1 in percent 1 0121 Al 2 Relative value of analog input Al2 in percent 1 0 0 mA 0 0 0126 PID 1 OUTPUT Output value of the process PID1 controller in percent 1 Fa V 1 aa Y de l O NE I Oo NIO E E 0127 PID 2 OUTPUT Output value of the PID2 controller in percent 1 0128 PID 1 SETPNT Setpoint signal reference for the process PID1 controller Unit depends on parameter 4006 UNIT 4007 UNIT SCALE and 4027 PID 1 PARAM SET settings 0129 PI
123. a nol O AETA 2 wbZly Lely A LZOv PLOY INO did D onjen y 5 YMS Laid uonoajes 9 ye did Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 136 Program features E Settings 107 CI 9902 1107 REF2 minimum limit 1501 PID2 output external controller connection to AO 9902 PID control macro selection Group 40 PROCESS PID SET PID1 settings 1 41 PROCESS PID SET 2 Group 42 EXT TRIM PID PID2 settings E Diagnostics Actual signal Additional information 0126 0127 PID 1 2 output value 0128 0129 PID 1 2 setpoint value 0130 0131 PID 1 2 feedback value 0132 0133 PID 1 2 deviation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Program features 137 Sleep function for the process PID PID1 control The sleep function operates on a 2 ms time level The block diagram below illustrates the sleep function enable disable logic The sleep function can be put into use only when the PID control is active Select_ NOT SEL ali C And Cana Pelay refActive 4024 PIDCtriActive modulating Delay S R R 5320 B1 5320 B2 1 S ER R INTERNAL lt t StartRq d lt 1 R Dl 4022 4026 Ea ESA 1 1 Activate sleeping 0 Deactivate sleeping lt 1 2 1 Activate sleep boost 0 Deactivate sleep boost Mot speed Actual speed of the motor refActive The reference EXT REF2 is in us
124. aces the displayed value with the default value CANCEL 00 00 SAVE Select the changed parameter on the list with keys 4S LOC uUPAR EDIT To accept the new value press T If the new value is the default value the parameter is removed from the list of changed parameters To cancel the new value and keep the original press Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 92 Control panels E Fault Logger mode In the Fault Logger mode you can e view the drive fault history of maximum ten faults after a power off only the three latest faults are kept in the memory e see the details of the three latest faults after a power off the details of only the most recent fault is kept in the memory e read the help text for the fault e start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control How to view faults Display Go to the Main menu by pressing if you are in the Output mode otherwise by pressing repeatedly wa until you get to the Main menu CHANGED PAR EXIT 100 00 ENTER Go to the Fault Logger mode by selecting FAULT LOC a F AULT I 06 LOGGER on the menu with keys 4 5 and S Y7 and iF pressing Sul The display shows the fault log starting m 19 Je 05 as ne Y with the latest fault 6 Al 1 hee The number on the row is the fault code according to which the causes and corrective actions are listed in EXIT 100 00 DETAIL ch
125. age point of the custom U f curve at 38 of DEFINED U2 the frequency defined by parameter 2673 USER DEFINED Uy F2 See section Custom U f ratio on page 128 0 120 of Un V Voltage 2613 USER Defines the second frequency point of the custom U f curve 20 0 Hz DEFINED F2 010 600 0H2 Frequency OA 2614 USER Defines the third voltage point of the custom U f curve at the 47 5 of DEFINED U3 frequency defined by parameter 2675 USER DEFINED F3 Uy See section Custom U f ratio on page 128 0 120 of Un V Voltage 2615 USER Defines the third frequency point of the custom U f curve 25 0 Hz DEFINED F3 000 600 0H2 Frequency O ET 2616 USER Defines the fourth voltage point of the custom U f curve at 76 of DEFINED U4 the frequency defined by parameter 2677 USER DEFINED Uy F4 See section Custom U f ratio on page 128 0 120 of Un V Voltage 2617 USER Defines the fourth frequency point of the custom U f curve 40 0 Hz DEFINED F4 010 600 0H2 Frequency OA Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Actual signals and parameters 193 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 2618 FW VOLTAGE Defines the voltage of the U f curve when frequency is equal 95 of to or exceeds the motor nominal frequency 9907 MOTOR Uyn NOM FREQ See section Custom U f ratio on page 128 0 120 of Un V Voltage 2619 DC Enables or disables the DC voltage stabilizer Th
126. air conditioning is on for an extra hour Parameter femms OOS S E Settings 1401 Timed function status indicated through relay output RO 1 With option MREL 01 only Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Program features 143 User load curve The user can specify a load curve motor torque as a function of frequency for supervision The curve is defined by five points Supervision can be set for the torque dropping below the underload curve exceeding the overload curve or both A fault is generated if the torque has been out of the allowed area for longer than the user defined time limit An alarm is generated if the torque has been out of the allowed area for longer than the half of the user defined time limit Motor torque Overload area Torque Torque Torque Torque que high 4 high 5 high 1 high 2 high 3 Allowed operating area Torque low 5 Torque low 3 Torque low 1 Output Underload area frequency Hz Freq 1 Freq 2 Freq 3 Freq 4 Freq 5 E Settings Additional information Group 37 USER LOAD CURVE User load curve settings E Diagnostics Actual signal Additional information 0105 Motor torque USER LOAD CURVE Out of allowed area for longer than half of the defined time limit USER LOAD CURVE Out of allowed area for longer than the defined time limit PAR USER LOAD C Incorrect user load curve parameter
127. al information 9902 PID control activation 4022 4026 4030 4037 Sleep function settings 4122 4126 4130 4131 E Diagnostics Additional information 1401 PID sleep PID sleep function status throughRO1 status PID sleep function status throughRO1 RO 1 Es II PID sleep function status through RO 2 4 With option MREL 01 only Alam Additional information information SLEEP Additional intormation A mode Motor temperature measurement through the standard l O This section describes the temperature measurement of one motor when the drive I O terminals are used as the connection interface Motor temperature can be measured using PT100 or PTC sensors connected to analog input and output One sensor Three sensors WARNING According to IEC 664 the connection of the motor temperature sensor requires double or reinforced insulation between motor live parts and the sensor Reinforced insulation entails a clearance and creepage distance of 8 mm 400 500 V AC equipment If the assembly does not fulfill the requirement e the I O board terminals must be protected against contact and they may not be connected to other equipment or e the temperature sensor must be isolated from the I O terminals Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 140 Program features Itis also possible to monitor motor temperature by connecting a PTC sensor and a thermistor re
128. al to value 36 48 s MODE 0 0 Disables the Autochange function 0 0 NOT SEL 0 1 336 h The operating time interval the time when the 0 1 336 0 h start signal is on between automatic motor changes Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Actual signals and parameters 251 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 8119 AUTOCHNG Sets an upper limit as a percent of output capacity forthe 50 0 LEVEL autochange logic When the output from the PID PFC control block exceeds this limit autochange is prevented For example use this parameter to deny autochange when the Pump Fan system is operating near maximum capacity Autochange overview The purpose of the autochange operation is to equalize duty time between multiple motors used in a system At each autochange operation a different motor takes a turn connected to the drive output the speed regulated motor The starting order of the other motors rotates The Autochange function requires e external switch gear for changing the drive s output power connections e parameter 8720 INTERLOCKS gt 0 Autochange is performed when e the running time since the previous autochange reaches the time set by 8778 AUTOCHNG INTERV e the PFC input is below the level set by this parameter 8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL Note The drive always coasts to stop when autochange is performed In an autochange the Autocha
129. ameters 1401 1403 and 1410 with value 31 PFC e the Autochange function status disabled if 8778 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 and otherwise enabled No Autochange disabled Autochange enabled PFC Parameter 8118 Parameter 8118 relays O Big DI4 Free allowed ME Speed reg motor Not allowed nn DI4 Free DI5 First PFC relay 8121 REG BYPASS Selects Regulator by pass control When enabled NO CTRL Regulator by pass control provides a simple control mechanism without a PID regulator Use Regulator by pass control only in special applications fout pt A gt B gt C A No auxiliary motors running B One auxiliary motor running C Two auxiliary motors running Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 258 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq Example In the diagram below the pumping station s outlet flow is controlled by the measured inlet flow A Con i 3 tactors Inlet pipe y Disables Regulator by pass control The drive uses the normal PFC reference 1106 REF2 SELECT Enables Regulator by pass control The process PID regulator is bypassed Actual value of PID is used as the PFC reference input Normally 1106 REF2 SELECT is used as the PFC reference The drive uses the feedback signal defined by 4074 FBK SEL or 4774 for the PFC frequency reference The first figure fo
130. ameters 2707 START FUNCTION and 2703 DC MAGN TIME Maintenance trigger A maintenance trigger can be activated to show a notice on the panel display when eg drive power consumption has exceeded the defined trigger point E Settings Parameter group 29 MAINTENANCE TRIG Acceleration and deceleration ramps Two user selectable acceleration and Motor speed deceleration ramps are available It is possible to adjust the acceleration deceleration times and the ramp shape Switching between the two ramps can be controlled via a digital input or fieldbus Linear The available ramp shape alternatives are Linear and S curve Linear Suitable for drives requiring steady or slow acceleration deceleration S curve Ideal for conveyors carrying fragile loads or other applications where a smooth transition is required when changing the speed E Settings Parameter group 22 ACCEL DECEL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Program features 127 Critical Speeds A Critical Speeds function is available for applications where it is necessary to avoid certain motor speeds drive output frequencies or speed bands output frequency bands because of eg mechanical resonance problems The user can define three critical frequencies or frequency bands E Settings Parameter group 25 CRITICAL SPEEDS Constant speeds It is possible to define seven positive constant speeds Constant speeds ar
131. an e monitor actual values of up to three group 01 OPERATING DATA signals one signal at a time e start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control You get to the Output mode by pressing C7 until the display shows text OUTPUT at the bottom The display shows the value of one group 07 OPERATING DATA signal The unit is shown on the REY 4 0 1 le right Page 75 tells how to select up to three signals to OUTPUT F WD be monitored in the Output mode The table below shows how to view them one at a time How to browse the monitored signals Step action Cy If more than one signals have been selected to be monitored see page 75 you can browse them in the Output mode To browse the signals forward press key a repeatedly To browse them backward press key Cv repeatedly Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Control panels 73 E Reference mode In the Reference mode you can e set the frequency reference e start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control How to set the frequency reference Step Atom O y Go to the Main menu by pressing 37 if you are in the Output mode otherwise by pressing 777 repeatedly until you see MENU at the bottom If the drive is in remote control REM shown on the left switch to local control by pressing 2 The display briefly shows LoC before switching to local con
132. an reset the fault or alarm in the Output or Fault mode see chapter Fault tracing on page 287 After the power is switched on the panel is in the Output mode where you can start stop change the REM 4 0 1 des direction switch between local and remote control and 0UTPUT F WD monitor up to three actual values one at a time To do other tasks go first to the Main menu and select the appropriate mode How to do common tasks The table below lists common tasks the mode in which you can perform them and the page number where the steps to do the task are described in detail ask Mode Page Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Control panels 71 How to start stop and switch between local and remote control You can start stop and switch between local and remote control in any mode To be able to start or stop the drive the drive must be in local control eee PU e To switch between remote control REM shown on the left and local control LOC shown on the left press Note Switching to local control can be disabled with parameter 7606 LOCAL LOCK After pressing the key the display briefly shows message LoC or rE as appropriate before returning to the previous display The very first time the drive is powered up it is in remote control REM and controlled through the drive I O terminals To switch to local control LOC and control the driv
133. and motor cable in short circuit situations 41 Protecting the drive motor cable and input power cable against thermal overload 42 Protecting the motor against thermal overload 0 00 eee 42 Using residual current devices RCD with the drive 0 000 42 Implementing a bypass connection 00 ccc eee eee ens 42 Protecting the contacts of relay outputs 0 0 0 cece eee 43 6 Electrical installation What this chapter contains 2c 1 02 lt 20ded 0000 isser seed aeia aeeoeene ean nee e de 4 45 Checking the insulation of the assembly 0 0 0 0 ces 45 DIV 0 pines esa a Si lo od Eden Be Gd ee ww eae Ree ide eee ee 45 input power cable 24 6625 i6 604484 Hoek 44545 4e 24 Ra Oo a 45 Motor and motor Cable 2 664 ccc6eb eb ee cease eee eee eee eb wee eee ew neous 46 Checking the compatibility with IT ungrounded and corner grounded TN systems 46 Connecting the power Cables 00 eee eee nent n eens 47 Connection MAA susi ce Wet wea Ww dR soe a Wee Khe Hed He a ae a we 47 Connection procedure cn saa aa de hee wale Saw hoe dow a ee oe RS ee HE A See ow 48 Connecting the Control cables aicorosirasracra iaa feed sawed Ae a a Che 2x 49 OTIS esos cea aa sica o aaa wee dia one do 49 Default I O connection diagram ooocoooooco eee eens 52 Connection procedure 64 4446 vs Sebo se kee EK ERE ERE RE ER ER eR a ES 53 Connecting the embedded fieldbus
134. anel as the reference source Stop command resets the reference to zero the R stands for reset The reference is not saved if the control source is changed from EXT1 to EXT2 from EXT2 to EXT 1 KEYPAD NC Defines the control panel as the reference source Stop command does not reset the reference to zero The reference is stored The reference is not saved if the control source is changed from EXT1 to EXT2 from EXT2 to EXT1 DI4U 5D See selection DI3U 4D DI4U 5D NC See selection DI3U 4D NC FREQ INPUT Frequency input 1104 REF MIN Defines the minimum value for external reference REF1 0 Hz Corresponds to the minimum setting of the used source signal 0 0 500 0 Hz Minimum value in Hz Example Analog input Al1 is selected as the reference source value of parameter 1103 is Al1 The reference minimum and maximum correspond to the 7307 MINIMUM Al1 and 7302 MAXIMUM AI settings as follows REF Hz N rms Ww CO CO N N i mk ok NO O N O al Dh O REF1 MAX 1105 l l l REF1 MIN Oo 1104 1302 1301 All signal REF1 MIN 1301 1302 1104 REF1 MAX 1105 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 166 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 1105 REF1 MAX Defines the maximum value for external reference REF1 E 50 0 Hz Corresponds to the maximum setting of the used
135. apter Fault tracing on page 287 To see the details of a fault select it with keys As and Cv and press ST To show the help text press s Scroll the help text with LOC DIAGNOSTICS keys A and SY 7 Check comm lines After reading the help press s to return to the d connections previous display Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Control panels 93 E Time and Date mode In the Time and Date mode you can e show or hide the clock e change date and time display formats e set the date and time e enable or disable automatic clock transitions according to the daylight saving changes e start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control The Assistant Control Panel contains a battery to ensure the function of the clock when the panel is not powered by the drive How to show or hide the clock change display formats set the date and time and enable or disable clock transitions due to daylight saving changes O A Go to the Main menu by pressing if you are in the hw Output mode otherwise by pressing repeatedly 73 gt until you get to the Main menu 2 Go to the Time and Date mode by selecting TIME amp DATE on the menu with keys a and SY 7 and pressing Sul EXI 00 00 SEL e To show hide the clock select CLOCK VISIBLILITY LOC WCLOCK VISIB 1 on the menu press select Show clock Hide clock and pre
136. arameter 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM to the index of the signal parameter in group 01 OPERATING DATA number of the parameter without the leading zero eg 105 means parameter 0105 TORQUE Value 0 means that no signal is displayed Repeat for signals 2 3408 SIGNAL2 PARAM and 3 3415 SIGNAL3 PARAM Select how you want the signals to be displayed as a decimal number or a bar graph For decimal numbers you can specify the decimal point location or use the decimal point location and unit of the source signal setting 9 DIRECT For details see parameter 3404 Signal 1 parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM Signal 2 parameter 3477 OUTPUT2 DSP FORM Signal 3 parameter 3478 OUTPUT3 DSP FORM Select the units to be displayed for the signals This has no effect if parameter 3404 3411 3418 is set to 9 DIRECT For details see parameter 3405 Signal 1 parameter 3405 OUTPUT1 UNIT Signal 2 parameter 3472 OUTPUT2 UNIT Signal 3 parameter 3479 OUTPUT3 UNIT LOC UPAR EDIT 3401 SIGNAL PARAM OUTPUT FREQ EREI CANCEL 1 00 00 SAVE LOC wPAR EDIT 3408 SI GNAL2_ PARAM 104 CANCEL 1 00 00 SAVE LOC UPAR EDIT 3415 SIGNAL3 PARAM OC UPAR EDIT 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM DI RECT 8 CANCEL 00 00 SAVE LOC UPAR EDIT 3405 OUTPUT UNIT Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 88 Control panels Display Select the scalings for the signals by sp
137. arameter 4025 WAKE UP DEV 4126 WAKE UP See parameter 4026 WAKE UP DELAY DELAY 4128 PIDOUT MIN See parameter 4028 PID OUT MIN 4129 PID OUT MAX See parameter 4029 PID OUT MAX 4130 SLEEP BOOST See parameter 4030 SLEEP BOOST TIME i 4131 SLEEP BOOST See parameter 4037 SLEEP BOOST STEP STEP 4136 INTERNAL See parameter 4036 INTERNAL SETPNT2 SETPNT2 4137 INTERNAL See parameter 4037 INTERNAL SETPNT3 SETPNT3 4138 INTERNAL See parameter 4038 INTERNAL SETPNT4 SETPNT4 4139 INTSETPNT See parameter 4039 INT SETPNT SEL UU SEL 4201 GAIN See See parameter 4001 GAIN See parameter 4001 GAIN GAIN 4202 INTEGRATION See parameter 4002 INTEGRATION TIME m TIME 4203 DERIVATION See parameter 4003 DERIVATION TIME TIME Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 228 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 4204 PID DERIV See parameter 4004 PID DERIV FILTER FILTER 4205 ERROR See parameter 4005 ERROR VALUE INV VALUE INV 1206 UNITS Ses parameter 4008 UNITS 1207 UNIT SCALE See parameter 4007 UNIT SCALE 1205 0 VALUE See parameter 40080 VALUE 1209 100 VALUE See parameter 4009 100 VALUE 4210 SET POINT See parameter 4010 SET POINT SEL UN SEL 4211 INTERNAL See parameter 4011 INTERNAL SETPNT SETPNT 4212 SETPOINT See parameter 4072 SETPOINT MIN 4213 SETPOINT See parameter 4013 SETPOINT MAX i MAX 421
138. ary motors are added and adjusts the speed regulated motor output up as auxiliary motors are taken off line Provides Interlock functions if enabled NOT SEL Disabled 0 ACTIVE PFC control enabled SPFC ACTIVE SPFC control enabled Soft Pump and Fan Control is used 2 for alternation applications where lower pressure peaks are desirable when a new auxiliary motor is started 8124 ACC IN AUX _ Sets the PFC acceleration time for a zero to maximum NOT SEL STOP frequency ramp This PFC acceleration ramp e applies to the speed regulated motor when an auxiliary motor is switched off e replaces the acceleration ramp defined in group 22 ACCEL DECEL applies only until the output of the regulated motor increases by an amount equal to the output of the switched off auxiliary motor Then the acceleration ramp defined in group 22 ACCEL DECEL applies fouT A A speed regulated motor accelerating using group 22 ACCEL DECEL parameters 2202 or 2205 B speed regulated motor decelerating using group 22 ACCEL DECEL parameters 2203 or 2206 At aux motor start soeed regulated motor decelerates using 8725 DEC IN AUX START At aux motor stop speed regulated motor accelerates using 8124 ACC IN AUX STOP 0 0 NOT SEL 0 0 Not selected 1 0 1s 0 1 1800 0s 0 1 1800 s Activates this function using the value entered as the acceleration time Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info cl
139. atures PFC and SPFC control E PFC control Pump and Fan Control PFC control switches auxiliary pumps on and off as required by capacity changes Autochange function alternates between pumps to keep the duty times of the pumps equal Interlocks function enables the drive to detect if any of the pumps are unavailable eg switched off for maintenance in which case the next available pump is started instead The drive controls the motor of pump 1 varying the motor speed to control the pump capacity This motor is the speed regulated motor Direct line connections power the motor of pump 2 and pump 3 etc The drive switches pump 2 and then pump 3 etc on and off as needed These motors are auxiliary motors The drive PID control uses two signals a process reference and an actual value feedback The PID controller adjusts the speed frequency of the first pump such that the actual value follows the process reference When demand defined by the process reference exceeds the first motor s capacity user defined as a frequency limit the PFC control automatically starts an auxiliary pump The PFC also reduces the speed of the first pump to account for the auxiliary pump s addition to total output Then as before the PID controller adjusts the speed frequency of the first pump such that the actual value follows the process reference If demand continues to increase PFC adds additional auxiliary pumps using the same process Wh
140. b www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Application macros 105 Motor Potentiometer macro This macro provides a cost effective interface for PLCs that vary the speed of the motor using only digital signals To enable the macro set the value of parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO to 4 MOTOR POT For the parameter default values see section Default values with different macros on page 757 If you use other than the default connections presented below see section I O terminals on page 49 E Default I O connections X1A a 5 GND Analog input cirouit common 7 AO Motor speed value 0 20 mA O E 2 27 sio volage output 24 VOC max 200 mA 10 6ND Auxiliary voltage output common ii pcom biata nmut common f2 o Stop o stat SS 13 p12 Forward 0 Reverse 414 pis Speedreterenceup s Da4 Speed reference down T Tie pis constant speed parameter 1202 B 17 ROCOM Relay output 1 18 roNC h No fault Fault 1 8 19 RONO so bose Digital output max 100 mA a eg No fault Fault 1 22 DOGND 1 If DI3 and D14 are both active or inactive the 2 360 degree grounding under a clamp speed reference is unchanged Tightening torque 0 4 N m 3 5 Ibf in The existing speed reference is stored during stop and power down Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 106 Application macros Hand Auto macro This macro can be used w
141. bus Communication profiles The embedded fieldbus supports three communication profiles e DCU communication profile e ABB Drives Limited communication profile e ABB Drives Full communication profile The DCU profile extends the control and status interface to 32 bits and it is the internal interface between the main drive application and the embedded fieldbus environment The ABB Drives Limited is based on the PROFIBUS interface ABB Drives Full profile supports two Control Word bits not supported by the ABB DRV LIM implementation Modbus Embedded fieldbus network RS 232 485 Drive ABB DRV FULL LIMITED ABB Drives profile DCU profile Actual values selected by par 5310 5317 DCU PROFILE DCU profile Control Status Word DCU profile i Data conversion E for REF1 2 Actual values selected by par 5310 5317 E ABB Drives communication profile Two implementations of the ABB Drives communication profile are available ABB Drives Full and ABB Drives Limited The ABB Drives communication profile is active when parameter 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE is set to ABB DRV FULL or ABB DRV LIM The Control Word and Status Word for the profile are described below The ABB Drives communication profiles can be used through both EXT1 and EXT2 The Control Word commands are in effect when parameter 7007 EXT1 COMMANDS or 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS whichever control location is active is set to COMM Phone 800 8
142. c PID output associated with each motor Starting order counter The operation of the starting order counter e The relay output parameter definitions 1401 1403 and 1410 establish the initial motor sequence The lowest parameter number with a value 31 PFC identifies the relay connected to 1PFC the first motor and so on e Initially 1PFC speed regulated motor 2PFC 1st auxiliary motor etc e The first autochange shifts the sequence to 2PFC speed regulated motor 3PFC 1st auxiliary motor 1PFC last auxiliary motor e The next autochange shifts the sequence again and so on e If the autochange cannot start a needed motor because all inactive motors are interlocked the drive displays an alarm 2015 PFC LOCK e When the drive power supply is switched off the counter preserves the current Autochange rotation positions in permanent memory When power is restored the Autochange rotation starts at the position stored in memory e If the PFC relay configuration is changed or if the PFC enable value is changed the rotation is reset according to parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Actual signals and parameters 253 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq Output frequency Noaux 1aux 2aux motors motor motors Area Autochange is allowed Interlock function is enabled an interlock is
143. call the data at a later time For example two user macros can be used when switching between two different motors is required Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Application macros 101 Summary of the l O connections of the application macros The following table gives the summary of the default I O connections of all application macros Input output ABB Alternate Motor Hand Auto PID Standard Potentiom Control Al Freq ref Speed ref Speed ref Speed ref Speed ref Ext ref 1 0 Proc ref Ext ref 2 PID PID PFC Hand Hand Hand Speed ref Process Process Auto value value Output Speed Speed Speed Speed Speed Output freq freq Stop Start Start Start fwd Stop Start Stop Start Stop Start Stop Start pulse Hand Hand Hand Fwd Rev Stop Start rev Fwd Rev Fwd Rev Hand PID Hand pulse Hand PID PFC Const Fwd Rev Const speed speed input 1 input 1 Const Const Const Speed ref Fwd Rev Run Interlock speed speed speed down Auto enable input 2 input 1 input 2 Ramp pair Const Ramp pair Const Stop Start Stop Start Stop Start selection speed selection speed 1 Auto PID PID PFC input 2 1 1 1 Fault Fault 1 Fault Fault Fault Fault PFC Control Fault 1 SPFC Control PFC Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info cl
144. cceleration deceleration ramp pair 1 defined by parameters 2202 2204 Force ramp output to zero o No operation SoSo SS o No operation SSS Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 284 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus DCU Profile Control Word parameter 0301 Value RAMP_IN_O 14 REQ_LOCALLOC Reserved Force ramp input to zero No operation Enable local lock Entering the local control mode is disabled LOC REM key of the panel No operation DCU PROFILE Control Word parameter 0302 command word 16 FBLOCAL CTL 1 i requested See example in bit 16 FBLOCAL_CTL i Enable start Effective if parameter 1608 setting is COMM 1 No Start Enable Enable start Effective if parameter 1609 setting is COMM Reserved REF_CONST 1 Constant speed reference request This is an internal control bit Only for supervision 28 REF_AVE 1 Average speed reference request This is an internal control bit Only for supervision 9 Fieldbus local mode for Control Word requested Example If the drive is in remote control and the start stop direction command source is DI for external control location 1 EXT1 by setting bit 16 to value 1 the start stop direction is controlled by the fieldbus This is an internal control bit Only for supervision ne c D REQ_STARTINH Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email
145. chapter Technical data on page 307 Automatic resets The drive can automatically reset itself after overcurrent overvoltage undervoltage external and analog input below a minimum faults The Automatic Resets must be activated by the user E Settings Additional information 31 AUTOMATIC RESET Automatic reset settings E Diagnostics Additional information AUTORESET Automatic reset alarm Supervisions The drive monitors whether certain user selectable variables are within the user defined limits The user may set limits for speed current etc The supervision status can be indicated through relay or digital output The supervision function outputs can be used for triggering some drive functionality start stop sleep pump cleaning The supervision functions operate on a 2 ms time level E Settings Parameter group 32 SUPERVISION E Diagnostics Actual signal Additional information 1001 1002 EXT1 EXT2 start stop according to supervision functions 1401 Supervision status through RO 1 1402 1403 1410 Supervision status through RO 2 4 With option MREL 01 only 1805 Supervision status through DO 4022 4122 Sleep start according to supervision functions 4601 Pump clean trigger according to supervision functions Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Program features 133 Parameter lock The user can prevent parameter adjustment by activating the parameter l
146. clrwtr com 148 Program features Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Actual signals and parameters 149 Actual signals and parameters What this chapter contains The chapter describes the actual signals and parameters and gives the fieldbus equivalent values for each signal parameter It also contains a table of the default values for the different macros Note When the control panel is in the short parameter view ie when parameter 1611 PARAMETER VIEW is set to 2 SHORT VIEW the control panel only shows a subset of all signals and parameters The list of these signals and parameters starts on page 152 To be able to view all actual signals and parameters set parameter 1611 PARAMETER VIEW to 3 LONG VIEW The descriptions of all actual signals and parameters start on pages 754 and 767 respectively Terms and abbreviations Actual signal Signal measured or calculated by the drive Can be monitored by the user No user setting possible Groups 01 04 contain actual signals Def Parameter default value Parameter A user adjustable operation instruction of the drive Groups 10 99 contain parameters Note Parameter selections are shown on the Basic Control Panel as integer values Eg parameter 7007 EXT1 COMMANDS selection COMM is shown as value 10 which is equal to the fieldbus equivalent FbEq FbEq Fieldbus equivalent The scaling between the value and the in
147. control the drive through the I O interface The table below instructs how to operate the drive through the digital and analog inputs when e the motor start up is performed and e the default standard parameter settings are valid Displays of the Basic Control Panel are shown as an example If you need to change the direction of rotation check that parameter 1003 DIRECTION is set to 3 REQUEST Ensure that the control connections are wired See section Default I O connection diagram on page 52 according to the connection diagram given for the ABB Standard macro Ensure that the drive is in remote control Press key In remote control the panel to switch between remote and local control display shows text REM Start by switching digital input DI1 on Basic Control Panel Text FWD starts flashing fast and stops after the setpoint is reached Assistant Control Panel The arrow starts rotating It is dotted until the setpoint is reached Regulate the drive output frequency motor speed by adjusting the voltage of analog input Al1 REM OUTPUT Reverse direction Switch digital input DI2 on Forward direction Switch digital input DI2 off Switch digital input DI1 off The motor stops Basic Control Panel Text FWD starts flashing slowly Assistant Control Panel The arrow stops rotating Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 66 Start up and control with I O
148. crews 2 For frame sizes RO R2 fasten the I O clamping plate to the clamping plate with the provided screws Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Planning the electrical installation 35 Planning the electrical Installation What this chapter contains The chapter contains the instructions that you must follow when checking the compatibility of the motor and drive and selecting cables protections cable routing and way of operation for the drive Note The installation must always be designed and made according to applicable local laws and regulations ABB does not assume any liability whatsoever for any installation which breaches the local laws and or other regulations Furthermore if the recommendations given by ABB are notfollowed the drive may experience problems that the warranty does not cover Implementing the AC power line connection See the requirements in section Electric power network specification on page 314 Use a fixed connection to the AC power line WARNING As the leakage current of the device typically exceeds 3 5 mA a fixed installation is required according to IEC 61800 5 1 Selecting the supply disconnecting device disconnecting means Install a hand operated supply disconnecting device disconnecting means between the AC power source and the drive The disconnecting device must be of a type that can be locked to the open position
149. cted by parameter 3475 SIGNAL3 PARAM See parameter 3402 SIGNAL1 MIN X X Setting range depends on parameter 3475 SIGNAL3 PARAM setting 3421 OUTPUT3 Sets the maximum display value for the signal selected by MAX parameter 3475 SIGNAL3 PARAM See parameter 3402 SIGNAL1 MIN X Setting range depends on parameter 3415 setting 3501 SENSOR Activates the motor temperature measurement function and NONE TYPE selects the sensor type See also parameter group 75 ANALOG OUTPUTS NONE The function is inactive 1 x PT100 The function is active The temperature is measured with one Pt 100 sensor Analog output AO feeds constant current through the sensor The sensor resistance increases as the motor temperature rises as does the voltage over the sensor The temperature measurement function reads the voltage through analog input Al1 2 and converts it to degrees centigrade 2 x PT100 The function is active Temperature is measured using two Pt 100 sensors See selection 1 x PT100 3 x PT100 The function is active Temperature is measured using three 3 Pt 100 sensors See selection 1 x PT100 E q E 1 2 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 208 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq PTC The function is active The temperature is supervised using 4 PTC sensor Analog output AO feeds constant current through the sensor The resis
150. ction determined by digital the sign of COMM command eg digital input control panel par 1003 Resultant Resultant DIRECTION REF 1 2 REF 1 2 FORWARD Fieldbus Fieldbus Ref 1 2 100 10 Ref 1 2 163 Max ref par 1003 Resultant DIRECTION REF 1 2 erie REVERSE Max Ref 163 Fieldbus 100 Fieldbus ref 1 2 ref 1 2 Max Ref Max Ref par 1003 Resultant Resultant DIRECTION REF1 2 REF1 2 REQUEST Direction Command Max ref Max ref FORWARD Fieldbus ref 1 2 Fieldbus 100 ref 1 2 100 163 163 Max ref Max ref Direction Command REVERSE E Actual value scaling The scaling of the integers sent to the master as Actual Values depend on the selected function See chapter Actual signals and parameters on page 149 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 275 Modbus mapping The following Modbus function codes are supported by the drive ce Additional information ene ie dec Reads the contents of registers in a slave device Parameter sets control status and reference values are mapped as holding registers Read Multiple Holding Registers Write Single Holding Register Writes to a single register in a slave device Parameter sets control status and reference values are mapped as holding registers port must be initialized and restart
151. customization of the parameter list eg selected parameters can be hidden For more information see MFDT 01 FlashDrop User s Manual 3AFE68591074 English USER S1 User 1 macro loaded into use Before loading check that LOAD the saved parameter settings and the motor model are suitable for the application User 2 macro loaded into use Before loading check that 2 the saved parameter settings and the motor model are suitable for the application USER S2 SAVE value on the motor rating plate The drive cannot supply the motor with a voltage greater than the input power voltage Note that the output voltage is not limited by the nominal motor voltage but increased linearly up to value of the input voltage Output voltage Input voltage 9905 Output frequency 9907 WARNING Never connect a motor to a drive which is connected to power line with voltage level higher than the rated motor voltage 115 345 V Voltage 200 V units Note The stress on the motor insulations is always 200 600 V dependent on the drive supply voltage This also applies to 400 VE units the case where the motor voltage rating is lower than the 230 690 V rating of the drive and the supply of the drive 400 V U units 9906 MOTOR NOM Defines the nominal motor current Must be equal to the lon CURR value on the motor rating plate 02 20 by lourent OOOO Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email
152. d As flow increases the pressure at the output end of the pipe drops relative to the pressure measured at the input end As auxiliary motors step in to increase the flow the adjustments below correct the reference to more closely match the output pressure When the first auxiliary pump operates increase the reference with parameter 8103 REFERENCE STEP 1 When two auxiliary pumps operate increase the reference with parameter 8103 REFERENCE STEP 1 parameter 8104 REFERENCE STEP 2 When three auxiliary pumps operate increase the reference with parameter 8103 REFERENCE STEP 1 parameter 8104 REFERENCE STEP 2 parameter 8105 REFERENCE STEP 3 0 0 100 0 Value in percent 1 0 1 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Q a 244 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 8104 REFERENCE Sets a percentage value that is added to the process 0 0 STEP 2 reference Applies only when at least two auxiliary constant speed motors are running See parameter 8703 REFERENCE STEP 1 0 0 100 0 Value in percent 1 0 1 8105 REFERENCE Sets a percentage value that is added to the process reference Applies only when at least three auxiliary constant speed motors are running See parameter 8703 REFERENCE STEP 1 0 0 100 0 Value in percent 1 0 1 8109 START FREQ Sets the frequency limit used to start the first auxiliary m
153. d See selection DI1 See selection DI1 See selection DI1 See selection DI1 COMM Fieldbus interface as the source for the inverted Start Enable Start Disable signal ie control word 0302 FB CMD WORD 2 bit 18 bit 19 for Start Enable 2 The control word is sent by the fieldbus controller via the fieldbus adapter or embedded fieldbus Modbus to the drive For the control word bits see section DCU communication profile on page 283 Note This setting applies only for the DCU profile DI1 INV External signal required through inverted digital input DI1 0 Start Enable If Start Enable signal is switched off the drive will not start or it coasts to stop if it is running and alarm START ENABLE 1 MISSING is activated Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 180 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 2 DIN See selection ONY E DIAN See selection ONY E DIN See selection ONY E ENABLE 2 parameter 1608 START ENABLE 1 Ses parameter 1608 START ENABLE 1610 DISPLAY Activates deactivates alarms OVERCURRENT 2001 ALARMS OVERVOLTAGE 2002 UNDERVOLTAGE 2003 and DEVICE OVERTEMP 2009 For more information see chapter Fault tracing on page 287 1611 PARAMETER Selects the parameter view ie which parameters are shown SHORT VIEW on the control panel FLASHDROP Shows the FlashDrop parameter list Does not include the 1
154. d oo6 5655 heres been eos T 19 Contents Or tls Mmaflal ss ean aot wee a eee koe OO eo Wee eG ee Poe ee hee ees wee aes 20 Related GOCUMNGINS sidad bee eee shee eee ee ded wen ede See eee Rad ess 21 Categorization by frame size 1 6 ee eee ees 21 Quick installation and commissioning flowchart 0 00 eee 22 3 Operation principle and hardware description What this chapter contains 0 ee ee eee eee 23 Operation PrNGIple sett van cee rana ee eee iaa ee ee le a e ee ee 23 PIO dUCCOVEIVISW 00 Set com coe a o WS aia ered 24 LAVO reserva ae IA eee ke eee aa oe Ghee a eee be le 24 Power connections and control interfaces 0 0c eee 25 Type designation label lt 005 42824066558 2602608 68 00 gb 08640045 60008658 2450 E085 26 Type designation Key e ocipiss ce be ete hes Se eee bE eee ee KEKERE eed ee eee 27 4 Mechanical installation What this chapter contains 2 sis resista ads dee a 2 Checking the installation Site o o oooooocoonoroanoo ooo 29 Requirements for the installation Site ooooooooooo ooo oooooo oo 29 REGUS TOS it a da ii BS a RG oa dea SES da Oe ad 30 Baje e Sa A O 31 Checking le CelIVelY uranio a ARA Ai Mee a E 31 An eee eee ee ee 32 Install the drive osioconisianerrinan atar dr A AAA 32 Fasten clamping plates xisccrirage ra e A A CESSES RRA 34 5 Planning the electrical installation What this chapter contains o o ooo ooooooo ee
155. d to change from the value defined by parameter 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ to zero See parameter 2203 DECELER TIME 1 1 0 0 0 1800 08 2207 RAMP SHAPE Selects the shape of the acceleration deceleration ramp 2 LINEAR 2 The function is deactivated during emergency stop 0 0 LINEAR See parameter 2204 RAMP SHAPE 1 1 0 1s 0 1 1000 0 s 2208 EMERG DEC Defines the time within the drive is stopped if an emergency 1 0 s TIME stop is activated See parameter 2709 EMERG STOP SEL 0 0 1800 0 2209 RAMP INPUT 0 Defines the source for forcing the ramp input to zero NOT SEL NOT SEL Not selected oO DI Digital input DI1 1 ramp input is forced to zero Ramp 1 output will ramp to zero according to the used ramp time 1 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Actual signals and parameters 189 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq DI3 See selection DI1 DI4 See selection DI1 DI5 See selection DI1 COMM Fieldbus interface as the source for forcing ramp input to zero ie control word 0307 FB CMD WORD 1 bit 13 with ABB drives profile 5379 EFB PAR 19 bit 6 The control word is sent by the fieldbus controller via the fieldbus adapter or embedded fieldbus Modbus to the drive For the control word bits see sections DCU communication profile on page 283 and ABB Drives communication profile on page 278 DI1 INV Inverted digital input DI1 O ramp input is forced to ze
156. d unless the 24 V cable is separate ducts inside the cabinet insulated for 230 V or insulated with an insulation sleeving for 230 V Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Planning the electrical installation 41 Protecting the drive input power cable motor and motor cable in short circuit situations and against thermal overload E Protecting the drive and input power cable in short circuit situations Arrange the protection according to the following guidelines Circuit diagram Short circuit protection Distribution Input cable Drive Protect the drive and input board cable with fuses or a circuit breaker See footnotes 1 and 2 1 Size the fuses according to instructions given in chapter Technical data on page 307 The fuses will protect the input cable in short circuit situations restrict drive damage and prevent damage to adjoining equipment in case of a short circuit inside the drive 2 Circuit breakers which have been tested by ABB with the ACS350 can be used Fuses must be used with other circuit breakers Contact your local ABB representative for the approved breaker types and supply network characteristics WARNING Due to the inherent operating principle and construction of circuit breakers independent of the manufacturer hot ionized gases may escape from the breaker enclosure in case of a short circuit To ensure safe use special attention must be
157. dbus register 40011 ABB Drives profile ABB DRV LIM or ABB DRV FULL Control Word Read only copy of the Fieldbus Control Word ABB Drives profile ABB DRV LIM or ABB DRV FULL Status Word Read only copy of the Fieldbus Status Word 6401 PVL SIGNAL Defines the signal logged for peak value 1103 X X Parameter index in group 01 OPERATING DATA Eg 102 0102 SPEED 6402 PVL FILTER Defines the filter time for peak value logging 0 1s TIME 0 0 120 0s Filter time Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Actual signals and parameters 241 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 6403 LOGGERS Defines the source for the reset of loggers NOT SEL RESET 4 i 1 2 3 Seeselecion On b Reset Reset loggers Parameteris sello NOTSEL 7 Drony Reset loggers on the falling edge of omv Sesano omv Sesano INV DI5 INV See selection DI1 INV 6404 AL2 SIGNAL Defines the signal logged for amplitude logger 2 X X Parameter index in group 07 OPERATING DATA Eg 102 0102 SPEED 6405 AL2 SIGNAL Defines the base value from which the percentage BASE distribution is calculated Representation and default value depends on the signal selected with parameter 6404 AL2 SIGNAL 6406 PEAK VALUE Detected peak value of the signal selected with parameter 6407 PVL SIGNAL 407 PEAK TIME 1 Date of the peak value detection 0 65535 d
158. ded TN system as this would damage the drive UL marking See the type designation label for the valid markings of your drive The UL mark is attached to the drive to verify that it meets UL requirements E UL checklist Input power connection See section Electric power network specification on page 314 Disconnecting device disconnecting means See Selecting the supply disconnecting device disconnecting means on page 35 Ambient conditions The drives are to be used in a heated indoor controlled environment See section Ambient conditions on page 376 for specific limits Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 320 Technical data Input cable fuses For installation in the United States branch circuit protection must be provided in accordance with the National Electrical Code NEC and any applicable local codes To fulfil this requirement use the UL classified fuses given in section Power cable sizes and fuses on page 310 For installation in Canada branch circuit protection must be provided in accordance with Canadian Electrical Code and any applicable provincial codes To fulfil this requirement use the UL classified fuses given in section Power cable sizes and fuses on page 310 Power cable selection See section Selecting the power cables on page 36 Power cable connections For the connection diagram and tightening torques see section Connecting the
159. ded for a high inertia application note that the ACS310 cannot be equipped with a brake resistor Actual deceleration time depends on parameter 2204 RAMP SHAPE 1 setting 010 1800 08 1 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 188 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 2204 RAMP SHAPE Selects the shape of the acceleration deceleration ramp 1 LINEAR 1 The function is deactivated during emergency stop O LINEAR 0 0 Linear ramp Suitable for steady acceleration or 1 1000 0s deceleration and for slow ramps 0 1 1000 00 s S curve ramp S curve ramps are ideal for conveyors carrying fragile loads or other applications where a smooth transition is required when changing from one speed to another The S curve consists of symmetrical curves at both ends of the ramp and a linear part in between A rule of thumb A suitable relation between the ramp shape time and the acceleration ramp time is 1 5 0 0 Speed Linear ramp Par 2204 0 s NY S curve ramp Par 2204 gt 0s gt S Par 2202 Par 2204 2205 ACCELER Defines the acceleration time 2 ie the time required for the 60 0 s TIME 2 speed to change from zero to the speed defined by parameter 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ See parameter 2202 ACCELER TIME 1 0 0 1800 05 2206 DECELER Defines the deceleration time 2 ie the time required for the 60 0 s TIME 2 spee
160. download from Check that source and destination drive source to destination drive information are same See parameters in group has failed because 33 INFORMATION parameter sets are incompatible 5088 Operation has failed Contact your local ABB representative because of drive memory error 5089 Download has failed Contact your local ABB representative because of CRC error 5090 Download has failed Contact your local ABB representative because of data processing error 5091 Operation has failed Contact your local ABB representative because of parameter error 5092 Parameter download from Check that source and destination drive source to destination drive information are same See parameters in group has failed because 33 INFORMATION parameter sets are incompatible Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Fault tracing 295 Fault messages generated by the drive 0001 OVERCURRENT Output current has Check motor load 2310 exceeded trip level Check acceleration time 2202 and 0305 bit 0 2205 Check motor and motor cable including phasing Check ambient conditions Load capacity decreases if installation site ambient temperature exceeds 40 C See section Derating on page 309 0002 DC OVERVOLT Excessive Check that overvoltage controller is on 3210 intermediate circuit DC parameter 2005 OVERVOLT CTRL 0305 bit 1 voltage DC Check input power line
161. e e Trim controller PID2 can be used to trim or fine tune the reference of the drive See section Reference trimming on page 119 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 134 Program features E Block diagrams The figure below shows an application example The controller adjusts the speed of a pressure boost pump according to the measured pressure and the set pressure reference Example PID control block diagram Pressure boost pump ref Actual values 4014 Frequency reference 4021 Alt ah Al2 lt IMOT ref 4010 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Program features 135 Elli Zit xOLLV OLOV ELOV ZLOp Lp pue py dnou6 al z pue Jes JajaweJled Aid usemjeq S S ZOP JaJaueJed 1 17 0p MO Ldld ZOLL ZOLL Jo9a as 191 LCId Y JOY N Y x s an en LCld UuOl Oa aS J9yuur7 IIMS pe did ZL dnoig peeds q X CA x lt am 1MdNI OJH4 u IV zJ9J oued Joa as 194 CLXA 901 COLL jue SUOD 7 pasds suo YOLI ZL dnoig pasds aBeJany Joy og dnoig jo WJH LOLL ouanba y p ds jUue SUOD Joa as 194 1 1X3 peeds N3Y4 9001 907 The following figure presents the speed scalar control block diagram for process ZJ9J 9ued 1JaJ joued YIJIMS 90 d v 0p s y
162. e See parameter 1102 PIDCtrlActive 9902 is PID CTRL modulating The inverter IGBT control is operating Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 138 Program features E Example The time scheme below visualizes the operation of the sleep function Reference Sleep boost time 4030 ___ Sleep boost step 4031 Time Selected process i i Wake up delay actual value 4026 Wake up level deviation 4025 7 7 Time Output frequency Control panel tq Sleep delay 4024 PID lt a _ amp SLEEP A Time Stop Start Sleep function for a PID controlled pressure boost pump when parameter 4022 is set to INTERNAL The water consumption falls at night As a consequence the PID process controller decreases the motor speed However due to natural losses in the pipes and the low efficiency of the centrifugal pump at low speeds the motor does not stop but keeps rotating The sleep function detects the slow rotation and stops the unnecessary pumping after the sleep delay has passed The drive shifts into sleep mode still monitoring the pressure The pumping restarts when the pressure falls under the allowed minimum level and the wake up delay has passed Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Program features 139 E Settings Addition
163. e 131 AWOME SEI 22 5 3 Goede eae anaes en ok eee ae eek ee eed Denes eee ee ces 132 SCCM parda SA OO ee eh aed ee a ec re a eG 132 DUDGIVIGIONS aie earras eh ore aaa daa oe Oe ees oe eS he oe Be ee Se oe 132 SOMOS oi one iia hs Aad ee We pr ie Aa dto de oh Bek ea RE da 132 DANO SHS a sis oc Steet ace hte Aart te hee eo eae at hee cw dt he Hee har a eae doe Be ee 132 ls A e Sue ed aim Ghigo Bd atl ew ape E aw oe Ghd SR Bea atte 132 Lale by grace Pw O CEE A 132 PID CONTO 2 osas aso rra ra A era OA ao eee AS 133 Process controller PID conocia asin dd ari a ds tia 133 External Trim controller PID2 o ooocooocoooooo ee eens 133 BIOCK Es e MA IT Rn ee a a 134 RS MONS eae aration ig cent cect A ners PL we ears 136 Bio pei GOS ace gente geese 6 ee Ged ah eo oa a eh ene a teed Be a eee 136 Sleep function for the process PID PID1 control 0 0 0 0 cece eee 137 Example easier raras aa parado e ee bene ae de hoe ace ese onan 138 o oa sche dave bie E ee ear ws i EET EE E ato ae de 138 DINO TCS 2 osas da Penne ted ees te eed EAR eed a di 139 Motor temperature measurement through the standard I O o o o oooo o 139 ra 1 1 10 Se SPP APRO UA 140 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 10 Table of contents VAIS CS vectorial os motel ae Rew ant ence oe idos aliada E ty een deel ad 140 TIMCOTUNCIONS se aa a8 its eee We wh Soe bw ac eh eh aE ot oe
164. e DC DISABLE STABILIZER stabilizer is used to prevent possible voltage oscillations in the drive DC bus caused by motor load or weak supply network In case of voltage variation the drive tunes the frequency reference to stabilize the DC bus voltage and therefore the load torque oscillation DISABLE Disabled ENABLE Enabled 3 i AO 2901 COOLING FAN Defines the trigger point for the drive cooling fan run time E TR counter Value is compared to parameter 2902 COOLING FAN ACT value 0 0 6553 5 kh Time If parameter value is set to zero the trigger is 1 0 1 kh disabled IG 2902 COOLING FAN Defines the actual value for the cooling fan run time counter 0 0 kh ACT When parameter 2907 COOLING FAN TRIG has been set to anon zero value the counter starts When the actual value of the counter exceeds the value defined by parameter 2907 a maintenance notice is displayed on the panel 0 0 6553 5 kh Time Parameter is reset by setting it to zero 2903 REVOLUTION Defines the trigger point for the motor revolution counter TR Value is compared to parameter 2904 REVOLUTION ACT value 0 65535 Mrev Millions of revolutions If parameter value is set to zero the 1 1 trigger is disabled 2904 REVOLUTION Defines the actual value for the motor revolution counter ACT When parameter 2903 REVOLUTION TRIG has been set to a non zero value the counter starts When the actual value of the counter exceeds the value defined by para
165. e The conductivity of the PE conductor must be equal to that of the phase conductor same cross sectional area e 600 VAC cable is accepted for up to 500 V AC e Refer to chapter Technical data on page 307 for the EMC requirements A symmetrical shielded motor cable see the figure below must be used to meet the EMC requirements of the CE and C Tick marks A four conductor system is allowed for input cabling but a shielded symmetrical cable is recommended Compared to a four conductor system the use of a symmetrical shielded cable reduces electromagnetic emission of the whole drive system as well as motor bearing currents and wear Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Planning the electrical installation 37 E Alternative power cable types Power cable types that can be used with the drive are presented below Motor cables Note A separate PE conductor is required recommended for input cables also if the conductivity of the cable shield is not sufficient for the purpose Symmetrical shielded cable three phase conductors a concentric or otherwise symmetrically constructed PE conductor and a shield PE Shield conductor Shield and shield PE Allowed as input cables Shield A four conductor system three phase conductors and a protective conductor PE PE E Motor cable shield To function as a protective conductor the shield must have the same cross sec
166. e control REM shown on the status line switch to local control by pressing C The display briefly shows a message about changing the mode and then returns to the Output mode 1 0 0 Note With group 11 REFERENCE SELECT you can I A allow the reference modification in remote control DIR 1100 00 MENU e To increase the highlighted reference value shown in the top right corner of the display press A 53 The value changes immediately lt is stored in the drive permanent memory and restored automatically after 0 power switch off 0 e To decrease the value press Vv DTR_100 00 MENU How to adjust the display contrast Sep Atina S If you are not in the Output mode press repeatedly until you get there 5 A 10 7 DMR 100 00 MENU MENU e To increase the contrast press keys SS and aS simultaneously e To decrease the contrast press keys Sul and Lv simultaneously 1 7 DIR 100 00 MENU Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 86 Control panels E Parameters mode In the Parameters mode you can e view and change parameter values e start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control How to select a parameter and change its value Sen SSC MEN Go to the Main menu by pressing if you are in the Output mode otherwise by pressing repeatedly 77 until you get to the Main menu CHANGED PAR EXIT 100 00 ENTER
167. e controller automatically decreases the braking torque DISABLE Overvoltage control deactivated ENABLE Overvoltage control activated 1 2006 UNDERVOLT _ Activates or deactivates the undervoltage control of the ENABLE CTRL intermediate DC link TIME If the DC voltage drops due to input power cut off the undervoltage controller will automatically decrease the motor speed in order to keep the voltage above the lower limit By decreasing the motor speed the inertia of the load will cause regeneration back into the drive keeping the DC link charged and preventing an undervoltage trip until the motor coasts to stop This will act as a power loss ride through functionality in systems with a high inertia such as a centrifuge or a fan See section Power loss ride through on page 725 DISABLE Undervoltage control deactivated ENABLE TIME Undervoltage control activated The undervoltage control is active for 500 ms ENABLE Undervoltage control activated No operation time limit Mm 1 8 by o gt Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Actual signals and parameters 183 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 2007 MINIMUM Defines the minimum limit for the drive output frequency FREQ A positive or zero minimum frequency value defines two ranges one positive and one negative A negative minimum frequency value defines one speed range Note MIN
168. e ed ah a es ad 129 1 090 se here thee ites arts we Pe an he hn She co ees a cee aan esas eo ese ede 129 Programmable protection functions 0 0 06 eee ees 129 PICU 2 S26 ot oe Che Chee heen es bes beans Reet eee ene eee led eeeeeeeceaeeses 129 Panel Loss cerrarse E ae Gud ce oe ce eee tad ode he pe tira oan aero e 129 EMIR QUIE esmas nerds ek E ae se eras eee Be rare are 129 Stall Protection 0 0 0c eee eee eee 129 Motor Thermal Protection io ino cade ies 44 wanted taa eed a 130 Earn Fault Proteco sessions 130 M ONEC WING sa 26 5 awakes Pee ee ee Re ee ee aos Rep ii da ee ee ee a 130 Preprogrammed AUN sir dada sae ia in as a eae ee Sala rad dc race ed 131 OVEICUNIGUE 24 ceed eden cd sense dado dia eden eo are de cea dee 131 1 AA inns ah eh a af ap tn adnan heer Ale eRe ds det a ne gee ts Oe 131 BDC ACY ONS rete sees aie cas atari a tp teh eects Scat acacia eS lacy PE ended a ai ance Beene ks 131 Drive temperature micci n aaa Seen CA RM Ree a Re RE OO ERR GE OS He eee SA 131 NON COU 24 2 eveves oo M seb aus Bier we ere a Gene ere a are Bade re eee es 131 Miemal Taull sosa cueed cence Roe ada eta del ede een iia ae 131 Supply phase lOSS a ipods sario es 131 Operation limits o ooooooooorr ee eee eee eee ena 131 OCUN is sk ok tects cise netic ee dee a we Ak da nea we Eon Geo E hohe ES ett arch cea ad 131 e oo os cara soe ce ope Sa ners xn A a wen ts aes eee a ened Geet dee ge ae bees eee oe eee Gree ces ar e
169. e handling cees caza de hes a e a Ke ade aaa a a eke cla UC dci ee a E i 272 Actual RI oc sce ees Se ised ag a kw ee a ed ede Hod hae ne So ES 272 MOdDUS MPPI es terere bans ee ce het sees as bene ra ea 273 Register MAPPING xisco e Ak kh dae a a ee 273 FUNCION COGES cotin eee nee ce eee ang oe bere eee wd eae pda daras ee 275 Exception COd S ee ee eee eens 275 Communication Profiles criar o at dd dae Ee tee dw dew oe ke 276 ABB Drives communication profile 0 0 00 eee ees 276 DCU communication profile 2 222 e2 e52 8 deeb de 6 267588 48 e 281 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 12 Table of contents 14 Fault tracing What this chapter Contains oo scared lit eed 285 S oe ee ee ee E ee ee eee oe ee ee ee eee ee eee ee er eer eee 285 Alarm and fault indications ive cen oe es eek eee eee a ee a ees eS 285 PONIO TS i cuco tato apts eee i quant eee a e qe estes Je ai cis ees ae ice evan arcuate ete eta 285 A o aoe P eo Sas een ae 286 Alarm messages generated by the drive 0 ccc eee 287 Alarms generated by the Basic Control Panel 0 0 0 0c ccc ee 290 Fault messages generated by the drive 0 0 cee eee 293 Embedded fieldbus faults 2 0 0 ce ee nee eee eens 301 NG Master GEVEG no ios is liada dae dow la RR es Foe eae Seo doe a Sea 301 Same device addreSS 0 ee ee ete e eens 301 Meore WING 622 og ktance ea a
170. e is set to THERMI 0 1 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Actual signals and parameters 209 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq DI5 Digital input DI5 Used when parameter 3501 SENSOR 7 TYPE value is set to THERMI 0 1 3503 ALARM LIMIT Defines the alarm limit for motor temperature measurement Alarm MOTOR TEMP indication is given when the limit is exceeded When parameter 3507 SENSOR TYPE value is set to THERMI 0 1 1 alarm 3504 FAULT LIMIT Defines the fault trip limit for motor temperature measurement The drive trips on fault MOT OVERTEMP when the limit is exceeded When parameter 3507 SENSOR TYPE value is set to THERMI 0 1 1 fault 3505 AO Enables current feed from analog output AO Parameter DISABLE EXCITATION _ setting overrides parameter group 15 ANALOG OUTPUTS settings With PTC the output current is 1 6 mA With Pt 100 the output current is 9 1 mA DISABLE Disabled oO ENABLE Enabled 3601 TIMERS Selects the source for the timed function enable signal NOT SEL ENABLE NOT SEL Timed function is not selected oS Digital input DI Timed function enable on the rising edge of DI1 DI1 CMODE Timed function enable on the rising edge of DI1 Timed 1 function is in continuous mode in which the start date can be different from the stop date DI2 CMODE See selection DI1 CMODE DI3 CMODE See selection DI1 CMODE DI4 CMODE See
171. e motor during the stop If parameter 2702 STOP COAST FUNCTION is set to COAST DC braking is applied after the start command is removed If parameter 2702 STOP COAST FUNCTION is set to RAMP DC braking is applied after the ramp 0 100 Value in percent of the motor nominal current parameter 1 1 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR 2107 DC BRAKE Defines the DC brake time TIME 00 26008 me is Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Actual signals and parameters 185 All parameters No Name Value Description fault is reset Run Enable signal activates while the start command is active See parameter 7607 RUN ENABLE control mode changes from local to remote external control mode switches from EXT1 to EXT2 or from EXT2 to EXT1 OFF Pisabiec on Enae 2109 EMERG STOP Selects the source for the external emergency stop command The drive cannot be restarted before the emergency stop command is reset Note The installation must include emergency stop devices and any other safety equipment that may be needed Pressing STOP on the drive s control panel does NOT e generate an emergency stop of the motor e separate the drive from dangerous potential NOT SEL Emergency stop function is not selected Digital input DI1 1 stop along the emergency stop ramp See parameter 2208 EMERG DEC TIME 0 emergency stop command reset See selection DI1 See selection DI1 See s
172. e parameter settings including group 99 START UP DATA Check that the settings correspond to the motor used Hint The user can for example switch the drive between two motors without having to adjust the motor parameters every time the motor is changed The user needs only to adjust the settings once for each motor and then to save the data as two user macros When the motor is changed only the corresponding user macro needs to be loaded and the drive is ready to operate Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Program features 111 Program features What this chapter contains The chapter describes program features For each feature there is a list of related user settings actual signals and fault and alarm messages Start up Assistant E Introduction The Start up Assistant requires the Assistant Control Panel guides the user through the start up procedure helping to enter the requested data parameter values to the drive The Start up Assistant also checks that the entered values are valid ie within the allowed range The Start up Assistant calls other assistants each of which guides the user through the task of specifying a related parameter set At the first start the drive suggests entering the first task Language Select automatically The user may activate the tasks either one after the other as the Start up Assistant suggests or independently The user may also
173. e principal means of controlling the drive from a fieldbus system The Control Word is sent by the fieldbus controller to the drive The drive switches between its states according to the bit coded instructions of the Control Word The Status Word SW is a word containing status information sent by the drive to the fieldbus controller E References References REF are 16 bit signed integers A negative reference eg reverse direction of rotation is formed by calculating the two s complement from the corresponding positive reference value The contents of each reference word can be used as the frequency or process reference E Actual Values Actual Values ACT are 16 bit words containing selected values of the drive Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 271 Fieldbus references E Reference selection and correction Fieldbus reference called COMM in signal selection contexts is selected by setting a reference selection parameter 1103 or 1106 to COMM COMM AI1 or COMM AI1 When 7703 REF1 SELECT or 1106 REF2 SELECT is set to COMM the fieldbus reference is forwarded as such without correction When parameter 7703 or 1106 is set to COMM AI1 or COMM Al1 the fieldbus reference is corrected using analog input Al1 as shown in the following examples COMM COMM MAX MIN MIN COMM MAX MIN MIN Al1 Al 50 MAX M
174. e selected with digital inputs Constant speed activation overrides the external speed reference Constant speed selections are ignored if e PID reference is being followed or e drive is in local control mode This function operates on a 2 ms time level E Settings Parameter group 12 CONSTANT SPEEDS Constant speed 7 7208 CONST SPEED 7 is also used for fault functions See parameter group 30 FAULT FUNCTIONS Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 128 Program features Custom U f ratio The user can define a U f curve output voltage as a function of frequency This custom ratio is used only in special applications where linear and squared U f ratio are not sufficient eg when motor break away torque needs to be boosted Voltage V Custom Uff ratio par 2618 par 2616 par 2614 par 2612 par 2610 par 2603 f Hz par 2611 par 2613 par 2615 par 2617 par 9907 Note The voltage and the frequency points of the U f curve must fulfill the following requirements 2610 lt 2612 lt 2614 lt 2616 lt 2618 and 2611 lt 2613 lt 2615 lt 2617 lt 9907 WARNING High voltage at low frequencies may result in poor performance or motor damage overheating E Settings Additional information 2605 Custom U f ratio activation 2610 2618 Custom U f ratio settings E Diagnostics Fault o Additional information PAR
175. e time time time Number of steps Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Program features 145 E Settings Parameter group 46 PUMP CLEANING Load analyzer The load analyzer can be used for analyzing the customer s process and sizing the drive and the motor The peak value is logged at 2 ms level and the distribution loggers are updated on 0 2 s 200 ms time level Three different values can be logged 1 The measured current is logged continuously The distribution as a percentage of the maximum current is shown in ten classes 2 One signal in group 1 can be logged for the peak maximum value The peak value of the signal peak time time when the peak value was detected as well the frequency current and DC voltage at the peak time are shown 3 One signal in group 1 can be logged for amplitude distribution The base value 100 value can be set by the user Logger 1 cannot be reset Loggers 2 and 3 can be reset by a user defined method They are also reset if either of the signals or the peak value filter time is changed E Settings Additional information Group 64 LOAD ANALYZER Load analyzer settings parameters 6407 6405 E Diagnostics Actual signal Additional information Group 64 LOAD ANALYZER Load analyzer results parameters 6406 6433 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 146 Program fe
176. e using the control panel press 2 2 The result depends on how long you press the key e If you release the key immediately the display flashes LoC the drive stops Set the local control reference as instructed on page 73 e If you press the key for about two seconds release when the display changes from LoC to LoC r the drive continues as before The drive copies the current remote values for the run stop status and the reference and uses them as the initial local control settings e To stop the drive in local control press C gt Text FWD or REV on the bottom line starts flashing slowly e To start the drive in local control press CH gt Text FWD or REV on the bottom line starts flashing rapidly It stops flashing when the drive reaches the setpoint How to change the direction of the motor rotation You can change the direction of the motor rotation in any mode Fe een A If the drive is in remote control REM shown on the left switch to local control by pressing D The display briefly shows message LoC before returning to the previous display To change the direction from forward FWD shown at the bottom to reverse REV shown at the bottom or vice versa press Note Parameter 1003 DIRECTION must be set to 3 REQUEST Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 72 Control panels Output mode In the Output mode you c
177. eb www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Application macros 99 Application macros What this chapter contains The chapter describes the application macros For each macro there is a wiring diagram showing the default control connections digital and analog I O The chapter also explains how to save a user macro and how to recall it Overview of macros Application macros are preprogrammed parameter sets While starting up the drive the user typically selects one of the macros the one that is best suited for the purpose with parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO makes the essential changes and saves the result as a user macro The ACS310 has eight standard macros and two user macros The table below contains a summary of the macros and describes suitable applications Macro Suitable applications ABB Standard Ordinary speed control applications where no one two or three constant speeds are used Start stop is controlled with one digital input level start and stop It is possible to switch between two acceleration and deceleration times 3 wire Ordinary speed control applications where no one two or three constant speeds are used The drive is started and stopped with push buttons Alternate Speed control applications where no one two or three constant speeds are used Start stop and direction are controlled by two digital inputs combination of the input states determines the operation Motor Speed control applicat
178. ecifying the LOC OPAR EDIT minimum and maximum display values This has no effect if parameter 3404 3411 3418 is set to 9 DIRECT 406 OUTPUTI MIN For details see parameters 3406 and 3407 0 0 H Z Signal 1 parameters 3406 OUTPUT1 MIN and 3407 OUTPUT1 MAX CANCEL 1 00 00 SAVE Signal 2 parameters 3473 OUTPUT2 MIN and 3414 LOC UPAR EDIT OUTPUT2 MAX Signal 3 parameters 3420 OUTPUTS MIN and 3421 P 50 T a OUTPUT3 MAX CANCEL 1 00 00 SAVE Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Control panels 89 E Assistants mode When the drive is first powered up the Start up Assistant guides you through the setup of the basic parameters The Start up Assistant is divided into assistants each of which is responsible for the specification of a related parameter set for example Motor Set up or PID Control The Start up Assistant activates the assistants one after the other You may also use the assistants independently For more information on the tasks of the assistants see section Start up Assistant on page 111 In the Assistants mode you can e use assistants to guide you through the specification of a set of basic parameters e start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control How to use an assistant The table below shows the basic operation sequence which leads you through assistants The Motor Set up Assistant is used as an example A A Y
179. ed and all of its communication event counters cleared If the port is currently in Listen Only Mode no response is returned If the port is not currently in Listen Only Mode a normal response is returned before the restart 04 Force Listen Only Mode Forces the addressed slave device to Listen Only Mode This isolates it from the other devices on the network allowing them to continue communicating without interruption from the addressed remote device No response is returned The only function that will be processed after this mode is ae is the Restart Communications Option function Subcode 01 Writes to the registers 1 to approximately 120 registers in a slave device Parameter sets control status and reference values are mapped as holding registers Read Write 7 2 Performs a combination of one read operation and one write Multiple operation function codes 03 and 10 in a single Modbus Write Multiple Holding Registers Diagnostics 8 08 Provides a series of tests for checking the communication between the master and the slave devices or for checking various internal error conditions within the slave The following subcodes are supported 00 Return Query Data The data passed in the request data field is to be returned in the response The entire response message should be identical to the request 01 Restart Communications Option The slave device serial line 23 Holding transaction The write operation is perform
180. ed before the read Registers operation E Register mapping The drive parameters Control Status Word references and actual values are mapped to the area 4xxxx so that e 40001 40099 are reserved for drive control status reference and actual values e 40101 49999 are reserved for drive parameters 0101 9999 Eg 40102 is parameter 0102 In this mapping the thousands and hundreds correspond to the group number while the tens and ones correspond to the parameter number within a group The register addresses that do not correspond with drive parameters are invalid If there is an attempt to read or write invalid addresses the Modbus interface returns an exception code to the controller See Exception codes on page 277 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 276 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus The following table gives information on the contents of the Modbus addresses 40001 40012 and 40031 40034 40001 Control Word R W Control Word Supported only by ABB Drives profile ie when 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE setting is ABB DRV LIM or ABB DRV FULL Parameter 5379 EFB PAR 19 format 40002 Reference 1 R W External reference REF 1 See section Fieldbus references on page 271 0 Reference 2 R W External reference REF2 See section Fieldbus references on page 271 0 when 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE setting is ABB DRV LIM or ABB DRV FULL Parameter 5320 EFB PAR 20 shows a cop
181. ed selection with TIMED FUNC n 1 timed 2 function active O timed function inactive TIMED Operation FUNC n Speed defined by parameter 1202 CONST SPEED 1 1 Speed defined by parameter 1203 CONST SPEED 2 Constant speed selection with TIMED FUNC 1 and TIMED FUNC 2 1 timed function active O timed function inactive TIMED TIMED Operation FUNC 1 FUNC 2 Speed defined by parameter 7202 CONST SPEED 1 1 Speed defined by parameter 7203 CONST SPEED 2 1 Speed defined by parameter 1204 CONST SPEED 3 1 1 Speed defined by parameter 1205 CONST SPEED 4 1301 MINIMUM Al1 Defines the minimum value that corresponds to minimum 1 0 mA V signal for analog input Al1 When used as a reference the value corresponds to the reference minimum setting 0 20 mA 0 100 4 20 mA 20 100 10 10 mA 50 50 Example If Al1 is selected as the source for external reference REF this value corresponds to the value of parameter 7704 REF1 MIN E MINIMUM Al value must not exceed MAXIMUM Al value 100 0 100 0 Value in percent of the full signal range Example If the minimum value for analog input is 4 mA the percent value for 0 20 mA range is 4 mA 20 mA 100 20 1302 MAXIMUM Al1 Defines the maximum value that corresponds to maximum mA V signal for analog input Al1 When used as a reference the value corresponds to the reference maximum setting 0 20 mA 0 100 4 20 mA 20 100
182. edetabedinadaadecedd Land va bdae 167 ISANALOG INPUTS ioc gine iaa bee dde dll snes a ae 170 TH RELAY OUTPUTS np a on ea anced grave Boe ed eo dl kee aula dome Fe a aoe a 171 IS ANALOG OUTPUTS rascar es parao cheat wes NA eee was 174 16 SY OVEN CONTROLS wis eee as Es tad da air diia Sed ee 175 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Table of contents 11 18 FREQ INS TRAN QUT sit ii lite i ld ol 180 A A o oe Ge he ene esse Mert tee ah elcid ee dee es ede eee Sea oe 182 O riei cate noe tase 8 oo oOo ap oe Oe were apa E he oa oe 183 a ACGGELDESEL nakecuterceneectateetenieeeneed ieee beaten dttedcceass 186 20 CRITICAL SPEEDS peterem daade Ooeee sh useedeue carte pe bene yoked 189 20 MOTOR CONTROL icancecttaaseceghededdtecatnchbaaheagpode ee 190 29 MAINTENANCE TRIG 244 p06 ss alto pit eta Ei A ase ees oa oe 193 30 FAUETFUNCTONS css See shee iden bs Suh eect aii ios ib aed ee Gee eee 194 SIAUTOMATIG RESEF ct2acactos2 deg aes derepente pora Ks 199 32 SUPERVISION cb 22be6o ucnes cee eons ori woes does cues 200 39 INFORMATION cresu urnas ero ot ete See ia enema 202 SA PANEL DISPLAY repunte ess pd ed Ae er eee ot ee ee ee 203 SO MOTOR TEMP MEAS cidade opi Gee toh ee eee a woe ee Galop eee des EE 207 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS aee gene cage s teh bla e ica 209 oP USER LCOAD CURVE ch acaece cele ne eeeo eG Ea ccoo ea 213 420 PROCESS PID SEN T cesc5 ceu ro e ai aa ate eee eee 214 al PROCESS PID GE 2 saar
183. eee eee eee D Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 6 Table of contents Implementing the AC power line connection o o ooooocooonon eee 35 Selecting the supply disconnecting device disconnecting means 35 European UNION 2422 5 4054454824 544065648 408 e035 reap oo be SSE oe Faw oS ees 36 3 5 4 c oh ei ws Oa ee RO ee oa ode Stet oe ae aa 36 Checking the compatibility of the motor and drive 2 0 cc ee 36 Selecting the power cables 0 ccc eee eee eee nee neees 36 General WES 65 sion cece a Mike a ad Spey acu see dew FS ote eked aoe aie RE 36 Alternative power cable types 0 eee eee ene 37 oo ges o A 37 Additional US requirements 0 00 ccc ee eee eee ene 38 Selecting the control cables 0 0 0 cc ee eee eee eens 38 General PUBS sra ma oe ee Oe Oe ee oe oe ea oS 38 Ray CADIE a o 39 Control Panel Cable ta ecient ea ea enw dro alejada dike de bw deta dpe aed eae He OE a bw ae wes 39 FOULING Me Cables ies vedic Woke ak a Leer Ved bed St bene eh Sheer Dede eee eee 39 Control cable GUCIS coxe sanan on Sie hose eet ee a ee at aa 40 Protecting the drive input power cable motor and motor cable in short circuit situations and against thermal overload o oooooooooo eee eee ene 41 Protecting the drive and input power cable in short circuit situations 41 Protecting the motor
184. eference REF1 and analog input 10 Al1 See section Reference selection and correction on page 271 DI3U 4D RNC Digital input 3 Reference increase Digital input D14 Reference decrease Stop command resets the reference to zero The reference is not saved if the control source is changed from EXT1 to EXT2 from EXT2 to EXT1 or from LOC to REM Parameter 2205 ACCELER TIME 2 defines the rate of the reference change Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Actual signals and parameters 165 All parameters No Name Value Description DI3U 4D NC Digital input 3 Reference increase Digital input DI4 Reference decrease The program stores the active speed reference not reset by a stop command The reference is not saved if the control source is changed from EXT1 to EXT2 from EXT2 to EXT1 or from LOC to REM When the drive is restarted the motor ramps up at the selected acceleration rate to the stored reference Parameter 2205 ACCELER TIME 2 defines the rate of the reference change Al1 AI2 Reference is calculated with the following equation REF Al1 Al2 50 Al1 AI2 Reference is calculated with the following equation REF Al1 Al2 50 Al1 Al2 Reference is calculated with the following equation REF Al1 50 Al2 AI1 Al2 Reference is calculated with the following equation REF Al1 50 Al2 KEYPAD RNC Defines the control p
185. eference source for EXT1 EXT2 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Program features 117 E Diagnostics Actual signals Additional information 0111 0112 EXT1 EXT2 reference E Block diagram Start stop direction source for EXT1 The figure below shows the parameters that select the interface for start stop and direction for external control location EXT1 DI D11 Di5 EXT1 DIS Lea dl Fieldbus selection recton See chapter i COMM Embedded fieldbus Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 1001 on page 265 Control panel KEYPAD TIMED FUNC 1 4 Timed function E Block diagram Reference source for EXT1 The figure below shows the parameters that select the interface for the speed reference of external control location EXT1 Select Alt Al1 Al2 DI3 DI4 DI5 Al2 EXT1 DI3 N Reference i i REF1 DI4 Fieldbus selection Hz rpm DI5 See chapter COMM Embedded fieldbus Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 1103 on page 265 FREQ INPUT Frequency input KEYPAD Control panel Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 118 Program features Reference types and processing The drive can accept a variety of references in addition to the conventional analog input and control panel signals e The drive reference can be given with two digital inputs One digital input increases the s
186. election DI1 See selection DI1 DI DI1 INV Inverted digital input DI O stop along the emergency stop 1 ramp See parameter 2208 EMERG DEC TIME 1 emergency stop command reset DIBINV See selection DIN Oi Pia See selection DIN i DISINV See selection DIN CURR See parameter 2707 START FUNCTION 15 300 Value in percent Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 186 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 2112 ZERO SPEED Defines the delay for the Zero Speed Delay function The 0 0s function is useful in applications where a smooth and quick restarting is essential During the delay the drive knows accurately the rotor position No Zero Speed Delay With Zero Speed Delay Speed Speed Speed controller Speed controller switched off Motor remains live Motor is coasts to stop decelerated to true O speed Zero Speed Delay No Zero Speed Delay The drive receives a stop command and decelerates along a ramp When the motor actual speed falls below an internal limit called Zero Speed the speed controller is switched off The inverter modulation is stopped and the motor coasts to standstill With Zero Speed Delay The drive receives a stop command and decelerates along a ramp When the actual motor speed falls below an internal limit called Zero Speed the zero speed delay function activates
187. eleration time 2 parameter 2206 The drive must be started and its Run Enable signal must be present before the Pump cleaning sequence can start DI1 INV Trigger on the falling edge of digital input D11 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Actual signals and parameters 237 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq DI2 INV See selection DI1 INV DI3 INV See selection DI1 INV DI4 INV See selection DI1 INV DI5 INV See selection DI1 INV DI1 INV S10 Enable on the falling edge of digital input DI1 trigger on SUPRV1 OVER parameter 7407 RELAY OUTPUT 1 See parameter group 32 SUPERVISION DI2Z INV S10 See selection DI1 INV S10 DI3 INV S10 See selection DI1 INV S10 DI4 INV S10 See selection DI1 INV S10 10 DI5 INV S10 See selection DI1 INV S10 11 4602 FWD STEP Defines the forward step frequency for the pump cleaning 0 0 sequence in percent of the nominal motor frequency parameter 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ 0 0 100 0 Forward step frequency 1 0 1 4603 REV STEP Defines the reverse step frequency for the pump cleaning 0 0 sequence in percent of the nominal motor frequency parameter 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ 0 0 100 0 Reverse step frequency 1 0 1 4604 OFF TIME Defines the length of the interval between forward and 0 0s reverse steps in the pump cleaning sequence in seconds 0 0 1000 0 s Off time step interval 4605 FWD TIME Defines
188. en demand drops such that the first pump speed falls below a minimum limit user defined by a frequency limit the PFC control automatically stops an auxiliary pump The PFC also increases the speed of the first pump to account for the auxiliary pump s missing output An Interlock function when enabled identifies off line out of service motors andthe PFC control skips to the next available motor in the sequence An Autochange function when enabled and with the appropriate switchgear equalizes duty time between the pump motors Autochange periodically increments the position of each motor in the rotation the speed regulated motor becomes the last auxiliary motor the first auxiliary motor becomes the speed regulated motor etc See also section PFC Control macro on page 108 E SPFC control Soft Pump and Fan Control SPFC is very similar to PFC control but it ensures that all motors are started smoothly When new motors need to be started due to increasing pumping capacity need they are powered up by the drive as follows Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Program features 147 When the speed regulated motor reaches the full output it is disconnected from the drive and switched to direct on line connection with a slight delay in between Auxiliary motor 2 is connected to drive output After a slight delay the motor speed is increased to fulfil the pumping capacity needed
189. ensioning for rated currents hy is shown in the table below together with the corresponding fuse types for short circuit protection of the input power cable The rated fuse currents given in the table are the maxima for the mentioned fuse types If smaller fuse ratings are used check that the fuse rms current rating is larger than the rated liy current given in section Ratings on page 308 If 150 output power is needed multiply current 4y by 1 5 See also section Selecting the power cables on page 36 Check that the operating time of the fuse is below 0 5 seconds The operating time depends on the fuse type the supply network impedance as well as the cross sectional area material and length of the supply cable In case the 0 5 seconds operating time is exceeded with the gG or T fuses ultra rapid aR fuses will in most cases reduce the operating time to an acceptable level Note Larger fuses must not be used Type Fuses Size of copper conductor in cablings ACS310 gG UL Class T Supply Motor PE 600 V U1 V1 W1 U2 V2 W2 x E U A A AWG mm AWG roaxt4a6 2 25 30 60 10 6 10 60 10 Posx1A42 23 eo 10 6 10 60 10 roax26ae 2 63 60 100 6 10 8 100 8 roax34A1 2 60 80 160 6 16 6 160 6 2 ag n aan Ia l osoasa 16 18 25 12 15 14 25 a2 rosx 06A24 16 15 25 12 15 14 25 12 oxo w 20 fas 12 15 4 28 a 03x09A74 20 03x13A84 25 03x17A24 35
190. ent If the value of the selected analog input exceeds this limit the action defined by parameter 4409 OUTLET PROT CTRL is taken after a delay set with parameter 4475 OUTLET CTRL DLY expires 0 00 100 00 Supervision level 1 0 01 4412 VERY HIGH Enables and selects the mode of the secondary outlet NOT SEL CTRL pressure supervision function The function uses the analog input selected by parameter 4470 Al MEAS OUTLET NOT SEL Secondary outlet pressure monitoring not used 0 STOP Detection of very high outlet pressure stops the drive The 1 drive will start again if the pressure falls below the supervision level FAULT Detection of very high outlet pressure trips the drive ona fault 4413 Al OUT VERY Supervision level for secondary outlet pressure monitoring 100 00 HIGH function See parameter 4409 OUTLET PROT CTRL 0 00 100 00 Supervision level 1 0 01 t Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Actual signals and parameters 233 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 4414 DI STATUS Selects the digital input for connection of a pressure switch NOT SEL OUTLET at the pump fan outlet The normal state is 1 active If the selected input switches to 0 inactive the action defined by parameter 4409 OUTLET PROT CTRL is taken after a delay set by parameter 4415 OUTLET CTRL DLY expires NOT SEL No digital input selected Pump fan outlet pressure
191. ent rating In format xxAy where xx indicates the integer part and y the fractional part eg O9A7 means 9 7 A For more information see section Ratings on page 308 Input voltage range 2 200 240 VAC 380 480 VAC J404 ACS CP C Basic Control Panel 1 J400 ACS CP A Assistant Control Panel 2 R700 ACS310 User s Manual in English 3AUA0000044201 EN R701 ACS310 User s Manual in German 3AUA0000048396 DE R702 ACS310 User s Manual in Italian 3AUA0000048398 IT R707 ACS310 User s Manual in French 3AUA0000048400 FR R708 ACS310 User s Manual in Spanish 3AUA0000048401 ES 1 The ACS310 is compatible with ACS CP C Basic Control Panel Rev M or later 2 The ACS310 is compatible with ACS CP A Assistant Control Panel Rev E or later new panel series manufactured since 2007 with serial number XYYWWRXXXX where year YY 07 or greater and revision R E F G The ACS310 is compatible with ACS CP D Assistant Control Panel Rev P or later Unlike the other panels the ACS CP D is ordered with a separate material code Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 28 Operation principle and hardware description Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Mechanical installation 29 Mechanical installation What this chapter contains The chapter tells how to check the installation site unpack check the
192. equency 5 SPEED 5 0 0 500 0 Hz Output frequency in Hz 1207 CONST Defines constant speed drive output frequency 6 SPEED 6 aTemi lem i ll ll Eh N olgxalol8h lo IlII I III NINNININNIN 0 0 500 0 Hz Output frequency in Hz 1208 CONST Defines constant speed drive output frequency 7 E 5 SPEED 7 Constant speed 7 is used also with fault functions 3001 U 6 AI lt MIN FUNCTION and 3002 PANEL COMM ERR 0 0 500 0 Hz Output frequency in Hz 1209 TIMED MODE Selects timed function activated speed into use when CS1 2 3 4 EL parameter 1201 CONST SPEED SEL selection is TIMED FUNC 1 4 or TIMED FUN1 amp 2 EXT CS1 2 3 External speed reference or constant speed selection with 1 TIMED FUNC n 1 timed function active O timed function inactive TIMED Operation FUNC n 0O External reference 1 Speed defined by par 1202 CONST SPEED 1 External speed reference or constant speed selection with TIMED FUNC 1 and TIMED FUNC 2 1 timed function active O timed function inactive TIMED TIMED Operation FUNC 1 FUNC 2 External reference Speed defined by par 1202 CONST SPEED r o 0 SEED 1 Speed defined by par 7203 CONST SPEED 2 1 Speed defined by par 1204 CONST SPEED 3 O I N Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 170 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq CS1 2 3 4 Constant spe
193. er cables on page 36 Note Do not use an asymmetrically constructed motor cable If there is a symmetrically constructed grounding conductor in the motor cable in addition to the conductive shield connect the grounding conductor to the grounding terminal at the drive and motor ends Route the motor cable input power cable and control cables separately For more information see section Routing the cables on page 39 Grounding of the motor cable shield at the motor end For minimum radio frequency interference e ground the cable by twisting the shield as follows flattened width gt 1 5 length e or ground the cable shield 360 degrees at the lead through of the motor terminal box Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 48 Electrical installation E Connection procedure 1 Fasten the grounding conductor PE of the input power cable under the grounding clamp Connect the phase conductors to the U1 V1 and W1 terminals Use a tightening torque of 0 8 N m 7 Ibf in for frame sizes RO R2 1 7 N m 15 Ibf in for R3 and 2 5 N m 22 Ibf in for R4 2 Strip the motor cable and twist the shield to form as short a pigtail as possible Fasten the twisted shield under the grounding clamp Connect the phase conductors to the U2 V2 and W2 terminals Use a tightening torque of 0 8 N m 7 lbf in for frame sizes RO R2 1 7 N m 15 Ibf in for R3 and 2 5 N m 22 Ibf
194. er grounded TN systems WARNING If a drive whose EMC filter is not disconnected is installed on an IT system an ungrounded power system or a high resistance grounded over 30 ohms power system the system will be connected to ground potential through the EMC filter capacitors of the drive This may cause danger or damage the drive If a drive whose EMC filter is not disconnected is installed on a corner grounded TN system the drive will be damaged 1 If you have an IT ungrounded or corner grounded TN system disconnect the internal EMC filter by removing the EMC screw For 3 phase U type drives with type designation ACS310 03U the EMC screw is already removed at the factory and replaced by a plastic one Note In frame size R4 the EMC screw is located to the right of terminal W2 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Electrical installation 47 Connecting the power cables E Connection diagram OUTPUT For alternatives see section PE Selecting the supply a disconnecting device r disconnecting means on ho page 35 el Y 1 Ground the other end of the PE conductor at the distribution board 2 L2 L3 Use a separate grounding cable if the conductivity of the cable shield is insufficient smaller than the conductivity of the phase conductor and there is no symmetrically constructed grounding conductor in the cable See section Selecting the pow
195. er time constant for frequency output FO ie 0 1 s the time within 63 of a step change is reached 0 0 10 0 s Filter time constant 1814 DI1 ON DELAY Defines the delay from the signal change to the change of 0 0s the digital input DI to the ON state 0 0 3600 0 s Delay time 1815 DI1 OFF Defines the delay from the signal change to the change of 0 0s DELAY the digital input DI to the OFF state 0 0 3600 0s Delay time 1816 DI2 ON DELAY See parameter 1814 DI1 ON DELAY 0 0s 0 0s 1817 DI2 OFF See parameter 7875 DI1 OFF DELAY 0 0s DELAY Os 1818 DI3 ON DELAY See parameter 1814 DI1 ON DELAY Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 182 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 1819 DI3 OFF See parameter 7875 DI1 OFF DELAY DELAY 1820 DI4 ON DELAY See parameter 7874 DI1 ON DELAY 1821 DI4 OFF See parameter 7875 DI1 OFF DELAY DELAY Mm Mm 1822 DI5 ON DELAY See parameter 7874 DI1 ON DELAY 1823 DI5 OFF See parameter 7875 DI1 OFF DELAY DELAY 2003 MAX E Defines the allowed maximum motor current CURRENT 00 18 byAlcurentSSCS SCS 2005 OVERVOLT Activates or deactivates the overvoltage control of the ENABLE CTRL intermediate DC link Fast braking of a high inertia load causes the voltage to rise to the overvoltage control limit To prevent the DC voltage from exceeding the limit the overvoltag
196. es Resets faults in the Output and Fault modes 3 MENU ENTER Enters deeper into menu level In the Parameter mode saves the displayed value as the new setting 4 Up e Scrolls up through a menu or list e Increases a value if a parameter is selected e Increases the reference value in the Reference mode e Holding the key down changes the value faster 5 e Scrolls down through a menu or list e Decreases a value if a parameter is selected e Decreases the reference value in the Reference mode e Holding the key down changes the value faster 76 LOCIREM Changes between local and remote conil oie dive e STOP Sps e diveinfocalconol O o START Sirs ie avenon SSCS Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 70 Control panels E Operation You operate the control panel with the help of menus and keys You select an option eg operation mode or parameter by scrolling the lt a and cy arrow keys until the option is visible in the display and then pressing the 37 key With the CZ key you return to the previous operation level without saving the made changes The Basic Control Panel has five panel modes Output Reference Parameter Copy and Fault The operation in the first four modes is described in this chapter When a fault or alarm occurs the panel goes automatically to the Fault mode showing the fault or alarm code You c
197. es whe re Rees 123 SOWING S ran ae oh Bed Oe he ae oh ae a a aoe ee ens ace ake sh de Sens 123 DION SHOES cese dentes puta Be ee ER hE a ee a RE ee a 124 Fes ai 2 eC 0 ee ee ee eee 124 A 124 TAINO SHOES ou tario toetpios yl ette iio Net lia eee aa ds 124 a A eebad wae Race hoe ae Ree eee Re bee ee Ramee ae 124 SINS ove dk arte Wake bs de eee O 124 a as te hon A eee ode wee OE ees 125 Power loss ride through ci ccs ogee ti dis Ae eta iets lk aw ene ak ag ae ele de 125 S a E OU ge 125 peces A ISA 126 SENOS cs apa er ho ee a ree ee dea 126 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Table of contents 9 Maintenance Migger ssis ss wai ace dex ira ba ai a ATE daa EE E ci e a He hee ai 126 SOMOS 04 626 os sido e cion bado debi Ec aie a A A be 126 Acceleration and deceleration rampS o o ooooooooro eee eee ne 126 o aioe oa ee cae we Oh dee Oh he OA aoe OO a oe ae Qe Ge 126 CiiliCal SOCCUS aso dsd dora eachedeu Hehe a teehee aii eee eee de 127 SOMOS noia eee dete eee NENT de Naa ee el 127 Constant SPEBUS eiria iia Oise ia ows Sh eS eds ope i ee die ens cee ee oO eS 127 SORDOS ie rec she cockney aoc ca he Weel ace acc hee ate Seek ea Sah Sh Shaan ese gh aioe Ga he 127 Custom tral nea donna Bo ee heed Oo EE ee oe oe ee eee eee eee a 128 DOMINOS ah eden bi wt od kee ea eed et Oa he oe ee ace ee aed 128 Bo hc ex A Sad we ee BA SE a 128 IR COMPENSAUON ess nue oil a he Bed de ee O
198. eset only from the control panel Reset through digital input DI1 reset on the rising edge of DI1 or by control panel DI4 i DI5 1 1 1 pba See selection DM E DI See selection DI1 START STOP Reset along with the stop signal received through a digital input or by control panel Note Do not use this option when start stop and direction commands are received through fieldbus communication Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Actual signals and parameters 177 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq COMM Fieldbus interface as the source for the fault reset signal ie control word 0307 FB CMD WORD 1 bit 4 with ABB drives profile 5379 EFB PAR 19 bit 7 The control word is sent by the fieldbus controller via the embedded fieldbus Modbus to the drive For the control word bits see sections DCU communication profile on page 283 and ABB Drives communication profile on page 278 Reset through inverted digital input DI1 reset on the falling 1 edge of DI1 or by control panel Dial See selection DIN o H ZE See selection DIN 3 DI4 INV See selection DI1 INV DI5 INV See selection DI1 INV 1605 USER PAR Enables the change of the User Parameter Set through a SET CHG digital input See parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO The change is only allowed when the drive is stopped During the change the drive will not start Note Always save the User Para
199. et meka dara a tides eee era eee ino a Gan ee 226 ALEAT TRIM PID 2622000804 6690804204 sabana dr ise 227 44 PUMP PROTECTION su iapesrd reia cda bres ood ii ds 229 AS ENERGY SAVING escri Ree are tio petita 234 40 PUMP CLEANING siia a Tan GNERRE E REREN ENER eee een ees eee E 235 32 PANEE COMM a ie dius wow sd dee ete pida ip dada 236 EFB PFROTOCOL 422 64 04244 a i e ai rotas a a E ade ia 237 04 LOADANALYZER tc can tee cee enel ets islote eee ad os pa 239 oI cd Oe GON TROL 5 sete a o oe ee in ee ee ee ee eee 242 JO OPTIONS 3 aptos ce E ae ota mess ubed eas oeuinen Ge duane epale a 259 OO es a Dera ce oe eee sedate es aha oe Bee Eee we sense eee eee 260 13 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus What this chapter COnIAINS 222 rosa A deve RES PER PATE aoe Hee nee WEE SR 263 System OVEIVIEW e sarge a RE REN DEERE An 263 Setting up communication through the embedded Modbus o ooo ooo 265 Drive control parameters o oooor ee ee eee eens 266 Fieldbus control interface 0 0 ce eee eee eee eens 268 Control Word and Status Word 0 eee eens 268 RETSTONceS sera mera dk dese aio ai Saud Soy eh ote Wee ede odes a ir Ga ee 268 PCA VAISS nace circo Ree eee Oe eee eee eRe hee ada rca Se 268 Fieldbus references visir take hood bee ee neh ous we o 269 Reference selection and correction 0 0 00 ccc eee eee 269 Fieldbus reference scaling 0 000 ccc cece eee eee teen een een ees 271 Referenc
200. fferent macros and chapter Electrical installation on page 45 for installation in general 8 Control panel To 7 RJ 45 i i DN l i Modbus RTU RSS Screen 10SCR RS 232 Se anand n 1 20 Alt AOOT Analog output 30 GND mafe GND 8 0 20 mA Reference voltage vil 10 V DC max 10mA 49 10V Analog input 2 90 Al2 60 GND Aux voltage output 90 24 V PROGRAMMABLE RELAY 24 V DC max 200 mA 100 GND AND DIGITAL OUTPUTS 19 DOOM RECOM 17 120 D11 518 Relay output RONG 250 VAC 30VDC 6A PROGRAMMABLE 13 9D12 713 DIGITAL INPUTS 140 D13 DOSRC 590 or cout pour igital frequency output 150 DI4 Y gt 2D 54 PNP transistor type DI5 can also be used 464D15 DOGND 59 30 V DC max 100 mA as a frequency input 230 SHIELD 240B J701 a Output relay Modbus RTU module MREL 01 RS 485 gt 54 A NA EMC Q EMC filter grounding screw 6 FlashDrop mm VAROS Varistor grounding screw D D L1 U1 U2 4 Co 3 phase power i es supply L2 amp gt OV1 V2 rr ty AC motor 200 480 V AC L3 10 W1 W2 0 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 26 Operation principle and hardware description Type designation label The type designation label is attached to the left side of the drive An example label and explanation of the label contents are shown below ADD ACS310 03E 09A7 4 1 IP20 UL Open type 2 FU NITT S N MYYWWRXXXX 4 kW 5 HP DOU UU
201. for installation and maintenance work Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 36 Planning the electrical installation E European union To meet the European Union Directives according to standard EN 60204 1 Safety of Machinery the disconnecting device must be one of the following types e aswitch disconnector of utilization category AC 23B EN 60947 3 e a disconnector having an auxiliary contact that in all cases causes switching devices to break the load circuit before the opening of the main contacts of the disconnector EN 60947 3 e acircuit breaker suitable for isolation in accordance with EN 60947 2 E Other regions The disconnecting device must conform to the applicable safety regulations Checking the compatibility of the motor and drive Check that the 3 phase AC induction motor and the drive are compatible according to the rating table in section Ratings on page 308 The table lists the typical motor power for each drive type Selecting the power cables E General rules Dimension the input power and motor cables according to local regulations e The input power and the motor cables must be able to carry the corresponding load currents See section Ratings on page 308 for the rated currents e The cable must be rated for at least 70 C maximum permissible temperature of the conductor in continuous use For US see section Additional US requirements on page 38
202. ge for the AC motor Rectifier Intermediate Inverter circuit Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 24 Operation principle and hardware description Product overview E Layout The layout of the drive is presented below The figure shows a frame size R2 drive The construction of the different frame sizes RO R4 varies to some extent Covers off R2 EMC filter grounding screw EMC 1 Cooling outlet through top cover 2 Mounting holes Note The screw is on the front in frame 3 Panel cover a Basic Control Panel b BES R4 i Assistant Control Panel c 0 Varistor grounding screw VAR RS 485 connection 4 5 O SA 6 termination resistor Option connection O connections OSOSO SOS TO i ARa e ep onne in 4 is ie lt i voltage or current 8 Power OK and Fault LEDs See section for analog inputs LEDs on page 306 te Input power connection U1 V1 W1 and motor connection U2 V2 W2 Braking chopper connection is disabled N al 6 1 O clamping plate Clamping plate _ gt _ Al ww 00 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Operation principle and hardware description 25 E Power connections and control interfaces The diagram gives an overview of connections I O connections are parameterable See chapter Application macros on page 99 for I O connections for the di
203. ges with an CRC cyclic redundancy ERRORS check error received by the drive If the number is high check CRC calculation for possible errors Note High electromagnetic noise levels generate errors 5308 EFB UART Number of messages with a character error received by the ERRORS drive 5309 EFB STATUS Status ofthe EFB protocol O EXECUT NIT TIME OUT time out has occurred in the communication between the network master and the EFB protocol OFF LINE EFB protocol is receiving messages that are NOT addressed to this drive ON LINE EFB protocol is receiving messages that are addressed to this drive Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com CONFIG EFB protocol has a configuration error ERROR 3 5 240 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq RESET EFB protocol is performing a hardware reset LISTEN ONLY EFB protocol is in listen only mode 5310 EFB PAR 10 Selects an actual value to be mapped to Modbus register 40005 065535 Parametern Ooo y Selects an actual value to be mapped to Modbus register 40006 e Selects an actual value to be mapped to Modbus register 40007 e Selects an actual value to be mapped to Modbus register 40008 e Selects an actual value to be mapped to Modbus register 40009 e Selects an actual value to be mapped to Modbus register 40010 e Selects an actual value to be mapped to Mo
204. he control location is not set to local LOC not shown on the display the stop key on the control panel will not stop the drive To stop the drive using the control panel first press the LOC REM key and then the stop key CO gt Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 18 Safety Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Introduction to the manual 19 Introduction to the manual What this chapter contains The chapter describes applicability target audience and purpose of this manual It describes the contents of this manual and refers to a list of related manuals for more information The chapter also contains a flowchart of steps for checking the delivery installing and commissioning the drive The flowchart refers to chapters sections in this manual Applicability The manual is applicable to the ACS310 drive firmware version 4 00E or later See parameter 3307 FIRMWARE on page 202 Target audience The reader is expected to know the fundamentals of electricity wiring electrical components and electrical schematic symbols The manual is written for readers worldwide Both Sl and imperial units are shown Special US instructions for installations in the United States are given Purpose of the manual This manual provides information needed for planning the installation installing commissioning using and servicing the drive
205. he mounting hardware used e wire stripper e tape measure e drill if the drive will be installed with screws bolts e mounting hardware screws or bolts if the drive will be installed with screws bolts For the number of screws bolts see With screws on page 32 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Mechanical installation 31 Unpacking The drive 1 is delivered in a package that also contains the following items frame size R2 shown in the figure e plastic bag 2 including clamping plate also used for I O cables in frame sizes R3 and R4 I O clamping plate for frame sizes RO R2 clamps and screws e panel cover 3 e mounting template integrated into the package 4 e short user s manual 5 e possible options Basic Control Panel Assistant Control Panel or complete User s Manual Checking the delivery Check that there are no signs of damage Notify the shipper immediately if damaged components are found Before attempting installation and operation check the information on the type designation label of the drive to verify that the drive is of the correct type See section Type designation label on page 26 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 32 Mechanical installation Installing The instructions in this manual cover drives with the IP20 degree of protection To comply with NEMA 1 u
206. he offset value When PID controller is deactivated controller output is reset to the offset value Parameter 4230 TRIM MODE must be set to NOT SEL 0 0 100 0 Value in percent 0 1 4230 TRIM MODE Activates the trim function and selects between the direct NOT SEL and proportional trimming With trimming it is possible to combine a corrective factor to the drive reference See section Reference trimming on page 119 NOT SEL No trim function selected PROPORTION Active The trimming factor is proportional to the rom Hz L reference before trimming REF 1 DIRECT Active The trimming factor is relative to a fixed maximum limit used in the reference control loop maximum speed frequency or torque 4231 TRIM SCALE _ Defines the multiplier for the trimming function See section 0 0 Reference trimming on page 119 100 0 100 0 Multiplier 0 1 1 4232 CORRECTION Selects the trim reference See section Reference trimming PID2REF RC on page 779 g ANE i al Dh PID2REF PID2 reference selected by parameter 4270 ie signal 0729 PID 2 SETPNT value PID2O0UTPUT PID2 output ie signal 0727 PID 2 OUTPUT value o E rs 00 0H MALE 4401 INLET PROT Enables and selects the mode of the primary supervision NOT SEL CTRL of pump fan inlet pressure Note Inlet protection is active only when the active reference is PID NOT SEL Primary inlet pressure supervision not used ALARM Detection of low in
207. he status meets the setting NOT SEL READY Ready to function Run Enable signal on no fault supply voltage within acceptable range and emergency stop signal off RUN Running Start signal on Run Enable signal on no active 2 fault FAULT 1 Inverted fault Relay is de energized on a fault trip FAULT ALARM REVERSED Motor rotates in reverse direction Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 172 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description STARTED The drive has received start command Relay is energized 7 even if Run Enable signal is off Relay is de energized when drive receives a stop command or a fault occurs SUPRV1 Status according to supervision parameters 3201 32083 OVER See parameter group 32 SUPERVISION SUPRV1 See selection SUPRV1 OVER UNDER SUPRV2 Status according to supervision parameters 3204 3206 OVER See parameter group 32 SUPERVISION a Tl oO m Ke 0 SUPRV2 See selection SUPRV2 OVER 1 UNDER SUPRV3 Status according to supervision parameters 3207 3209 OVER See parameter group 32 SUPERVISION 3 1 1 12 1 SUPRV3 See selection SUPRV3 OVER UNDER AT SET POINT Output frequency is equal to the reference frequency FAULT RST Fault Automatic reset after the autoreset delay See parameter group 31 AUTOMATIC RESET FLT ALARM Fault or alarm EXT CTRL Drive is under external control REF 2 S
208. hen switching between two external control devices is needed To enable the macro set the value of parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO to 5 HAND AUTO For the parameter default values see section Default values with different macros on page 757 If you use other than the default connections presented below see section I O terminals on page 49 Note Parameter 2708 START INHIBIT must remain in the default setting O OFF E Default I O connections X1A pr METETE 2 at 10 iti gt a a a 10v Reference voltage 10 V DG max 10mA Dee i a2 Motor speed reterence Auto 0 20 mA 7 ono anatginpu crt common 2 71a Tend analog output crt common 29 eav Aoa volage ouput 24 VG mar 200A 10 00 Auxiliary voltage output common n ocom Digital input common 12 ori Stop 0 Start 1 Hand X1B 17 ROCOM Relay output 1 18 roNc No fault Fault 1 e 18 RONO Digital output max 100 mA re No fault Fault 1 1 360 degree grounding under a clamp 2 The signal source must be powered externally See the manufacturer s instructions An example of a connection using a two wire sensor is given on page 57 Tightening torque 0 4 N m 3 5 Ibf in Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Application macros 107 PID Control macro This macro provides parameter settings for closed loop control systems such as pressure control flow control etc Control can a
209. her information inside of the back cover page 333 tells how to make product and service inquiries get information on product training provide feedback on ABB Drives manuals and find documents on the Internet Related documents See List of related manuals on page 2 Categorization by frame size The ACS310 is manufactured in frame sizes RO R4 Some instructions and other information which only concern certain frame sizes are marked with the symbol of the frame size RO R4 To identify the frame size of your drive see the table in section Ratings on page 308 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 22 Introduction to the manual Quick installation and commissioning flowchart Task See Identify the frame size of your drive RO R4 Operation principle and hardware description Type designation key on page 27 Technical data Ratings on page 308 Plan the installation select the cables etc Planning the electrical installation on page 35 Check the ambient conditions ratings and Technical data on page 307 required cooling air flow Unpack and check the drive Mechanical installation Unpacking on page 31 If the drive will be connected to an IT Operation principle and hardware description ungrounded or corner grounded system Type designation key on page 27 check that the internal EMC filter is not Electrical installation Checking the connected compatibility with IT
210. hich FUN1 amp 2 internal setpoint is used as the reference 1 timed function active O timed function inactive TIMED TIMED Internal setpoint selected FUNC 1 FUNC 2 EZ OA 1 101 GAIN 108 0 VALUE 109 100 VALUE See parameter 4070 SET POINT SEL EL INTERNAL See parameter 4077 INTERNAL SETPNT SETPNT inn N Z m S 7 O Z op D D 5 D s o 3 LA D s A 3 NO Z m S A O Z lt m EN Ae gt OO Y v e Z IN de md md O CO N Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Actual signals and parameters 227 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 4112 SETPOINT See parameter 4012 SETPOINT MIN MIN 4113 SETPOINT See parameter 4073 SETPOINT MAX 4114 FBK SEL See parameter 4014 FBK SEL E 4115 FBK See parameter 4015 FBK MULTIPLIER MULTIPLIER 4116 ACT1 INPUT See parameter 4016 ACT1 INPUT E 4117 ACT2 INPUT See parameter 4017 ACT2 INPUT Ld 4118 ACT1 See parameter 4078 ACT1 MINIMUM MINIMUM 4119 ACT1 See parameter 4019 ACT1 MAXIMUM MAXIMUM 4120 ACT2 See parameter 4020 ACT2 MINIMUM MINIMUM 4121 ACT2 See parameter 4021 ACT2 MAXIMUM MAXIMUM 4122 SLEEP See parameter 4022 SLEEP SELECTION SELECTION 4123 PID SLEEP See parameter 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL LEVEL 4124 PID SLEEP See parameter 4024 PID SLEEP DELAY DELAY 4125 WAKE UP DEV See p
211. ia set by parameters 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL and 4025 WAKE UP DEV are not effective The sleep start and stop delay parameters 4024 PID SLEEP DELAY and 4026 WAKE UP DELAY are effective See selection SUPRV1 UNDER 10 SUPRV3 See selection SUPRV1 UNDER 11 UNDER Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 222 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 4023 PID SLEEP Defines the start limit for the sleep function If the motor 0 0 Hz LEVEL speed is below a set level 4023 longer than the sleep delay 4024 the drive shifts to the sleeping mode The motor is stopped and the control panel shows alarm message PID SLEEP Parameter 4022 SLEEP SELECTION must be set to INTERNAL Reference Sleep boost time 4030 Sleep boost step 4031 1 Selected process actual Wake up delay value 40 Wake up level deviation 4025 Output frequency Control tg Sleep delay l tb2 4 panel lt q 0 0 500 0 Hz Sleep start level 1 0 1 Hz 4024 PID SLEEP Defines the delay for the sleep start function See parameter 60 0 s DELAY 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL When the motor speed falls below the sleep level the counter starts When the motor speed exceeds the sleep level the counter is reset 0 0 3600 0s Sleep start delay Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Actual signals and
212. imum and maximum references are defined by parameters 1104 REF1 MIN and 7105 REF1 MAX Note Parameter 1003 DIRECTION must be set to REQUEST Speed ref Par 1301 20 par 1302 100 REF 1105 1104 1104 0 1104 7 1104 1105 ae Hysteresis 4 2V 4mA 6 10V 20mA enrecale WARNING If parameter 7307 MINIMUM Al1 is set to O V and analog input signal is lost ie O V the rotation of the motor is reversed to the maximum reference Set the following parameters to activate a fault when analog input signal is lost Set parameter 1301 MINIMUM Al1 to 20 2 V or 4 mA Set parameter 3027 Al1 FAULT LIMIT to 5 or higher Set parameter 3007 Al lt MIN FUNCTION to FAULT a See selection Al1 JOYST DI3U 4D R Digital input 3 Reference increase Digital input DI4 Reference decrease Stop command resets the reference to zero Parameter 2205 ACCELER TIME 2 defines the rate of the reference change DI3U 4D Digital input 3 Reference increase Digital input DI4 Reference decrease The program stores the active speed reference not reset by a stop command When the drive is restarted the motor ramps up at the selected acceleration rate to the stored reference Parameter 2205 ACCELER TIME2 defines the rate of the reference change COMM Fieldbus reference REF1 ss reference REF1 COMM Al1 O REN of fieldbus reference REF1 and analog input Al See section Reference selection and correction on page 271 COMM AI1 Multiplication of fieldbus r
213. in for R4 3 Secure the cables outside the drive mechanically oe ee a i Pim j i a oy Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Connecting the control cables E 1 O terminals Electrical installation 49 The figure below shows the I O terminals Tightening torque is 0 4 N m 3 5 Ibf in J701 X1C X1A X1B 1 SCR 17 ROCOM 2 Al 18 RONC 3 GND 19 RONO 4 10V 20 DOSRC 5 Al2 21 DOOUT 6 GND 22 DOGND 7 AO 8 GND X1C 9 24V 23 SCR 10 GND 24 B 11 DCOM 25 A 12 DI1 26 GND_A J701 Connects 120 ohm termination resistor See page 13 DI2 54 14 DI3 S1 Selects voltage or current as the signal types for 15 DI4 analog inputs Al1 and Al2 16 DI5 digital or frequency input Voltage and current selection for analog inputs Switch S1 selects voltage 0 2 10 V 10 10 V or current 0 4 20 mA 20 20 mA as the signal types for analog inputs Al1 and Al2 The factory settings are unipolar voltage for Al1 0 2 10 V and unipolar current for Al2 0 4 20 mA which correspond to the default usage in the application macros The switch is located to the left of I O terminal 9 see the I O terminal figure above lt lt 31 m Top position I 0 4 20 mA default for Al2 or 20 20 mA E m Bottom position U 0 2 10 V default for Al1 or 10 10 V Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888
214. indication of the general condition of the pump piping and valves CONTROL Signal 0727 PID 2 OUTPUT is monitored and compared to DEV2 parameter 4479 PROFILE OUTP LIM Monitoring the deviation between the reference and the actual value gives an indication of the general condition of the pump piping and valves APPL OUTPUT Signal 0776 APPL BLK OUTPUT is monitored and compared to parameter 4479 PROFILE OUTP LIM The signal constantly remaining at 100 may indicate a leak in the output piping 4419 PROFILE Supervision limit for the Application Profile protection 100 0 OUTP LIM Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com oo NO Z O O m m 234 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 1 0 1 O O gt Delay time for the Application Profile protection ON DLY 0 00 100 00 h Delay time 1 Enables the Precharge function which calculates reference NOT SEL ENABLE steps NOT SEL Not enabled DI1 When DI1 is active 1 Precharge function is active when 1 the drive is started If DI1 becomes inactive 0 before Precharge is finished normal PID control is enabled See selection D11 500 0 500 0 Supervision limit D gt D gt D gt gt N N O 213 23 3 m O TI T hee g lt O O dh 5 DI2 DI3 See selection DI1 DI4 See selection DI1 DI5 See selection DI1 ACTIVE Precharge is active a
215. info clrwtr com Actual signals and parameters 263 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 9907 MOTOR NOM Defines the nominal motor frequency ie the frequency at FREQ which the output voltage equals the motor nominal voltage Field weakening point Nom frequency Supply voltage Motor nom voltage 10 0 500 0 Hz Frequenoy IO Defines the nominal motor speed Must be equal to the Type value on the motor rating plate dependent 50 18000 rpm Defines the nominal motor power Must equal the value on PN the motor rating plate 1 0 1 kW hp Inverts two phases in the motor cable This changes the NO INVERSION direction of the motor rotation without having to exchange the positions of two motor cable phase conductors at the drive output terminals or at the motor connection box Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 264 Actual signals and parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 265 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus What this chapter contains The chapter describes how the drive can be controlled by external devices over a communication network using embedded fieldbus System overview The drive is connected to an external control system via embedded fieldbus The embedded fieldbus supports Modbus RTU protocol Modbus is a serial asynchron
216. info clrwtr com Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 285 The following tables describe the Status Word content for the DCU profile Name vawe Status O OoOO o Drive isnotready SS MO a STARTED i o o a RUNNING Ge A KK ZERO_SPEED ee O ACCELERATE a O IN AT_SETPOINT 1 Drive is at setpoint Actual value equals reference value ie is within tolerance limits A Drive has not reached setpoint LIMIT 1 Operation is limited by group 20 LIMITS settings Operation is within group 20 LIMITS settings SUPERVISION 1 A supervised parameter group 32 SUPERVISION is outside its limits All supervised parameters are within limits O REV_REF Drive reference is in reverse direction Drive reference is in forward direction 0 Drive is running in forward direction 2 PANEL LOCAL A E O U 13 FIELDBUS LOCAL 9 Controis notin fieldbus local mode 0 Gontrlis in ExT moe SSS i o Drive is not in a fault state Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 286 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus DCU Profile Status Word parameter 0304 Bit Name Value Status 6 ALARM An alarm is on No alarms are on NOTICE A maintenance request is pending No maintenance request DIRLOCK Direction lock is ON Direction change is locked Direction lock is OFF LOCALLOCK Local mode lock is ON Local mode is locked Local mode lock is OFF CTL_MODE N A Drive i
217. ing zero eg 105 means parameter 0705 TORQUE Value 100 means that no signal is displayed Repeat for signals 2 3408 SIGNAL2 PARAM and 3 3415 SIGNAL3 PARAM For example if 3407 0 and 3475 0 browsing is disabled and only the signal specified by 3408 appears in the display If all three parameters are set to 0 ie no signals are selected for monitoring the panel displays text n A point location and unit of the source signal setting 9 DIRECT Bar graphs are not available for Basic Operation Panel For details see parameter 3404 Signal 1 parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM Signal 2 parameter 3477 OUTPUT2 DSP FORM Signal 3 parameter 3478 OUTPUT3 DSP FORM Specify the decimal point location or use the decimal O PAR BE F WO Select the units to be displayed for the signals This has no effect if parameter 3404 3411 3418 is set to 9 3 DIRECT For details see parameter 3405 Signal 1 parameter 3405 OUTPUT1 UNIT Signal 2 parameter 3472 OUTPUT2 UNIT Signal 3 parameter 3479 OUTPUT3 UNIT PAR BE F WO minimum and maximum display values This has no effect if parameter 3404 3411 3478 is set to 9 PAR F WD DIRECT For details see parameters 3406 and El Select the scalings for the signals by specifying the 0 3407 Signal 1 parameters 3406 OUTPUT1 MIN and 3407 D 0 OUTPUT1 MAX PAR BE FWD Signal 2 parameters 3413 OUTPUT2 MIN and 3414 OUTPUT2 MAX Signal 3 parameters 3420 OUTPUT3 MIN and 3421
218. ings apply at ambient temperature of 40 C 104 F E Derating The load capacity decreases if the installation site ambient temperature exceeds 40 C 104 F or if the altitude exceeds 1000 meters 3300 ft Temperature derating In the temperature range 40 C 50 C 104 F 122 F the rated output current is decreased by 1 for every additional 1 C 1 8 F The output current is calculated by multiplying the current given in the rating table by the derating factor Example If the ambient temperature is 50 C 122 F the derating factor is 100 1 10 C 90 or 0 90 The output current is then 0 90 hy Altitude derating In altitudes 1000 2000 m 3300 6600 ft above sea level the derating is 1 for every 100 m 330 ft Switching frequency derating Derate according to the switching frequency used see parameter 2606 SWITCHING FREQ as follows Switching Drive voltage rating i guengy Un 200 240 V Un 380 480 V AKHz No derating No derating 8kKHz Derate hy to 90 Derate hy to 75 for RO or to 80 for R1 R4 Derate hy to 80 Derate ly to 50 for RO or to 65 for R1 R4 and derate maximum ambient temperature to 30 C 86 F Derate hy to 75 Derate ly to 50 and derate maximum ambient temperature to 30 C 86 F Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 310 Technical data Power cable sizes and fuses Cable dim
219. input power of the drive is switched off Do not make any insulation or voltage withstand tests on the drive If a drive whose EMC filter is not disconnected is installed on an IT system an ungrounded power system or a high resistance grounded over 30 ohms power system the system will be connected to ground potential through the EMC filter capacitors of the drive This may cause danger or damage the drive If a drive whose EMC filter is not disconnected is installed on a corner grounded TN system the drive will be damaged All ELV extra low voltage circuits connected to the drive must be used within a zone of equipotential bonding ie within a zone where all simultaneously accessible conductive parts are electrically connected to prevent hazardous voltages appearing between them This is accomplished by a proper factory grounding Note Even when the motor is stopped dangerous voltage is present at the power circuit terminals U1 V1 W1 and U2 V2 W2 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Safety 17 E General safety WARNING Ignoring the following instructions can cause physical injury or death or damage to the equipment e The drive is not field repairable Never attempt to repair a malfunctioning drive contact your local ABB representative or Authorized Service Center for replacement e Make sure that dust from drilling does not enter the drive during the installat
220. iod 2 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com o 22 3 212 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq TOT v4 12 14 10 era merodd Tirant Time periods 3an O Oe 3627 TIMED FUNC 2 See parameter 3626 TIMED FUNC 1 SRC UN SRC See parameter 3626 TIMED FUNC 1 SRC A 3628 TIMED FUNC 3 See parameter 3626 TIMED FUNC 1 SRC UN SRC See parameter 3626 TIMED FUNC 1 SRC A 3629 TIMED FUNC 4 See parameter 3626 TIMED FUNC 1 SRC UN SRC See parameter 3626 TIMED FUNC 1 SRC A Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Actual signals and parameters 213 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 3701 USER LOAD C Defines supervision mode for the user adjustable load NOT SEL curve Motor torque Overload area 3706 3709 37172 3715 3718 3714 3717 Allowed operating area Underload area 3704 3707 3710 3713 3716 Output frequency Hz NOT SEL Supervision not active UNDERLOAD Supervision for the torque dropping below the underload curve OVERLOAD Supervision for the torque exceeding the overload curve BOTH Supervision for the torque dropping below the underload 3 curve or exceeding the overload curve 3702 USER LOAD C Defines the action wanted during load supervision FAULT FUNC 2 1 FAULT A fault is generated whe
221. ion Electrically conductive dust inside the drive may cause damage or lead to malfunction e Ensure sufficient cooling Safe start up and operation These warnings are intended for all who plan the operation start up or operate the drive E General safety WARNING Ignoring the following instructions can cause physical injury or death or damage to the equipment e Before adjusting the drive and putting it into service make sure that the motor and all driven equipment are suitable for operation throughout the speed range provided by the drive The drive can be adjusted to operate the motor at speeds above and below the speed provided by connecting the motor directly to the power line e Do not activate automatic fault reset functions if dangerous situations can occur When activated these functions will reset the drive and resume operation after a fault e Do not control the motor with an AC contactor or disconnecting device disconnecting means use instead the control panel start and stop keys and or external commands I O or fieldbus The maximum allowed number of charging cycles of the DC capacitors ie power ups by applying power is two per minute and the maximum total number of chargings is 15 000 Note e Ifan external source for start command is selected and it is ON the drive will start immediately after an input voltage break or fault reset unless the drive is configured for 3 wire a pulse start stop e When t
222. ion macros on page 99 use analog input 2 Al2 The macro wiring diagrams for these macros show the connection when a separately powered sensor is used The figure below gives an example of a connection using a two wire sensor 24V 9 24V Auxiliary voltage output non isolated 24 V DC max 200 mA Note The sensor is supplied through its current output Thus the output signal must be 4 20 mA Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 52 Electrical installation Default I O connection diagram The default connection of the control signals depends on the application macro in use which is selected with parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO The default macro is the ABB Standard macro It provides a general purpose I O configuration with three constant speeds Parameter values are the default values given in section Default values with different macros on page 151 For information on other macros see chapter Application macros on page 99 The default I O connections for the ABB standard macro are given in the figure below X1A 1 SR Signal able shed creo zian pa Reference voltage 10 V DC max 10 mA Not in use by default 0 10 V max 500 E 6 GND Analog input circuit common 7 AO Output as Laca wale 0 20 mA had EE yg 2a Auta votage output 24 V DG max 200 mA 10 GND Auxiliary voltage output common m DCOM Digital input common 12 DI1_
223. ions according to the daylight saving changes How to copy parameters from the drive to the control panel Parameter Backup How to restore parameters from the control panel to the drive Bade Backup How to view backup information Parameter Backup How to edit and change parameter settings related to I O terminals I O Settings 98 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 82 Control panels How to get help Step Action SSC Press to read the context sensitive help text for the item that is highlighted If help text exists for the item it is shown on the display cue defines If the whole text is not visible scroll the lines with keys Ca and Cv After reading the text return to the previous display by pressing r How to find out the panel version 1 If the power is switched on switch it off A 2 Keep key 2 pressed down while you switch on the power and read the information The display shows the following panel information Kay ANANA ARENA A Panel SW panel firmware version XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX ROM CRC panel ROM check sum Flash Rev flash content version Flash content comment When you release the gt key the panel goes to the Output mode Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Control panels 83 How to start stop and switch between local and remote control You can start st
224. ions where no or one constant speed is used The Potentiometer speed is controlled by two digital inputs increase decrease keep unchanged Hand Auto Speed control applications where switching between two control devices is needed Some control signal terminals are reserved to one device the rest for the other One digital input selects between the terminals devices in use Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 100 Application macros Macro Suitable applications PID Control Process control applications for example different closed loop control systems such as pressure control level control and flow control It is possible to switch between process and speed control Some control signal terminals are reserved for process control others for speed control One digital input selects between process and speed control PFC Control Pump alternation applications for example booster stations in buildings The pressure in the network is adjusted by changing the speed of the pump according to the signal received from the pressure transducer and adding auxiliary pumps directly on line when needed SPFC Control Soft PFC Control for pump alternation applications where lower pressure peaks are desirable when a new auxiliary motor is started User The user can save the customized standard macro ie the parameter settings including group 99 START UP DATA into the permanent memory and re
225. is active The start order depends on the run 1 TIME times RELAY The start order is fixed to be the order of the relays 2 ORDER 10 9802 COMM PROT 7 Activates the external serial communication and selects the NOT SEL SEL interface NOT SEL No communication O STD MODBUS Embedded fieldbus Interface RS 485 provided by optional 1 FMBA 01 Modbus Adapter connected to drive terminal X3 See chapter Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus on page 265 MODBUS Embedded fieldbus Interface RS 232 ie control panel RS232 connector See chapter Fieldbus contro with embedded fieldbus on page 265 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Actual signals and parameters 261 All parameters No Name Value Description UO O gt TI eJ m Ko 9901 LANGUAGE Selects the display language Note With the ACS CP D Assistant Control Panel the following languages are available English 0 Chinese 1 Korean 2 and Japanese 3 British English American English German talian Spanish Portuguese Dutch French Danish Finnish Swedish Russian Polish Turkish Czech Hungarian PPL gt N on BR ow rp gt mi O E U IT ala BR al 9902 A IC Selects the application macro See chapter Application ABB MACRO macros on page 99 STANDA ABB Standard macro for constant speed applications STANDARD 3 WIRE 3 wire macro for constant speed applications ALT
226. is not responsible for e Any costs resulting from a failure if the installation commissioning repair alteration or ambient conditions of the drive do not fulfil the requirements specified in the documentation delivered with the unit and other relevant documentation e Units subjected to misuse negligence or accident e Units comprised of materials provided or designs stipulated by the purchaser In no event shall the manufacturer its suppliers or subcontractors be liable for special indirect incidental or consequential damages losses or penalties Patent protection in the USA This product is protected by one or more of the following US patents 4 920 306 5 301 089 5 463 302 5 521 483 5 532 568 5 589 754 5 612 604 5 654 624 5 799 805 5 940 286 5 942 874 5 952 613 6 094 364 6 147 887 6 175 256 6 184 740 6 195 274 6 229 356 6 252 436 6 265 724 6 305 464 6 313 599 6 316 896 6 335 607 6 370 049 6 396 236 6 448 735 6 498 452 6 552 510 6 597 148 6 600 290 6 741 059 6 774 758 6 844 794 6 856 502 6 859 374 6 922 883 6 940 253 6 934 169 6 956 352 6 958 923 6 967 453 6 972 976 6 977 449 6 984 958 6 985 371 6 992 908 6 999 329 7 023 160 7 034 510 7 036 223 7 045 987 7 057 908 7 059 390 7 067 997 7 082 374 7 084 604 7 098 623 7 102 325 7 109 780 7 164 562 7 176 779 7 190 599 7 215 099 7 221 152 7 227 325 7 245 197 7 250 739 7 262 577 7 271 505 7 274 573 7 279 802 7 280 938 7 330 095 7 349 814 7 352 220 7 365 622 7 372 696 7 388 765 D503 9
227. ive for more details on the maintenance On the Internet go to ABB website and select Drive Services Maintenance and Field Services Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 304 Maintenance and hardware diagnostics Cooling fan The drive s cooling fan has a life span of minimum 25 000 operating hours The actual life span depends on the drive usage and ambient temperature When the Assistant Control Panel is in use the Notice Handler Assistant informs when the definable value of the operating hour counter is reached see parameter 2901 COOLING FAN TRIG This information can also be passed to the relay output see parameter 7407 RELAY OUTPUT 1 regardless of the used panel type Fan failure can be predicted by the increasing noise from the fan bearings If the drive is operated in a critical part of a process fan replacement is recommended once these symptoms start appearing Replacement fans are available from ABB Do not use other than ABB specified spare parts E Replacing the cooling fan frame sizes R1 R4 Only frame sizes R1 R4 include a fan frame size RO has natural cooling WARNING Read and follow the instructions in chapter Safety on page 15 Ignoring the instructions can cause physical injury or death or damage to the equipment 1 Stop the drive and disconnect it from the power line Wait for five minutes to let the drive DC capacitors discharge Ensure by
228. ization E Definitions Ln continuous rms input current for dimensioning cables and fuses at ambient temperature of 40 C liD continuous output current at max ambient temperature of 50 C 10 overloadability for one minute every ten minutes lon maximum continuous output current at ambient temperature of 40 C No overloadability derating 1 for every additional 1 C up to 50 C lomax maximum instantaneous output current Available for two seconds every ten minutes at start up or as long as allowed by the drive temperature Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Technical data 309 PN typical motor power The kilowatt ratings apply to most IEC 4 pole motors The horsepower ratings apply to most NEMA 4 pole motors RO R4 ACS310 is manufactured in frame sizes RO R4 Some instructions and other information that only concern certain frame sizes are marked with the symbol of the frame size R0 R4 E Sizing The current ratings are the same regardless of the supply voltage within one voltage range To achieve the rated motor power given in the table the rated current of the drive must be higher than or equal to the rated motor current Note 1 The maximum allowed motor shaft power is limited to 1 5 Py If the limit is exceeded motor torque and current are automatically restricted The function protects the input bridge of the drive against overload Note 2 The rat
229. kbit s 57 6 kbit s 76 8 kbit s The new settings will take effect when the drive is next powered up or when parameter 5302 EFB STATION ID setting is cleared and reset Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 268 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus Drive control parameters After the Modbus communication has been set up the drive control parameters listed in the table below should be checked and adjusted when necessary The Setting for fieldbus control column gives the value to use when the Modbus interface is the desired source or destination for that particular signal The Function Information column gives a description of the parameter Parameter Setting for Function Information Modbus register fieldbus address control CONTROL COMMAND SOURCE SELECTION ABB DRV 1001 EXT1 COMM Enables 0307 FB CMD WORD 1 bits 40031 bits COMMANDS 0 1 START STOP when EXT1 is selected as the active control 1002 EXT2 COMM Enables 0307 FB CMD WORD 1 bits 40031 bits COMMANDS 0 1 START STOP when EXT2 is 0 1 selected as the active control location 1003 FORWARD Enables rotation direction control as 40031 bit 2 DIRECTION REVERSE defined by parameters 7007 and explained in section Reference handling on page 274 1102 Enables EXT1 EXT2 selection 40001 40031 bit 5 EXT1 EXT2 SEL through 0307 FB CMD WORD 1 bit 5 bit 11 with ABB Drives profile 5379 EFB PAR 19 bit 11 1106 REF2 COMM Fieldbus
230. l parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 0 0 3600 0s Delay time 8116 AUX MOT Sets the Stop Delay for the auxiliary motors 3 0s STOP D The output frequency must remain below the low frequency limit parameter 8112 8113 or 8114 for this time period before the auxiliary motor stops See 8112 LOW FREQ 1 for a complete description of the operation 0 0 3600 0 s Delay time 1 8117 NR OF AUX Sets the number of auxiliary motors Each auxiliary motor MOT requires a relay output which the drive uses to send start stop signals The Autochange function if used requires an additional relay output for the speed regulated motor The following describes the set up of the required relay outputs Relay outputs As noted above each auxiliary motor requires a relay output which the drive uses to send start stop signals The following describes how the drive keeps track of motors and relays The drive provides one relay output RO1 An external relay output module can be added to provide relay outputs RO2 RO4 Note If five auxiliary motors are used Autochange disabled use transistor output TO in addition to relay outputs RO1 RO4 Note that max voltage at TO is 30 V DC Parameters 1407 1403 and 1410 define respectively how relays RO1 RO4 are used the parameter value 31 PFC defines the relay as used for PFC The drive assigns auxiliary motors to relays in ascending order If the Autochange functio
231. l signal sources are defined by parameters 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS and 1106 REF2 SELECT Fieldbus interface as the source for EXT1 EXT2 selection ie control word 0307 FB CMD WORD 1 bit 5 with ABB Drives profile 5379 EFB PAR 19 bit 11 The control word is sent by the fieldbus controller via the fieldbus adapter or embedded fieldbus Modbus to the drive For the control word bits see sections DCU communication profile on page 283 and ABB Drives communication profile on page 278 Oo NM gt EXT2 timed function 1 inactive EXT1 See parameter group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS TIMED FUNG 2 See selection TIMED FUNC 1 TIMED FUNC 3 See selection TIMEDFUNC1 TIMED FUNC 4 See selection TIMEDFUNC1 Inverted digital input OM 1 EXT O EXT DIN See selection DHONV E DISUNV See selection DIINV SSS See selection HIN SSCS 1103 REF1 SELECT Selects the signal source for external reference REF1 See AI1 section Block diagram Reference source for EXT1 on page 117 KEYPAD Control panel AM Analog input ar C mn Analog input A2 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com NO i 164 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq Al1 JOYST Analog input Al1 as joystick The minimum input signal runs 3 the motor at the maximum reference in the reverse direction the maximum input at the maximum reference in the forward direction Min
232. lay between the 24 V DC voltage supply offered by the drive and a digital input The figure below displays the connection Par 3501 THERM 0 or THERM 1 Thermistor WARNING According to IEC 664 the connection of the motor thermistor tothe digital input requires double or reinforced insulation between motor live parts and the thermistor Reinforced insulation entails a clearance and creeping distance of 8 mm 400 500 V AC equipment If the thermistor assembly does not fulfill the requirement the other I O terminals of the drive must be protected against contact or a thermistor relay must be used to isolate the thermistor from the digital input E Settings Parameter Additional information Analog input settings Analog output settings 35 MOTOR TEMP MEAS Motor temperature measurement settings At the motor end the cable shield should be earthed through a 10 nF capacitor If this is not possible the shield is to be left unconnected E Diagnostics Actual value Additional information 0145 Motor temperature Alarm Fault Additional information MOTOR TEMP MOT OVERTEMP Excessive motor temp Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Program features 141 Timed functions A variety of drive functions can be time controlled eg start stop and EXT1 EXT2 control The drive offers e four start and stop times START TIME 1 4 STOP TIME 1 4 e four start and stop da
233. le Dh Ch ae ew 141 Example essa oe oe pera eae o gt bate oases aaa Samos oes 142 SENOS acrobacia ees hie hhh oe ee ee dae eee eee oes 142 US Oe CUS in 6 ee brie he oan wae dha ant ea oe htt orate Nae Sh hh are ect 143 o pice ca cheba et we DAa ee oe EO ee a ee Ae E ee ae 143 neos CS beck a rea ons hanced ay wee Nh E ape hard nde Hh wae te ape aie 143 Energy OPUMIZE si t a ee ee oe a al a ee Ho ere al la ee ee eee 144 o Late schaee ei whens Rees Rae ee ee ae ae ee eee 144 po A re er ee a ee a ee eer eae eres eer eee ae eer ee arate eee eer ee 144 PUMP ClEANING ns onthe hie a Oe ad he dd Owe OR ee Oe BEE 144 DOU Sak a tay aes a neh hee Ala Bk ee A a a ce es a we we Ahk 145 LATA AY AAN ce 6 che at es bsnl hc Bh hs a ic 1b a A hcl a ei Ws ace Gh E ht ak doses 145 SIS carrera ke eet a nk ew oe Web RUE ae ie Be ew oh dh eo ac nee 145 DIAGNOSIS reinas Gt E Ae Se Stes ORES Oke ee dais die 145 PRG and SERES CONN carino te tte Rees tdi bbe ht Rd ORES oe dio eos 146 a a ake ah sab oe sara ae E tent ote 146 SPEGCONGOL ti encaea dae paa AR eae POE eee de ee Oe 146 o cai ose e003 a ea one a A orn hb tance Gobo od ea a E wae Ea daddy wakes ah aes 147 Bs peo oo once Rc ata beseech A ened a ee ea seca PEN ed aed 147 12 Actual signals and parameters What this chapter contains 4 3c 2 c2 oh e b0eedaen Cock dese bdewe eee ed dees eae aoe 149 Terms and abbreviations 5 62 o edos eae gee ends Gree baw PD weds ane Se ee ek oe Se eed 149 PieldDUS CQUIVGIC
234. lected group parameter Press and hold 37 for about two seconds until the display shows the value of the parameter with underneath indicating that changing of the value is now possible Note When is visible pressing keys 4 gt and Cv simultaneously changes the displayed value to the default value of the parameter PAR BEAN F WD value When you have changed the parameter value Use keys 45 and SY to select the parameter gt starts flashing PAR BEAN F WD e To save the displayed parameter value press Y e To cancel the new value and keep the original press CZ Use keys 4 5 and SY to find the desired Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Control panels 75 How to select the monitored signals Sep Acton OSC You can select which signals are monitored in the Output mode and how they are displayed with group 1 3 34 PANEL DISPLAY parameters See page 74 for PAR am FWD detailed instructions on changing parameter values By default the display shows three signals 1 4 Signal 1 0703 OUTPUT FREQ Signal 2 0104 CURRENT PAR Sg F WD Signal 3 0705 TORQUE To change the default signals select up to three 1 D signals from group 01 OPERATING DATA to be PAR SEM F WO shown Signal 1 Change the value of parameter 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM to the index of the signal parameter in group 07 OPERATING DATA number of the parameter without the lead
235. let pressure generates an alarm onthe 1 control panel display Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 230 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq PROTECT Detection of low inlet pressure generates an alarm onthe 2 control panel display The output of the PI controller is ramped down according to parameter 4477 PID OUT DEC TIME to the forced reference set by parameter 4408 INLET FORCED REF The drive will revert to the original reference if the pressure subsequently exceeds the supervision level The following diagram describes the inlet pressure supervision function Measured inlet pressure FAULT Detection of low inlet pressure trips the drive on a fault 4402 Al MEASURE Selects the analog input for pump fan inlet pressure INLET supervision NOT SEL No analog input selected Pump fan inlet pressure monitored through analog input Al1 See selection Al Sets the supervision limit for the primary inlet pressure measurement If the value of the selected input falls below this limit the action defined by parameter 4407 INLET PROT CTRL is taken after the delay set by parameter 4407 INLET CTRL DLY expires 0 00 100 00 The range corresponds to 0 10 V or 0 20 mA on the 1 0 01 analog input With a bipolar input the absolute input value is considered 4404 VERY LOW Enables and selects the mode of the secondary inlet N
236. ll parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 0 1 100 0 Gain When value is set to 0 1 the PID controller output changes one tenth as much as the error value When value is set to 100 the PID controller output changes one hunded times as much as the error value 4002 INTEGRATION Defines the integration time for the process PID1 controller TIME The integration time defines the rate at which the controller output changes when the error value is constant The shorter the integration time the faster the continuous error value is corrected Too short an integration time makes the control unstable A Error B Error value step C Controller output with gain 1 D Controller output with gain 10 A B D 4001 10 C 4001 1 0 0 NOT SEL Integration time If parameter value is set to zero integration 1 0 1 s 0 1 3600 0 s l part of the PID controller is disabled Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 216 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 4003 DERIVATION _ Defines the derivation time for the process PID controller 0 0s TIME Derivative action boosts the controller output if the error value changes The longer the derivation time the more the speed controller output is boosted during the change If the derivation time is set to zero the controller works as a Pl controller otherwise as a P
237. lso be switched to speed control using a digital input To enable the macro set the value of parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO to 6 PID CONTROL For the parameter default values see section Default values with different macros on page 757 If you use other than the default connections presented below see section I O terminals on page 49 Note Parameter 2708 START INHIBIT must remain in the default setting O OFF E Default I O connections X1A i sor Signal cabe srie soree Lf 1 toro 14 fe GND Analog input circuit common Dees a2 Process actual value 4 20mA7 GND Analog input creat common Cit a E 9 201 ante volage ouput 24 V DO mar 200A 10 GND fAuxiiary voltage output common fit pcom Oita imputcammen halon Stop 0 Start 1 Wand f13 Di2 Hanal 0 PID 1 control selection 14 pia Constant speed 1 parameter 1202 soa Runen ooo 16 015 Stop 0 Star Pi X1B rrea Relay output 1 No fault Fault 1 19 RONO_ ee 21 poort 22 DOGND Digital output max 100 mA y No fault Fault 1 1 Hand 0 10 V gt speed reference 3 The signal source must be powered PID 0 10 V gt 0 100 PID setpoint externally See the manufacturer s 2 360 degree grounding under a clamp instructions An example of a connection using a two wire sensor is given on page 51 Tightening torque 0 4 N m 3 5 Ibf in Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4
238. ltimeter impedance at least 1 Mohm that there is no voltage present 2 Check the tightness of the power cable connections Use the tightening torques given in section Terminal and lead through data for the power cables on page 313 3 Restore power Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 306 Maintenance and hardware diagnostics Control panel E Cleaning the control panel Use a soft damp cloth to clean the control panel Avoid harsh cleaners which could scratch the display window E Changing the battery in the Assistant Control Panel A battery is only used in Assistant Control Panels that have the clock function available and enabled The battery keeps the clock operating in memory during power interruptions The expected life for the battery is greater than ten years To remove the battery use a coin to rotate the battery holder on the back of the control panel Replace the battery with type CR2032 Note The battery is NOT required for any control panel or drive functions except the clock LEDs There is a green and a red LED on the front of the drive They are visible through the panel cover but invisible if a control panel is attached to the drive The Assistant Control Panel has one LED The table below describes the LED indications LED off LED lit and steady LED blinking On the front of No power Green Power supply on Green Drive in an alarm the drive the
239. lue X1A 4 Resolution Accuracy Voltage Type Frequency input Input impedance Type Max switching voltage Max switching current Max continuous current Type Max switching voltage Max switching current Frequency Resolution Accuracy Cable Termination Isolation Transfer rate Communication type Protocol Technical data 315 0 2 10 V Rin gt 312 kohm 10 10 V Rin gt 312 kohm 0 4 20 mA Ri 100 ohm 20 20 mA Rin 100 ohm 10 V 1 max 10 mA R lt 10 kohm 0 1 1 0 4 20 mA load lt 500 ohm 24 V DC 10 max 200 mA 12 24 V DC with internal or external supply PNP and NPN Pulse train 0 16 kHz X1A 16 only 2 4 kohm NO NC 250 VAC 30 VDC 0 5A 30V DC 5A 230 VAC 2 Arms Transistor output PNP 30 V DC 100 mA 30 V DC short circuit protected 10 Hz 16 kHz 1 Hz 0 2 Shielded twisted pair impedance 100 150 ohm Trunk line drop lines allowed Bus interface isolated from the drive 1 2 76 8 kbit s Serial asynchronous half duplex Modbus Approximately 95 to 98 at nominal power level depending on the drive size and options Degrees of protection IP20 cabinet installation UL open Standard enclosure The drive must be installed in a cabinet to fulfil the requirements for shielding from contact IP20 NEMA 1 Achieved with an option kit including a hood and a connection box Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web
240. lues can be adjusted The update cycle for the analog input is 8 ms 12 ms cycle once per second The cycle time is shorter when information is transferred to the application program 8 ms gt 2 ms E Settings Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Program features 121 E Diagnostics Actual signal Additional information 0120 0121 Analog input values ALTA signal loss Alt LOSS Al2 LOSS AI1 Al2 signal below Al1 A12 FAULT LIMIT 3021 3022 AIt LOSS Al2 LOSS AI1 Al2 signal below limit Al1 Al2 FAULT LIMIT 3021 3022 PAR Al SCALE Incorrect Al signal scaling 1302 lt 1301 or 1305 lt 1304 Programmable analog output One programmable current output 0 20 mA is available Analog output signal can be inverted filtered and the maximum and minimum values can be adjusted The analog output signals can be proportional to motor speed output frequency output current motor torque motor power etc The update cycle for the analog output is 2 ms It is also possible to write a value to an analog output through a serial communication link E Settings Additional information Group 15 ANALOG OUTPUTS AO value selection and processing Group 35 MOTOR TEMP MEAS AO in motor temperature measurement E Diagnostics Actual signal Additional information 0124 PAR AO SCALE Incorrect AO signal scaling 1503 lt 1502 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web
241. measuring with a multimeter impedance at least 1 Mohm that there is no voltage present 2 Remove the hood if the drive has the NEMA 1 option 3 Lever the fan holder off the drive frame with eg a screwdriver and lift the hinged fan holder slightly upward from its front edge 4 Free the fan cable from the clip in the fan holder 5 Disconnect the fan cable Use long nose pliers if needed Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Maintenance and hardware diagnostics 305 6 Remove the fan from the holder 7 Install the new fan in reverse order 8 Restore power Capacitors E Reforming the capacitors The capacitors must be reformed if the drive has been stored for a year See section Type designation label on page 26 for how to find out the manufacturing time from the serial number For information on reforming the capacitors refer to Guide for Capacitor Reforming in ACS50 ACS55 ACS150 ACS310 ACS350 and ACS ACH550 3AFE68735190 English available on the Internet go to ABB website and enter the code in the Search field Power connections WARNING Read and follow the instructions in chapter Safety on page 15 Ignoring the instructions can cause physical injury or death or damage to the equipment 1 Stop the drive and disconnect it from the power line Wait for five minutes to let the drive DC capacitors discharge Ensure by measuring with a mu
242. meter 2903 a maintenance notice is displayed on the panel 0 65535 Mrev Millions of revolutions Parameter is reset by setting it to 1 1 zero 2905 RUN TIME Defines the trigger point for the drive run time counter Value 0 0 kh TRIG is compared to parameter 2906 RUN TIME ACT value 0 0 6553 5 kh Time If parameter value is set to zero the trigger is 1 0 1 kh disabled 2906 RUN TIME Defines the actual value for the drive run time counter AC When parameter 2905 RUN TIME TRIG has been set to a non zero value the counter starts When the actual value of the counter exceeds the value defined by parameter 2905 a maintenance notice is displayed on the panel 0 0 6553 5 kh Time Parameter is reset by setting it to zero 0 1 kh 2907 USER MWh Defines the trigger point for the drive power consumption TRIG counter Value is compared to parameter 2908 USER MWh ACT value Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com l lt 0 1 kh Ola Oo ol ol o z san 5 lt D Ss D D gt gt 194 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 0 0 6553 5 Megawatt hours If parameter value is set to zero the trigger 1 0 1 MWh is disabled MWh 2908 USER MWh Defines the actual value of the drive power consumption ACT counter When parameter 2907 USER MWh TRIG has been set to a non zero value the counter starts When the act
243. meter Set by parameter 9902 after changing any parameter setting or reperforming the motor identification The last settings saved by the user are loaded into use whenever the power is switched off and on again or the parameter 9902 setting is changed Any unsaved changes will be lost Note The value of this parameter is not included in the User Parameter Sets A setting once made remains despite User Parameter Set change Note Selection of User Parameter Set 2 can be supervised via relay outputs RO R4 and digital output DO See parameters 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 7403 RELAY OUTPUT 3 7470 RELAY OUTPUT 4 and 7805 DO SIGNAL NOT SEL User Parameter Set change is not possible through a digital input Parameter Sets can be changed only from control panel DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 User Parameter Set control through digital input DI1 Falling 1 edge of digital input DI1 User Parameter Set 1 is loaded into use Rising edge of digital input DI1 User Parameter a Set 2 is loaded into use DIZ See selection DI1 oe See selection DI1 See selection DI1 See selection DI1 DI1 INV User Parameter Set control through inverted digital input DI1 Falling edge of inverted digital input DI1 User Parameter Set 2 is loaded into use Rising edge of inverted digital input DI1 User Parameter Set 1 is loaded into use DI2 INV See selection DI1 INV DI3 INV See selection DI1 INV DI4 INV See selection DI1 INV DI5 INV See selec
244. monitored through digital input 1 DI1 See selection DI1 See selection DI1 See selection DI1 See selection DI1 DLY i i i 0 1 4415 OUTLET CTRL Sets the delay after which the action defined by parameter 60 0 s 4409 OUTLET PROT CTRL is taken on detection of high outlet pressure 1800 0 s Delay time 0 1s 4416 OUTLET This reference is used after detection of high outlet FORCED REF pressure See parameter 4409 OUTLET PROT CTRL WARNING Make sure that it is safe to continue operation using this reference 0 1000 oj ajal w rm Q gt 0 1 0 0 100 4417 PID OUT DEC PI controller ramp down time See selection PROTECT for 60 0 s TIME parameters 4407 INLET PROT CTRL and 4409 OUTLET PROT CTRL 0 0 3800 0s_ Delay time 0 1s 4418 APPL Parameters 4478 APPL PROFILE CTL to 4420 PROF PROFILE CTL LIMIT ON DLY provide the Application Profile protection feature based on long term monitoring of an internal status signal If the selected signal exceeds and remains above the supervision limit for a longer time than the set delay parameter 4420 PROF LIMIT ON DLY the internal status signal PROFILE HIGH is set to 1 The signal can be directed to a relay output see parameter group 74 RELAY OUTPUTS NOT SEL Not selected CONTROL Signal 0726 PID 1 OUTPUT is monitored and compared to DEV1 parameter 4479 PROFILE OUTP LIM Monitoring the deviation between the reference and the actual value gives an
245. mp time defined by parameter 2208 EMERG DEC TIME 2025 FIRST START Motor identification Wait until drive indicates that motor 0309 bit 8 magnetization is on identification is completed This alarm belongs to normal start up procedure 2027 USER LOAD Condition defined by See parameter group 37 USER LOAD CURVE 3701 USER LOAD C CURVE 0309 bit 10 MODE has been valid longer than half of the time set by 3703 USER LOAD C TIME 2028 START DELAY Start delay in progress See parameter 2773 START DELAY 0309 bit 11 INLET LOW Pressure at pump fan Check for a closed valve on the inlet 0309 bit 13 inlet too low side of the pump fan Check piping for leaks See parameter group 44 PUMP PROTECTION 2031 OUTLET HIGH Pressure at pump fan Check piping for blocks 0309 bit 14 outlet too high See parameter group 44 PUMP PROTECTION 2032 PIPE FILL Pipe fill in progress See parameters 4427 4426 0309 bit 15 INLET VERY LOW Pressure at pump fan Check for a closed valve on the inlet 0310 bit O inlet too low side of the pump fan Check piping for leaks See parameter group 44 PUMP PROTECTION 2034 OUTLET VERY Pressure at pump fan Check piping for blocks HIGH outlet too high See parameter group 44 PUMP 0310 bit 1 PROTECTION 1 Even when the relay output is configured to indicate alarm conditions eg parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 5 ALARM or 16 FLT ALARM this alarm is not indicated by a relay output
246. n is active The drive generates alarm IO COMM and sets the speed to the value defined by parameter 7208 CONST SPEED 7 WARNING Make sure that it is safe to continue operation in case of a communication break LAST SPEED Protection is active The drive generates alarm IO COMM and freezes the speed to the level the drive was operating at The speed is determined by the average speed over the previous 10 seconds WARNING Make sure that it is safe to continue operation in case of a communication break 3019 COMM FAULT Defines the time delay for the fieldbus communication break 3 0 s TIME supervision See parameter 3078 COMM FAULT FUNC 0 0 600 0 s Delay time 0 1s 3021 Al1 FAULT Defines a fault level for analog input Al1 If parameter 3007 0 1 LIMIT AI lt MIN FUNCTION is set to FAULT the drive trips on fault Al1 LOSS when the analog input signal falls below the set level Do not set this limit below the level defined by parameter 1307 MINIMUM Al1 0 0 100 0 Value in percent of the full signal range 1 0 1 3022 Al2 FAULT Defines a fault level for analog input Al2 If parameter 3007 0 1 LIMIT AI lt MIN FUNCTION is set to FAULT the drive trips on fault Al2 LOSS when the analog input signal falls below the set level Do not set this limit below the level defined by parameter 1304 MINIMUM Al2 0 0 100 0 Value in percent of the full signal range 1 0 1 3023 WIRING FAULT Selects how the drive reacts when inco
247. n is disabled the first auxiliary motor is the one connected to the first relay with a parameter setting 31 PFC and so on If the Autochange function is used the assignments rotate Initially the speed regulated motor is the one connected to the first relay with a parameter setting 31 PFC the first auxiliary motor is the one connected to the second relay with a parameter setting 31 PFC and so on The fourth auxiliary motor uses the same reference step low frequency and start frequency values as the third auxiliary motor 0 4 5 with TO Number of auxiliary motors 1 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 248 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq Ue lt 7 ill A aaa PFC with Autochange mode Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Actual signals and parameters 249 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq The table below shows the PFC motor assignments for some typical settings in the relay output parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 where the settings are either 31 PFC or X anything but 31 and where the Autochange function is disabled 8778 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 Parameter setting Relay assignment HNNAN Autochange disabled 1 H aeee BEE 2 ax Aux X xX Sapo Rae Roe Rc o One additional relay o
248. n on the requested parameter C UHELP press key 2 Scroll the help text with keys 45 and as given on the we Close the help by pressing 77 Voltage value must respond to motor connection e To accept the new value and continue to the setting of the next parameter press 9906 MOTOR_NOM CURR e To stop the assistant press Er 1 2 A EXIT 100 00 SAVE Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Control panels 91 E Changed Parameters mode In the Changed Parameters mode you can e view a list of all parameters that have been changed from the macro default values e change these parameters e start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control How to view and edit changed parameters HERNAN NEUE a Y Go to the Main menu by pressing if you are in the Output mode otherwise by pressing repeatedly wa until you get to the Main menu Go to the Changed Parameters mode by selecting CHANGED PAR on the menu with keys C amp S and Cw and pressing al and vw The value of the selected parameter is shown below it Press y to modify the value 1202 10 SPEED 1 0 Hz CANCEL 1 00 00 SAVE Specify a new value for the parameter with keys CAN LOC UPAR EDIT and Vw 1202 CONST SPEED 1 Pressing the key once increments or decrements the 1 D 0 H 7 value Holding the key down changes the value faster Pressing the keys simultaneously repl
249. n the condition defined by 3701 1 USER LOAD C MODE has been valid longer than the time set by 3703 USER LOAD C MODE ALARM An alarm is generated when the condition defined by 3701 USER LOAD C MODE has been valid longer than half of the time set by 3703 USER LOAD C MODE 3703 USER LOAD C Defines the time limit for generating a fault Half of this time 20 s TIME is used as the limit for generating an alarm 10 400 s 3704 LOAD FREQ 1 Defines the frequency value of the first load curve definition 5 Hz point Must be smaller than 3707 LOAD FREQ 2 0 500 Hz 3705 LOAD TORQ Defines the torque value of the first underload curve 0 LOW 1 definition point Must be smaller than 3706 LOAD TORQ HIGH 1 0 600 3706 LOAD TORQ _ Defines the torque value of the first overload curve definition 300 HIGH 1 point Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 1 1 214 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 0 600 707 LOAD FREQ 2 Defines the frequency value of the second load curve 25 Hz definition point Must be smaller than 3770 LOAD FREQ 3 0 500 Hz 3708 LOAD TORQ Defines the torque value of the second underload curve 15 LOW 2 definition point Must be smaller than 3709 LOAD TORQ HIGH 2 0 600 Torque 3709 LOAD TORQ Defines the torque value of the second overload curve 300 HIGH 2 definition point 0 600 3710 LOAD FREQ 3 Defines the f
250. ne 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 96 Control panels How to upload and download parameters For the upload and download functions available see above Display Go to the Main menu by pressing if you are in the Output mode otherwise by pressing repeatedly we until you get to the Main menu Go to the Par Backup mode by selecting PAR BACKUP on the menu with keys lt A gt and SY 7 and pressing e To copy all parameters including user sets and LOC OPAR BACKUP internal parameters from the drive to the control Copying parameters panel select UPLOAD TO PANEL on the Par Backup menu with keys 45 and v_7 and press Ja During the transfer the display shows the tran ster status as a percentage of completion Press EP if you ABORT 100 00 want to stop the operation tn ee A en eee After the upload is completed the display shows a LOC WMESSAGE message about the completion Press y to return to Parameter upload the Par Backup menu successful OK 100 00 To perform downloads select the appropriate LOC OPAR BACKUP operation here DOWNLOAD FULL SET is used as an Downl oadi ng example on the Par Backup menu with keys 45 full and S Y7 and press SS The display shows the t transfer status as a percentage of completion Press EP if you want to stop the operation After the download is completed the display shows a 0C uMESSAGE message about the completion Press y t
251. nels Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 68 Control panels Basic Control Panel E Features The Basic Control Panel features e numeric control panel with an LCD display copy function parameters can be copied to the control panel memory for later transfer to other drives or for backup of a particular system Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Control panels 69 E Overview The following table summarizes the key functions and displays on the Basic Control Panel LCD display Divided into five areas a Upper left Control location LOC drive control is local that is from the control panel REM drive control is remote such as the drive I O or fieldbus b Upper right Unit of the displayed value c Center Variable in general shows parameter and signal values menus or lists Shows also fault and alarm codes d Lower left and center Panel operation state OUTPUT Output mode PAR Parameter mode MENU Main menu PU Fault mode e Lower right Indicators FWD forward REV reverse direction of the motor rotation Flashing slowly stopped Flashing rapidly running not at setpoint Steady running at setpoint NA Displayed value can be modified in the Parameter and Reference modes 2 RESET EXIT Exits to the next higher menu level without saving changed valu
252. ng Frame sizes R1 R4 are provided with an internal fan The air flow direction is from bottom to top The table below specifies the heat dissipation in the main circuit at nominal load and in the control circuit with minimum load I O and panel not in use and maximum load all digital inputs in the on state and the panel fieldbus and fan in use The total heat dissipation is the sum of the heat dissipation in the main and control circuits Type Heat dissipation Air flow ACS350 Main circuit Control circuit x E U Rated y and hy Min Max W BTU Hr W BTU Hr W BTU Hr m h f min osxozas2 19 65 61 21 227 78 fosxosae 2 s1 106 61 21 227 e fosxosaz2 s8 130 95 32 264 00 2 4 snore 60 2 es 32 204 00 20 18 josxosas2 62 212 95 foax 10A8 2 83 283 105 osrtane2 112 008 tos osos n 08 es T fosxo2ara 16 5 66 osoasa 21 v2 o8 31 foax4tas a a40 1608 384 ma sre 197 96 57 oscasada 530 1610 384 ma sre 197 96 57 00578903 xls D Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Technical data 313 E Noise Frame Noise level 00578903 xls D Terminal and lead through data for the power cables Frame Max cable U1 V1 W1 U2 V2 W2 PE size diameter for NEMA 1 U1 V1 W1 Max terminal size Tightening Max clamp size Tightening U2 V2 W2 flexible rigid torque solid o
253. nge function does all of the following see the figure e Initiates a change when the running time since the last autochange reaches 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV and PFC input is below limit 8779 AUTOCHNG LEVEL e Stops the speed regulated motor e Switches off the contactor of the speed regulated motor e Increments the starting order counter to change the starting order for the motors e Identifies the next motor in line to be the speed regulated motor e Switches off the above motor s contactor if the motor was running Any other running motors are not interrupted e Switches on the contactor of the new speed regulated motor The autochange switch gear connects this motor to the drive power output e Delays motor start for time 8722 PFC START DELAY e Starts the speed regulated motor e Identifies the next constant speed motor in the rotation e Switches the above motor on but only if the new speed regulated motor had been running as a constant speed motor This step keeps an equal number of motors running before and after autochange e Continues with normal PFC operation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 252 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq PID output gt 8122 8118 8118 B A Area above 8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL autochange not allowed B Autochange occurs 1PFC et
254. nt protection in the USA 20 6 6 escs sac eae eee ee ee dees aa 321 17 Dimensions Frame sizes RO and R1 IP20 cabinet installation UL open Frame sizes RO and R1 IP20 NEMA 1 0 0 0 0 ccc eee ees Frame size R2 IP20 cabinet installation UL open 0 0 0 eee ee Flame size R2 NEMA coo scared args ad Sb otk ode See eS a E ae Frame size R3 IP20 cabinet installation UL open 0 0c ee Frame size R3 NEMA 1 1 ee eee eens Frame size R4 IP20 cabinet installation UL open 0 0 cc ee Frame Size RA NEMAT oso tc ae cidad ds Further information Product and Service inquiries ooooooooneo ee et et eens 300 sc el AAA o 333 Providing feedback on ABB Drives manuals naan aaaea 333 Document library on the Internet 0 0 0 ce eee nee een eens 333 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 14 Table of contents Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Safety 15 Safety What this chapter contains The chapter contains safety instructions which you must follow when installing operating and servicing the drive If ignored physical injury or death may follow or damage may occur to the drive motor or driven equipment Read the safety instructions before you work on the drive AN Use of warnings Warnings caution you about conditions which can
255. nu when User Set 1 has been first saved using parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO see section User macros on page 110 and then uploaded to panel Copy USER S2 parameters from the control panel to the drive dL u2 Download User Set 2 As dL u1 Download User Set 1 above Start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Control panels 77 How to upload and download parameters For the upload and download functions available see above Step action Cy Go to the Main menu by pressing 37 if you are in the Output mode otherwise by pressing CZ repeatedly until you see MENU at the bottom If the panel is not in the Copy mode CoPY not visible press key 4 S or SY until you see CoPY Press 37 3 To upload all parameters including user sets from the drive to the control panel step to uL with keys C amp S and Cw Press 37 During the transfer the display shows the transfer status as a percentage of completion To perform downloads step to the appropriate operation here dL A Download all is used as an example with keys As and Cv Press 537 During the transfer the display shows the transfer status as a percentage of completion E Basic Control Panel alarm codes In addition to the faults and alarms generated by the drive see chapter Fault tracing on page 287
256. nue operation using this reference 010 100 0 Forced reference on 4409 OUTLET PROT Enables and selects the mode of the primary supervision NOT SEL E of pump fan outlet pressure Note Outlet protection is active only when the active reference is PID NOT SEL Primary outlet pressure supervision not used ALARM Detection of high outlet pressure produces an alarm on the a control panel display Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 232 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq PROTECT Detection of high outlet pressure produces an alarm on the control panel display The output of the PI controller is ramped down according to parameter 4477 PID OUT DEC TIME to the forced reference set by parameter 4476 OUTLET FORCED REF The drive will revert to the original reference if the pressure subsequently falls below the supervision level The following diagram describes the outlet pressure supervision function Measured outlet pressure PFC reference EXT 2 FAULT Detection of high outlet pressure trips the drive on a fault 3 4410 Al MEAS Selects the analog input for pump fan outlet pressure NOT SEL OUTLET supervision NOT SEL No analog input selected Pump fan outlet pressure monitored through analog input 1 Alt 12 See selection Al Sets the supervision limit for the primary outlet pressure 100 00 measurem
257. o return to Parameter download successful the Par Backup menu compl ere y OK 100 00 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com How to view information about the backup Control panels 97 Sep Acton SSC MENU Go to the Main menu by pressing s if you are in the Output mode otherwise by pressing repeatedly SP until you get to the Main menu Go to the Par Backup mode by selecting PAR BACKUP on the menu with keys As and SY 7 and pressing Select BACKUP INFO on the Par Backup menu with keys a4 and SY 7 and press 5 The display shows the following information about the drive where the backup was made DRIVE TYPE type of the drive DRIVE RATING rating of the drive in format XXXYZ where XXX Nominal current rating If present an A indicates a decimal point eg 9A7 means 9 7 A Y 2 200V 4 400V Z i European loading package n US loading package FIRMWARE firmware version of the drive You can scroll the information with keys As and vw Press to return to the Par Backup menu LOC UMAIN MENU DARAN CHANGED PAR EXIT 100 00 ENTER ees NF Q DRIVE RATING RMWARE ex Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 98 Control panels E 1 0 Settings mode In the I O Settings mode you can e check the parameter settings related to any I O terminal e edit the parameter setting For e
258. ock E Settings Parameters 1602 PARAMETER LOCK and 1603 PASS CODE PID control There are two built in PID controllers in the drive e Process PID PID1 and e External Trim PID PID2 The PID controller can be used when the motor speed needs to be controlled based on process variables such as pressure flow or temperature When the PID control is activated a process reference setpoint is connected to the drive instead of a speed reference An actual value process feedback is also brought back to the drive The drive compares the reference and the actual values and automatically adjusts the drive speed in order to keep the measured process quantity actual value at the desired level reference The control operates on a 2 ms time level E Process controller PID1 PID1 has two separate sets of parameters 40 PROCESS PID SET 1 41 PROCESS PID SET 2 Selection between parameter sets 1 and 2 is defined by a parameter In most cases when there is only one transducer signal wired to the drive only parameter set 1 is needed Two different parameter sets 1 and 2 are used eg when the load of the motor changes considerably in time E External Trim controller PID2 PID2 42 EXT TRIM PID can be used in two different ways e External controller Instead of using additional PID controller hardware the user can connect PID2 output via drive analog output or fieldbus controller to control a field instrument like a damper or a valv
259. odel and the temperature measurement function further by parameters The most common temperature sensors are e motor sizes IEC180 225 thermal switch for example Klixon e motor sizes IEC200 250 and larger PTC or Pt100 For more information on the thermal model see section Motor Thermal Protection on page 130 For more information on the temperature measurement function see section Motor temperature measurement through the standard I O on page 139 Using residual current devices RCD with the drive ACS310 03x drives are suitable to be used with residual current devices of Type B Other measures for protection in case of direct or indirect contact such as separation from the environment by double or reinforced insulation or isolation from the supply system by a transformer can also be applied Implementing a bypass connection WARNING Never connect the supply power to the drive output terminals U2 V2 and W2 Power line voltage applied to the output can result in permanent damage to the drive If frequent bypassing is required employ mechanically connected switches or contactors to ensure that the motor terminals are not connected to the AC power line and drive output terminals simultaneously Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Planning the electrical installation 43 Protecting the contacts of relay outputs Inductive loads relays contactors motors cause voltage t
260. of digital inputs DI1 5 at the time the latest fault occurred binary Example 10000 DI1 is on DI2 DI5 are off Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Actual signals and parameters 161 All parameters All parameters Mes Bane ANE asakasi adila 1001 EXT1 Defines the connections and the source for the start a DI1 2 COMMANDS land direction commands for external control location 1 EXT 1 NOT SEL No start stop and direction command source start No start stop and direction command source and direction command source Start and stop through digital input DI1 O stop 1 start Direction is fixed according to parameter 7003 DIRECTION setting REQUEST FORWARD DI1 2 Start and stop through digital input DI1 O stop 1 start Direction through digital input DI2 O forward 1 reverse To control direction parameter 7003 DIRECTION setting must be REQUEST DI1P 2P Pulse start through digital input DI1 O gt 1 Start In order to start the drive digital input DI2 must be activated prior to A pulse fed to DI Pulse stop through digital input DI2 1 gt 0 Stop Direction of rotation is fixed according to parameter 1003 DIRECTION setting REQUEST FORWARD Note When the stop input DI2 is deactivated no input the control panel start and stop buttons are disabled DI1P 2P 3P Pulse start forward through digital input DI1 O gt 1 S
261. ol locations EXT1 and EXT2 Selecting timed EXT1 EXT2 control 1102 Activation of timed constant speed 1 1201 Selecting timed function status indicated 1401 through relay output RO Selecting timed PID1 parameter set 1 2 4027 control Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Program features 115 Contents of the assistant displays There are two types of displays in the Start up Assistant Main displays and the information displays The main displays prompt the user to feed in information The assistant steps through the main displays The information displays contain help texts for the main displays The figure below shows a typical example of both and explanations of the contents Main display Information display LOC UPAR EDIT LOC WHELP Set exactly as given 9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT on the motor NO nameplate If connected to multiple motors EXIT 100 00 SAVE EXIT 100 00 1 Parameter Help text 2 Feed in field help text continued Local control vs external control The drive can receive start stop and direction commands and reference values from the control panel or through digital and analog inputs Embedded fieldbus enables control over an open fieldbus link A PC equipped with DriveWindow Light PC tool can also control the drive Local control Drive External control Embedded fieldbus Modbus RTU Control panel or PC
262. oll to the desired parameter value with keys a y 7 and press lt lt to accept and continue with the Start up Assistant EXIT Note At any time if you press 7 the Start up Assistant is stopped and the display goes to the Output mode O The basic start up is now completed However it might be useful at this stage to set the parameters required by your application and continue with the application set up as suggested by the Start up Assistant LI SH 0 EXT 00 00 SAVE REM OPAR EDIT 9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT 220 V EXIT 100 00 SAVE REM UuUCHOI CE Do ae want to con appl inue with ication setup p EXIT 100 00 OK Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Start up and control with VO 63 Select the application macro according to which the control cables are connected Continue with the application set up After completing a set up task the Start up Assistant suggests the next one Press y when is highlighted to continue with the suggested task Press key 42 to highlight BW and then press sS to move to the following task without doing the suggested task EXIT Press 77 to stop the Start up Assistant Check the direction of the motor rotation If the drive is in remote control REM shown on the status line switch to local control by pressing 2 EXIT If you are not in the Output mode press gt repeatedly until you get
263. olled using momentary push buttons lt provides three constant speeds To enable the macro set the value of parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO to 2 3 WIRE For the parameter default values see section Default values with different macros on page 757 If you use other than the default connections presented below see section I O terminals on page 49 Note When the stop input DI2 is deactivated no input the control panel start and stop buttons are disabled E Default I O connections X1A 1 SCR Signal abi ste eer 2 An La oe Reference voltage 10 V DC max 10 mA Not in use by default 0 10 V max 500 m 6 GND Analog input circuit common 7 AO Motor speed value 0 20 mA BOSE ae a E p e 20 Au votage output 24 V DC max 20 mA 10 GND Auxiliary voltage output common i pcom Digital input common 12 DM Start pulse F 14 DIS Forward 0 Reverse 1 15 Di Constant speed selecton A 16 pi5__ Constant speed selection X1B 17 ROCOM Relay output 1 18 roNc No fault Fault 1 19 RONO_ as bosRe Digital output max 100 mA eee wee No fault Fault 1 22 DOGND 1 See parameter group 12 CONSTANT 2 360 degree grounding under a clamp SPEEDS Tightening torque 0 4 N m 3 5 Ibf in Operation parameter O O Set speed through Al1 1 o Speed 10203 O 1 Speed 2 1203 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrw
264. om Email info clrwtr com Program features 131 Settings Parameter 3023 WIRING FAULT Preprogrammed faults E Overcurrent The overcurrent trip limit for the drive is 325 of the drive nominal current E DC overvoltage The DC overvoltage trip limit is 420 V for 200 V drives and 840 V for 400 V drives E DC undervoltage The DC undervoltage trip limit is adaptive See parameter 2006 UNDERVOLT CTRL E Drive temperature The drive supervises the IGBT temperature There are two supervision limits Alarm limit and fault trip limit E Short circuit If a short circuit occurs the drive will not start and a fault indication is given E Internal fault If the drive detects an internal fault the drive is stopped and a fault indication is given E Supply phase loss If the drive detects supply phase loss excessive DC voltage ripple the drive is stopped and a fault indication is given Operation limits The drive has adjustable limits for output frequency current maximum and DC voltage E Settings Parameter group 20 LIMITS Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 132 Program features Power limit Power limitation is used to protect the input bridge and the DC intermediate circuit If the maximum allowed power is exceeded the drive torque is automatically limited Maximum overload and continuous power limits depend on the drive hardware For specific values see
265. on through DI2 digital input DI2 O forward 1 reverse To control direction parameter 7003 DIRECTION setting must be REQUEST SUP 1 Start and stop as for SUPRV1 UNDER Direction through UDR DI2 digital input DI2 O forward 1 reverse To control direction parameter 1003 DIRECTION setting must be REQUEST 1002 EXT2 Defines the connections and the source for the start stop NOT SEL COMMANDS Jand direction commands for external control location 2 EXT2 See parameter 7007 EXT1 COMMANDS 1003 DIRECTION Enables the control of rotation direction of the motor or fixes REQUEST the direction Note The Pump cleaning function can override this parameter See parameter 4607 PUMP CLEAN TRIG FORWARD Fixed to forward Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 2 Actual signals and parameters 163 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq REVERSE REQUEST Direction of rotation control allowed 1101 a REF Selects the type of the reference in local control mode REF1 REF1 Hz rpm Frequency reference in Hz 1 REF2 1102 EXT1 EXT2 Defines the source from which the drive reads the signal EXT1 SEL that selects between the two external control locations EXT1 or EXT2 EXT 1 EXT1 active The control signal sources are defined by parameters 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS and 1103 REF1 SELECT ICI CET a poo ola Ses selection DH la Se selection DH EXT2 active The contro
266. ontroller SETPNT4 reference which becomes active when parameter 4070 SET POINT SEL value is set to INTERNAL and setpoint 4 is selected with the input defined by parameter 4039 INT SETPNT SEL 100 0 100 0 Value in percent 1 0 1 4039 INT SETPNT _ Selects the source for the selection of the internal setpoint NOT SEL SEL used as the process PID controller reference when parameter 4070 SET POINT SEL value is set to INTERNAL Example 4010 SET POINT SEL INTERNAL 4039 INT SETPNT SEL DI2 Digital input DI2 1 gt 4012 INTERNAL SETPNT2 is used as the reference NOT SEL 4011 INTERNAL SETPNT is used as the reference o SETPNT2 is used Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 226 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description DI1 2 Selects with digital inputs DI1 and DI2 which internal setpoint is used as the reference 1 DI active O DI inactive DI1 DI2 Internal setpoint selected 4011 INTERNAL SETPNT 1 0 4036 INTERNAL SETPNT2 0 1 4037 INTERNAL SETPNT3 4038 INTERNAL SETPNT4 DI2 3 See selection DI1 2 DI3 4 See selection DI1 2 DI4 5 See selection DI1 2 0 TIMED FUNC 1 0 4077 INTERNAL SETPNT is used 1 4036 INTERNAL 15 SETPNT2 is used TIMED FUNC 2 See selection TIMED FUNC 1 TIMED FUNC 3 See selection TIMED FUNC 1 TIMED FUNC 4 See selection TIMED FUNC 1 TIMED Selects with TIMED FUNC 1 and TIMED FUNC 2 w
267. op and switch between local and remote control in any mode To be able to start or stop the drive the drive must be in local control 1 reee E e To switch between remote control REM shown on the status line and local control LOC shown on the status line press Note Switching to local control can be disabled with parameter 1606 LOCAL LOCK The very first time the drive is powered up it is in remote control REM and controlled through the drive I O terminals To switch to local control LOC and control the drive using the control panel press 2 The result depends on how long you press the key e f you release the key immediately the display flashes Switching to the local control mode the drive stops Set the local control reference as instructed on page 85 If you press the key for about two seconds the drive continues as before The drive copies the current remote values for the run stop status and the reference and uses them as the initial local control settings e To stop the drive in local control press C gt The arrow amp or 53 on the status line stops rotating e To start the drive in local control press lt lt gt gt The arrow U or 5 on the status line starts rotating It is dotted until the drive reaches the setpoint Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 84 Control panels Output mode In the Output mode you can monit
268. or actual values of up to three signals in group 07 OPERATING DATA change the direction of the motor rotation set the frequency reference adjust the display contrast start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control EXIT You get to the Output mode by pressing 7 repeatedly The top right corner of the loc display shows the reference 49 1 Hz value The center can be 0 5 A configured to show up to three 10 signal values or bar graphs see DIR 1 00 00 MENU DIR 00 00 MENU page 87 for instructions on selecting and modifying the monitored signals How to change the direction of the motor rotation Display If you are not in the Output mode press EP repeatedly until you get there Ifthe drive is in remote contrd REM shown on the status line switch to local control by pressing 2 The display briefly shows a message about changing the mode and then returns to the Output mode To change the direction from forward shown on the status line to reverse 5 shown on the status line or vice versa press wa 0 Note Parameter 7003 DIRECTION must be set to 3 00 00 MENU REQUEST Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Control panels 85 How to set the frequency reference Sep Acton TO y If you are not in the Output mode press repeatedly wy until you get there 4 DIR 100 00 MENU If the drive is in remot
269. ord is sent by the fieldbus controller via the embedded fieldbus Modbus to the drive For the control word bits see sections DCU communication profile on page 283 and ABB Drives communication profile on page 278 DI1 INV External signal required through inverted digital input DI1 0 Run Enable If Run Enable signal is switched on the drive will not start or coasts to stop if it is running oam See selection DHINV E DISINV See selection DNN SSS on See selection ONY E DIN See selection ONY E 1602 PARAMETER Selects the state of the parameter lock The lock prevents OPEN LOCK parameter changing from control panel LOCKED Parameter values cannot be changed from the control panel The lock can be opened by entering the valid code to parameter 1603 PASS CODE The lock does not prevent parameter changes made by macros or fieldbus OPEN The lock is open Parameter values can be changed NOT SAVED Parameter changes made by control panel are not stored into the permanent memory To store changed parameter values set parameter 7607 PARAM SAVE value to SAVE 1603 PASS CODE Selects the pass code for the parameter lock see parameter 7602 PARAMETER LOCK 0 65535 Pass code Setting 358 opens the lock The value reverts back to 0 automatically 1604 FAULT RESET Selects the source for the fault reset signal The signal KEYPAD SEL resets the drive after a fault trip if the cause of the fault no longer exists KEYPAD Fault r
270. otor 1 The first auxiliary motor starts if e no auxiliary motors are running e drive output frequency exceeds limit 8709 1 Hz e output frequency stays above a relaxed limit 8709 1 Hz for at least time 8775 AUX MOT START D After the first auxiliary motor starts output frequency decreases by value 8709 START FREQ 1 8772 LOW FREQ 1 In effect the output of the speed regulated motor drops to compensate for the input from the auxiliary motor See the figure where A 8109 START FREQ 1 8772 LOW FREQ 1 B Output frequency increase during the start delay C Diagram showing auxiliary motor s run status as frequency increases 1 On Note 8709 START FREQ 1 value must be between 8112 LOW FREQ 1 and 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ 1 f Hz 8109 1 8109 8112 MIN 0 500 042 Frequency OA Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Actual signals and parameters 245 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 8110 START FREQ Sets the frequency limit used to start the second auxiliary 2 motor See 8709 START FREQ 1 for a complete description U 60 0 Hz of the operation The second auxiliary motor starts if e one auxiliary motor is running e drive output frequency exceeds limit 8770 1 Hz e output frequency stays above the relaxed limit 8770 1 Hz for at least time 8775 AUX MOT START D 000 500 0H2 Frequeney OA 8111 STA
271. ous protocol Transaction is half duplex Embedded fieldbus connection is either RS 232 control panel connector X2 or RS 485 I O terminals 23 26 The maximum length of the communication cable with RS 232 is restricted to 3 meters RS 232 is designed for a point to point application a single master controlling one slave RS 485 is designed for a multipoint application a single master controlling one or more slaves Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 266 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus Fieldbus controller Fieldbus Embedded fieldbus Modbus connection is either RS 232 or RS 485 2 RS 485 3 I O terminals 23 26 Data flow lt 4 Control Word CW lt a _ _ _ References _ Process l O cyclic Status Word SW 3 gt Actual values 3 gt Service messages acyclic Parameter R W The drive can be set to receive all of its control information through the fieldbus interface or the control can be distributed between the fieldbus interface and other available sources eg digital and analog inputs Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 267 Setting up communication through the embedded Modbus Before configuring the drive for fieldbus control install the fieldbus according to ins
272. p outlet protection function is active or has caused the 56 drive to trip See parameters 4409 4416 1402 RELAY See parameter 7407 RELAY OUTPUT 1 Available only if OUTPUT 2 the Relay Output Extension Module MREL 0 is connected to the drive Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 174 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 1403 RELAY See parameter 7407 RELAY OUTPUT 1 Available only if NOT SEL OUTPUT 3 the Relay Output Extension Module MREL O is connected to the drive 1404 RO1 ON Defines the operation delay for relay output RO 1 0 0s DELAY 0 0 3600 0s Delay time The figure below illustrates the operation on and release off delays for relay output RO Control event a OS IE Relay status if LDL I le ie e 1404 ON DELAY 1405 OFF DELAY 1405 RO 1 OFF Defines the release delay for relay output RO O DELAY 0 0 3600 0s Delay time See the figure for parameter 1404 RO 1 ON DELAY 1406 RO 2 ON See parameter 7404 RO 1 ON DELAY DELAY 1407 RO 2 OFF See parameter 1405 RO 1 OFF DELAY DELAY 1408 RO 3 ON See parameter 1404 RO 1 ON DELAY DELAY 1409 RO 3 OFF See parameter 1405 RO 1 OFF DELAY 0 DELAY 1410 RELAY See parameter 7407 RELAY OUTPUT 1 Available only if NOT SEL OUTPUT 4 the Relay Output Extension Module MREL 0 is connected to the drive 1413 RO 4 ON See parameter 1404 RO 1 ON DELAY 0 0s DELAY 1414 RO 4 OFF See
273. page 309 2002 OVERVOLTAGE DC overvoltage Check deceleration time 2203 and 0308 bit 1 controller is active 2206 programmable fault Check input power line for static or function 1610 transient overvoltage programmable fault function 1670 2004 DIR LOCK Change of direction is Check parameter 7003 DIRECTION 2003 UNDERVOLTAGE DC undervoltage Check input power supply 0308 bit 2 controller is active 0308 bit 3 not allowed settings 2005 10 COMM Fieldbus Check status of fieldbus 0308 bit 4 communication break communication See chapter Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus on programmable fault page 265 function 3078 3019 l Check fault function parameter settings Check connections Check if master can communicate 2006 Al1 LOSS Analog input Al1 signal Check fault function parameter 0308 bit 5 has fallen below limit settings programmable fault defined by parameter Check for proper analog control signal function 3001 3021 PALAT FAULT levels Check connections defined by parameter Check for proper analog control signal programmable fault 3022 Al2 FAULT levele prop g g LIMIT function 3001 3022 2007 Al2 LOSS Analog input Al2 signal Check fault function parameter 0308 bit 6 has fallen below limit settings Check connections Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 290 Fault tracing CODE ALARM ALARM
274. paid to the installation and placement of the breakers Follow the manufacturer s instructions E Protecting the motor and motor cable in short circuit situations The drive protects the motor and motor cable in a short circuit situation when the motor cable is dimensioned according to the nominal current of the drive No additional protection devices are needed Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 42 Planning the electrical installation E Protecting the drive motor cable and input power cable against thermal overload The drive protects itself and the input and motor cables against thermal overload when the cables are dimensioned according to the nominal current of the drive No additional thermal protection devices are needed WARNING If the drive is connected to multiple motors a separate thermal overload switch or a circuit breaker must be used for protecting each cable and motor These devices may require a separate fuse to cut off the short circuit current E Protecting the motor against thermal overload According to regulations the motor must be protected against thermal overload and the current must be switched off when overload is detected The drive includes a motor thermal protection function that protects the motor and switches off the current when necessary lt is also possible to connect a motor temperature measurement to the drive The user can tune both the thermal m
275. peed the other decreases it e The drive can form a reference out of two analog input signals by using mathematical functions Addition subtraction multiplication and division e The drive can form a reference out of an analog input signal and a signal received through a serial communication interface by using mathematical functions Addition and multiplication e The drive reference can be given with frequency input It is possible to scale the external reference so that the signal minimum and maximum values correspond to a speed other than the minimum and maximum speed limits E Settings Additional information E Diagnostics Actual signal Additional information 0111 0112 REF1 REF2 reference Group 03 FB ACTUAL SIGNALS References in different stages of the reference processing chain Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Program features 119 Reference trimming In reference trimming the external reference is corrected depending on the measured value of a secondary application variable The block diagram below illustrates the function Select 1105 REF1 MAX DIRECT 2 1108 REF 2 MAX 2 REF 1 Hz rpm REF2 4232 CORRECTION SRC REF 1 Hz rpm REF2 The drive reference before trimming REF The drive reference after trimming max freq par 2008 or 2007 if the absolute value is greater PID2 ref par 4270 PID2 act par
276. pera A E ee E E E ed A ge pre po dad ak dd 116 BA ash hs hese cea ha hore cat ads ibe ie hese as en We Ne AE donee at Sat doe anh ees sew Sh dome at 117 Block diagram Start stop direction source for EXT1 00 000 eee eee 117 Block diagram Reference source for EXT1 0 0 00 cece eee eee 117 Reference types and processing 0 ccc eee eee eee neces 118 SV dudar da dns eal daa rts dla deste ge ds ee are estes A re da ae 118 PIAGNOSUCS gt baza hee ats Rt nE nets He owe SEE ae he seed Owes yes 118 Reference MIMMINg lt sses se aan cata th i sed noche i ne ace desk an A de ote ane he ie Dh ae ae etek ke desk ah a 119 SS ret seemed carta se carers ha a i eat nwa hee eee Po a A eh aces owe ane ape ee 119 EXGMPIS sentarse cee cee eee EE eer Ae Sesto ee eee ee eee eens as 120 Programmable analog inputs ooo a aw daa bee cc Ree ae ee ic ew ew da 120 SEAS e aos ina adn eee Ge ee eee eee ee oe ES 120 Be CS i ea ere dean ee ee ed ee ate ae Nick ed eK ee We 121 Programmable analog output 0 ce ee eee nee nes 121 UE UU 121 Bie elac i te A o PI A es We a 121 Programmable digital inputs o o ooooocoornoornnaona tenes 122 A ad a oe ke E et oe ee 122 ae cence boned heeded De AEA Red Oe ee we 123 Programmable relay output 0 0 cc ee eee een ene ene 123 0 A N 123 Bro A tien ieee ne ene nee heenad Dest EE hoes ee eee ees 123 FIEQUENRCY INDUE 2224 0cnceee lt e we coat o ache eee HESS beet bod
277. plications ratio for constant torque Linear ratio for constant torque applications SQUARED Squared ratio for centrifugal pump and fan applications With squared U f ratio the noise level is lower for most operating frequencies USER Custom ratio defined oe parameters 2610 2618 See DEFINED section AS U ratio on page 128 2606 SWITCHING Defines the switching frequency of the drive Higher FREQ switching frequency results in lower acoustic noise See also parameter 2607 SWITCH FREQ CTRL and section Switching frequency derating on page 309 2607 SWITCH FREQ Activates the switching frequency control When active the E selection of parameter 2606 SWITCHING FREQ is limited when the drive internal temperature increases See the figure below This function allows the highest possible switching frequency at a specific operation point Higher switching frequency results in lower acoustic noise but higher internal losses fw limit 16 kHz Drive temperature T 80 100 C 100 120 C ON LOAD Switching frequency can adapt to loading instead of limiting 2 the output current This allows maximum loading with all switching frequency selections The drive automatically decreases the actual switching frequency if loading is too high for the selected switching frequency Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 192 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name
278. power cables on page 47 Overload protection The drive provides overload protection in accordance with the National Electrical Code US C Tick marking See the type designation label for the valid markings of your drive C Tick marking is required in Australia and New Zealand A C Tick mark is attached to the drive to verify compliance with the relevant standard IEC 61800 3 2004 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems Part 3 EMC product standard including specific test methods mandated by the Trans Tasman Electromagnetic Compatibility Scheme The Trans Tasman Electromagnetic Compatibility Scheme EMCS was introduced by the Australian Communication Authority ACA and the Radio Spectrum Management Group RSM of the New Zealand Ministry of Economic Development NZMED in November 2001 The aim of the scheme is to protect the radio frequency spectrum by introducing technical limits for emission from electrical electronic products For fulfilling the requirements of the standard see section Compliance with EN 61800 3 2004 on page 378 ROHS marking The RoHS mark is attached to the drive to verify that drive follows the provisions of the European RoHS Directive RoHS the restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Technical data 321 Liability limits The manufacturer
279. r com 3AUA0000051086 A 326 Dimensions Frame size R2 IP20 cabinet installation UL open 39 mm DIN ral ala Frame size R2 IP20 cabinet installation UL open O S MIN f gt Soy ie ice ea 3AUA0000051090 A Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Dimensions 327 Frame size R2 NEMA 1 x S 6 1 a O gt s 3 Rl i E mie AU ae mnh el Ube o gt t E SI g B vA 7 can a A 5 ae ES a a X Q en ee gt a AN lt z O gt g T Y 1 S T 6 102 90 01 957 al y L91 I1 82 B Te gt 90 E ET 108 EL e 3AUA0000051097 A Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 328 Dimensions Frame size R3 IP20 cabinet installation UL open lt gt NI ma i LO gt OQ Pies LO o Oy CO GEJ oo aD oO pa ff Y e a OF 201 Frame size R3 IP20 cabinet installation UL open oe e El le ANMEDES 1 1 1 ifs
280. r is not effective if parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM setting is DIRECT Setting range depends on parameter 3407 setting E 3407 OUTPUT1 Sets the maximum display value for the signal selected by MAX parameter 3407 SIGNAL1 PARAM See parameter 3402 SIGNAL1 MIN Note Parameter is not effective if parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM setting is DIRECT Setting range depends on parameter 3407 setting E 3408 SIGNAL2 Selects the second signal to be displayed on the control 104 PARAM panel in display mode See parameter 3407 SIGNAL1 PARAM 0 101 178 Parameter index in group 07 OPERATING DATA Eg 102 1 1 0102 SPEED If value is set to 0 no signal is selected 3409 SIGNAL2 MIN Defines the minimum value for the signal selected by parameter 3408 SIGNAL2 PARAM See parameter 3402 SIGNAL1 MIN Setting range depends on parameter 3408 setting 3410 SIGNAL2 MAX Defines the maximum value for the signal selected by parameter 3408 SIGNAL2 PARAM See parameter 3402 SIGNAL1 MIN Setting range depends on parameter 3408 setting e 3411 OUTPUT2DSP Defines the format for the displayed signal selected by DIRECT FORM parameter 3408 SIGNAL2 PARAM See parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM pe 3412 OUTPUT2 Selects the unit for the for the displayed signal selected by UNIT parameter 3408 SIGNAL2 PARAM See parameter 3405 OUTPUT UNIT 3413 OUTPUT2 MIN Sets the minimum display value for the signal selected by parameter 3408 SIGNAL2 PARAM See parameter
281. r parameter 8727 shows the relation between the control signal 4074 FBK SEL or 4774 and the speed regulated motor s frequency in a three motor system 8122 PFC START Sets the start delay for speed regulated motors in the DELAY system Using the delay the drive works as follows Switches on the contactor of the speed regulated motor connecting the motor to the drive power output Delays motor start for time 8722 PFC START DELAY Starts the speed regulated motor Starts auxiliary motors See parameter 8775 AUX MOT START D for delay WARNING Motors equipped with star delta starters require a PFC Start Delay After the drive relay output switches a motor on the star delta starter must switch to the star connection and then back to the delta connection before the drive applies power So the PFC Start Delay must be longer than the time setting of the star delta starter Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Actual signals and parameters 259 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 8123 PFC ENABLE Selects PFC control or SPFC control When enabled PFC NOT SEL control or SPFC control does the following e Switches in or out auxiliary constant speed motors as output demand increases or decreases Parameters 8109 START FREQ 1 to 8114 LOW FREQ 3 define the switch points in terms of the drive output frequency e Adjusts the speed regulated motor output down as auxili
282. r stranded torque mm AWG Nm Ibfin mm AWG Nm Ibfin ME IEC T O A ET A EC ECT Ri 063 4060 10 os 7 2 3 12m R2 16 063 4060 10 os 7 2 3 12m as 414 ioonso 6 17 2 s 12 1 00578903 xls D Terminal and lead through data for the control cables Conductor size Tightening Solid or stranded Stranded with ferrule Stranded with ferrule torque without plastic sleeve with plastic sleeve Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max mm AWG mm AWG mm AWG N m Ibf in 0 14 1 5 26 16 0 25 1 5 23 16 0 25 1 5 23 16 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 314 Technical data Electric power network specification Voltage U Short circuit capacity Frequency Imbalance 200 208 220 230 240 V AC 3 phase for 200 V AC drives 380 400 415 440 460 480 V AC 3 phase for 400 V AC drives 10 variation from converter nominal voltage is allowed as default Maximum allowed prospective short circuit current at the input power connection as defined in IEC 60439 1 is 100 kA The drive is suitable for use in a circuit capable of delivering not more than 100 kA rms symmetrical amperes at the drive maximum rated voltage 50 60 Hz 5 maximum rate of change 17 s Max 3 of nominal phase to phase input voltage Motor connection data Voltage U5 Short circuit protection IEC 61800 5 1 UL 508C Frequency Frequency resolution C
283. ransients when switched off Equip inductive loads with noise attenuating circuits varistors RC filters AC or diodes DC in order to minimize the EMC emission at switch off If not suppressed the disturbances may connect capacitively or inductively to other conductors in the control cable and form a risk of malfunction in other parts of the system Install the protective component as close to the inductive load as possible Do not install protective components at the l O terminal block Varistor E 230 VAC RC filter 230 VAC 24V DC Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 44 Planning the electrical installation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Electrical installation 45 Electrical installation What this chapter contains The chapter tells how to check the insulation of the assembly and the compatibility with IT ungrounded and corner grounded TN systems as well as connect power cables control cables and embedded fieldbus WARNING The work described in this chapter may only be carried out by a qualified electrician Follow the instructions in chapter Safety on page 15 Ignoring the safety instructions can cause injury or death Make sure that the drive is disconnected from the input power during installation If the drive is already connected to the input power wait for 5 minute
284. requency value of the third load curve definition 43 Hz point Must be smaller than 3773 LOAD FREQ 4 0 500 Hz 3711 LOAD TORQ _ Defines the torque value of the third underload curve 25 LOW definition point Must be smaller than 3772 LOAD TORQ HIGH 3 H 0 600 fone A 3712 LOAD TORQ Defines the torque value of the third overload curve 300 HIGH 3 definition point 3713 LOAD FREQ 4 Defines the frequency value of the fourth load curve 50 Hz definition point Must be smaller than 3776 LOAD FREQ 5 0 600 fone A 0500 Hz Frequency SSSSSSSC w SV 3714 LOAD TORQ _ Defines the torque value of the fourth underload curve 30 LOW 4 definition point Must be smaller than 3775 LOAD TORQ HIGH 4 0 600 O ST 3 3715 LOAD TORQ Defines the torque value of the fourth overload curve 300 HIGH 4 definition point 0 600 fone A 1 3716 LOAD FREQ 5 Defines the frequency value of the fifth load curve definition 500 Hz point 0 500 He 1H 3717 LOAD TORQ Defines the torque value of the fifth underload curve 30 LOW 5 definition point Must be smaller than 3778 LOAD TORQ HIGH 5 0 600 torque A 3718 LOAD TORQ Defines the torque value of the fifth overload curve definition 300 HIGH 5 point 0 600 4001 GAIN Defines the gain for the process PID controller Great gain 11 0 may cause speed oscillation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Actual signals and parameters 215 A
285. result in serious injury or death and or damage to the equipment and advise on how to avoid the danger The following warning symbols are used in this manual Electricity warning warns of hazards from electricity which can cause physical injury and or damage to the equipment General warning warns about conditions other than those caused by electricity which can result in physical injury and or damage to the equipment Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 16 Safety Safety in installation and maintenance These warnings are intended for all who work on the drive motor cable or motor E Electrical safety WARNING Ignoring the following instructions can cause physical injury or death or damage to the equipment Only qualified electricians are allowed to install and maintain the drive Aj Never work on the drive motor cable or motor when input power is applied After disconnecting the input power always wait for 5 minutes to let the intermediate circuit capacitors discharge before you start working on the drive motor or motor cable Always ensure by measuring with a multimeter impedance at least 1 Mohm that there is no voltage between the drive input phases U1 V1 and W1 and the ground Do not work on the control cables when power is applied to the drive or to the external control circuits Externally supplied control circuits may carry dangerous voltage even when the
286. rive control is remote such as the drive I O or fieldbus 2 State Forward shaft direction Reverse shaft direction Rotating arrow Drive is running at setpoint Dotted rotating arrow Drive is running but not at setpoint Stationary arrow Drive is stopped Dotted stationary arrow Start command is present but the motor is not running eg because start enable is missing 3 Panel operation e Name of the current mode mode e Name of the list or menu shown e Name of the operation state eg PAR EDIT 4 Reference value or e Reference value in the Output mode number of the Number of the highlighted item eg selected item mode parameter group or fault E Operation You operate the control panel with menus and keys The keys include two context sensitive soft keys whose current function is indicated by the text shown in the display above each key You select an option eg operation mode or parameter by scrolling the as and Cv arrow keys until the option is highlighted in reverse video and then pressing the relevant soft key With the right soft key 5 you usually enter a mode accept an option or save the changes The left soft key 7 is used to cancel the made changes and return to the previous operation level The Assistant Control Panel has nine panel modes Output Parameters Assistants Changed Parameters Fault Logger Time and Date Parameter Backup I O Settings and Fault The operation in the first eight modes i
287. ro Ramp output will ramp to zero according to the used ramp time nv INV See selection DI1 INV INV See selection DI1 INV INV See selection DI1 INV ne ne ne wo 1 al e a I i 2501 CRIT SPEED Activates deactivates the critical speeds function The SEL critical speed function avoids specific output frequency ranges Example A fan has vibrations in the range of 18 to 23 Hz and 46 to 52 Hz To make the drive to jump over the vibration frequency ranges e Activate the critical speeds function e Set the critical frequency ranges as in the figure below output Hz Z Par 2503 23 Hz 3 Par 2504 46 Hz A Par 2505 52 Hz freference HZ 2502 CRIT SPEED 1 Defines the minimum limit for critical output frequency range 0 0 Hz LO 1 0 0 500 0 Hz Limit in Hz The value cannot be above the maximum 1 parameter 2503 CRIT SPEED 1 HI HI 2 I N 2503 CRIT SPEED 1 Defines the maximum limit for critical output frequency 0 0 Hz range 1 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 190 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 0 0 500 0 Hz Limit in Hz The value cannot be below the minimum 1 0 1 Hz parameter 2502 CRIT SPEED 1 LO 2504 CRIT SPEED 2 See parameter 2502 CRIT SPEED 1 LO LO 0 0 500 0 Hz See parameter 2502 1 0 1 Hz 2505 CRIT SPEED 2 See parameter 2503 CRIT SPEED 1 H
288. rrect input power and ENABLE motor cable connection is detected ie the input power cable is connected to the motor connection of the drive Note Changing this parameter setting is not recommended in normal use The protection is to be disabled only with corner grounded delta power systems and very long cables oo i Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Actual signals and parameters 199 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq DISABLE Noaction O ENABLE The drive trips on fault OUTP WIRING 3101 NR OF TRIALS Defines the number of automatic fault resets the drive performs within the time defined by parameter 3102 TRIAL TIME If the number of automatic resets exceeds the set number within the trial time the drive prevents additional automatic resets and remains stopped The drive must be reset from control panel or from a source selected by parameter 1604 FAULT RESET SEL Example Three faults have occurred during the trial time defined by parameter 3702 Last fault is reset only if the number defined by parameter 3707 is 3 or more Trial time X Automatic reset Number of the automatic resets 3102 TRIAL TIME Defines the time for the automatic fault reset function See 30 0s parameter 3707 NR OF TRIALS 10 600 08 3103 DELAY TIME _ Defines the time that the drive will wait after a fault before attempting an automatic reset See parameter 3707 NR
289. rred Format on the assistant panel Real time hh mm ss if the real time clock is operating Time elapsed after the power on hh mm ss minus the whole days stated by signal 0402 FAULT TIME 1 if real time clock is not used or was not set Format on the basic panel Time elapsed after power on in 2 second ticks minus the whole days stated by signal 0402 FAULT TIME 1 30 ticks 60 seconds Eg Value 514 equals 17 minutes and 8 seconds 514 30 0404 SPEED AT FLT Motor speed in rpm at the time the latest fault occurred 0405 FREQ AT FLT Frequency in Hz at the time the latest fault occurred 1 0 1 Hz 0406 VOLTAGE AT Intermediate circuit voltage in V DC at the time the latest 1 0 1V FLT fault occurred 0407 CURRENT AT Motor current in A at the time the latest fault occurred 1 0 1A FLT Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 160 Actual signals and parameters All actual signals No Name Value Description FbEq 0408 TORQUE AT Motor torque in percent of the motor nominal torque atthe 1 0 1 FLT time the latest fault occurred 0409 STATUS AT Drive status in hexadecimal format at the time the latest FLT fault occurred 0412 PREVIOUS Fault code of the 2nd latest fault See chapter Fault tracing 1 1 FAULT 1 on page 287 for the codes 0413 PREVIOUS Fault code of the 3rd latest fault See chapter Fault tracing 1 1 FAULT 2 on page 287 for the codes 0414 DI 1 5 AT FLT Status
290. rwtr com 260 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description 8125 DEC IN AUX Sets the PFC deceleration time for a maximum to zero START frequency ramp This PFC deceleration ramp applies to the speed regulated motor when an auxiliary motor is switched on replaces the deceleration ramp defined in group 22 ACCEL DECEL applies only until the output of the regulated motor decreases by an amount equal to the output of the auxiliary motor Then the deceleration ramp defined in group 22 ACCEL DECEL applies See the figure for parameter 8724 ACC IN AUX STOP 0 0 NOT SEL 0 0 Not selected 0 1 1800 0s 0 1 1800 s Activates this function using the value entered as the deceleration time TIMED FUNC 2 See selection TIMED FUNC 1 TIMED FUNC 3 See selection TIMED FUNC 1 TIMED FUNC 4 See selection TIMED FUNC 1 8127 MOTORS Sets the actual number of PFC controlled motors maximum 7 motors 1 speed regulated 3 connected direct on line and 3 spare motors This value includes also the speed regulated motor This value must be compatible with the number of relays allocated to PFC if the Autochange function is used If Autochange function is not used the speed regulated motor does not need to havea relay output allocated to PFC but it needs to be included in this value Number of PFC motors EVEN 8128 AUX START Sets the start order of the auxiliary motors ORDER TIME EVEN RUN Time sharing
291. rwtr com 102 Application macros ABB Standard macro This is the default macro It provides a general purpose l O configuration with three constant speeds Parameter values are the default values given in section A parameters on page 161 If you use other than the default connections presented below see section O terminals on page 49 E Default I O connections X1A 1 SER Signal cable srian 2 AM Lap ee Reference voltage 10 V DC max 10 mA Not in use by default 0 10 V max 500 a 6 GND Analog input circuit common 7 AO Output Hequency value 0 20 mA SIA q ETT TS 8 i24 Autry voage output 24 V DG max 200 MA io GND Auxiliary voltage outputcommon Fi pcom Pigitalinputcommon 12 D11 Stop 0 Start o X1B 117 ROCOM Relay output 1 18 roNc No fault Fault 1 e herono O 1 See parameter group 12 CONSTANT 220 ramp times according to parameters SPEEDS 2202 and 2203 DI3 DI4 Operation parameter 1 ramp times according to parameters O o Set speed through Al 2205 and 2206 1 0 Speed 1 1202 3 360 degree grounding under a clamp o g Speed 2 1203 E Tight t 0 4N 5 lbf in Speed 3 1204 ightening torque 0 m 3 5 Ibf in Digital output max 100 mA y No fault Fault 1 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Application macros 103 3 wire macro This macro is used when the drive is contr
292. s after disconnecting the input power 2 Checking the insulation of the assembly E Drive Do not make any voltage tolerance or insulation resistance tests for example hi pot or megger on any part of the drive as testing can damage the drive Every drive has been tested for insulation between the main circuit and the chassis at the factory Also there are voltage limiting circuits inside the drive which cut down the testing voltage automatically E Input power cable Check the insulation of the input power cable according to local regulations before connecting to the drive Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 46 Electrical installation E Motor and motor cable Check the insulation of the motor and motor cable as follows 1 Check that the motor cable is connected to the motor and disconnected from the drive output terminals U2 V2 and W2 2 Measure the insulation resistance between each phase conductor and the Protective Earth conductor using a measuring voltage of 500 V DC The insulation resistance of an ABB motor must exceed 10 Mohm reference value at 25 C or 77 F For the insulation resistance of other motors please consult the manufacturer s instructions Note Moisture inside the motor casing will reduce the insulation resistance If moisture is suspected dry the motor and repeat the measurement Checking the compatibility with IT ungrounded and corn
293. s and parameters 243 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 00 1000 VELA 6427 AL2ZRANGE30 Amplitude logger 2 selection with parameter 6404 0 0 TO40 30 40 distribution TA O VELA 6428 AL2RANGE40 Amplitude logger 2 selection with parameter 6404 0 0 TO50 40 50 distribution TAI NN E 1 1 TAI O y 6429 AL2RANGE50 Amplitude logger 2 selection with parameter 6404 0 0 O6 50 60 distribution 6430 AL2RANGEG6O Amplitude logger 2 selection with parameter 6404 0 0 TO7O 60 70 distribution E 6431 AL2RANGE7O Amplitude logger 2 selection with parameter 6404 0 0 TO80 70 80 distribution 00 400 O E 6432 AL2RANGE80 Amplitude logger 2 selection with parameter 6404 0 0 TO90 80 90 distribution 1 E 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 TA O E 6433 AL2RANGE9O Amplitude logger 2 selection with parameter 6404 0 0 TO 90 100 distribution A Le TIA i OH 8103 REFERENCE Sets a percentage value that is added to the process reference Applies only when at least one auxiliary constant speed motor is running Example The drive operates three parallel pumps that maintain water pressure in a pipe Parameter 4011 INTERNAL SETPNT sets a constant pressure reference that controls the pressure in the pipe The speed regulated pump operates alone at low water consumption levels As water consumption increases first one constant speed pump operates then the secon
294. s described in this chapter When a fault or alarm occurs the panel goes automatically to the Fault mode showing the fault or alarm You can reset it in the Output or Fault mode see chapter Fault tracing on page 287 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Control panels 81 Initially the panel is in the Output mode where you can LOC amp start stop change the direction switch between local and 49 1 Hz remote control modify the reference value and monitor up 0 to three actual values 10 7 DIR 100 00 MENU To do other tasks go first to the Main menu and select the LOC UMATA ME mw appropriate mode on the menu The status line see SADAN section Status line on page 80 shows the name of the current menu mode item or state CHANGED PAR EXIT 1100 00 ENTER How to do common tasks The table below lists common tasks the mode in which you can perform them and the page number where the steps to do the task are described in detail ask de Page How o change the value of a parameter Parameters 86 How to do guided tasks specification of related parameter sets Assistants with assistants How to view and edit changed parameters Changed 91 Parameters How to view faults Fault Logger How to reset faults and alarms Output Fault How to show hide the clock change date and time formats set the Time and Date 93 clock and enable disable automatic clock transit
295. s in scalar control mode Reserved REQ_CTL Control Word requested from fieldbus No operation REQ_REF1 Reference 1 requested from fieldbus 4 Reference 1 is not requested from fieldbus REQ REF2 Reference 2 requested from fieldbus thecal Reference 2 is not requested from fieldbus 29 REQ REF2EXT External PID reference 2 requested from fieldbus External PID reference 2 is not requested from fieldbus 0 ACK_STARTINH 1 Start inhibit from fieldbus No start inhibit from fieldbus Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Fault tracing 287 Fault tracing What this chapter contains The chapter tells how to reset faults and view fault history It also lists all alarm and fault messages including the possible cause and corrective actions Safety WARNING Only qualified electricians are allowed to maintain the drive Read the safety instructions in chapter Safety on page 15 before you work on the drive Alarm and fault indications Fault is indicated with a red LED See section LEDs on page 306 An alarm or fault message on the panel display indicates abnormal drive status Using the information given in this chapter most alarm and fault causes can be identified and corrected If not contact an ABB representative The four digit code number in parenthesis after the fault is for the fieldbus communication See chapter Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus on page 26
296. s used as 1 1 a digital output 0164 TO Transistor output frequency when transistor output is used 1 1 Hz FREQUENCY as a frequency output 0173 RO 2 4 Status of the relays in the Relay Output Extension Module E STATUS MREL 0 See MREL 01 Relay Output Extension Module User s Manual 3AUA0000035974 English Example 100 RO 2 is on RO 3 and RO 4 are off 0174 SAVED KWH Energy saved in kWh compared to the energy used when 1 0 1 the pump is connected directly to the supply Can be reset kWh with parameter 4509 ENERGY RESET resets all energy calculators at the same time See group 45 ENERGY SAVING 0175 SAVED MWH Energy saved in MWh compared to the energy used when the pump is connected directly to the supply Can be reset with parameter 4509 ENERGY RESET resets all energy calculators at the same time See group 45 ENERGY SAVING 0176 SAVED Energy saved in local currency To find out the total saved AMOUNT 1 energy in currency units add the value of parameter 0777 multiplied by 1000 to the value of parameter 0776 Example 0176 SAVED AMOUNT 1 123 4 0177 SAVED AMOUNT 2 5 Total saved energy 5 1000 123 4 5123 4 currency units Local energy price is set with parameter 4502 ENERGY PRICE Can be reset with parameter 4509 ENERGY RESET resets all energy calculators at the same time See group 45 ENERGY SAVING 0177 SAVED Energy saved in local currency in thousand currency units AMOUNT 2 Eg value 5 means 500
297. sS d o h hour O rpm revolutions per minute O m CET O e ESTE pounds per foot milliampere millivolt kilowatt als 7 lt 0 o vlu ninin in ini POT POL DO PO N al al al al al al al a a ao N on Kl ow rp o aloOlo oO NI oa om Rl owl rm alol o alN om a Al wl rpm Alo Tl o m 2 ahrenheit a gt orsepower megawatt hour meters per second cubic meters per hour cubic decimeters per second xa oO Q s ilopascal allons per minute cubic feet per minute oot millions of gallons per day V Hz S h rom kh C mA mV kW W kWh F hp MWh m s bar kPa GPM PSI CFM ft MGD inHg inches of mercury eet per minute ilobytes per second Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com A Actual signals and parameters 205 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq ohm feet per second Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 206 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq LD loadin percentage SP setpointin percentage FBK feedback in percentage output current in percentage vow output vottage Fut outputirequency Tout output torque vas BC voltage 3406 OUTPUT1 MIN Sets the minimum display value for the signal selected by parameter 3407 SIGNAL1 PARAM See parameter 3402 SIGNAL1 MIN Note Paramete
298. se the MUL R1 MUL R3 or MUL R4 option kit which is delivered with multilingual installation instructions 3AFE68642868 3AFE68643147 or 3AUA0000025916 respectively E Install the drive Install the drive with screws or on a DIN rail as appropriate Note Make sure that dust from drilling does not enter the drive during the installation With screws 1 Mark the hole locations using for example the mounting template cut out from the package The locations of the holes are also shown in the drawings in chapter Dimensions on page 323 The number and location of the holes used depend on how the drive is installed a back mounting frame sizes RO R4 four holes b side mounting frame sizes RO R2 three holes one of the bottom holes is located in the clamping plate 2 Fix the screws or bolts to the marked locations Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Mechanical installation 33 3 Position the drive onto the screws on the wall 4 Tighten the screws in the wall securely On DIN rail 1 Click the drive to the rail To detach the drive press the release lever on top of the drive 1b Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 34 Mechanical installation E Fasten clamping plates 1 Fasten the clamping plate to the plate at the bottom of the drive with the provided s
299. selection DI1 CMODE DI5 CMODE See selection DI1 CMODE CONT MODE Timed function enabled in continuous mode in which the start date can be different from the stop date DI1 INV Inverted digital input DI1 Timed function enable on the 1 falling edge of DI1 DI2 INV See selection DI1 INV DI3 INV See selection DI1 INV INV See selection DI1 INV DI5 INV See selection DI1 INV Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com n NI Ol amp N Ni on A a po oO ii 210 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description DI1 INV CM Timed function enable on the falling edge of DI1 Timed function is in continuous mode in which the start date can be different from the stop date DI2 INV CM See selection DI1 INV CM DI3 INV CM See selection DI1 INV CM DIS INV OM See selection DHI NW OM 3602 START TIME 1 Defines the daily start time 1 The time can be changed in 2 00 00 00 second steps 00 00 00 hours minutes seconds 23 59 58 Example If parameter value is set to 07 00 00 the timed function is activated at 7 00 7 a m 3603 STOP TIME 1 Defines the daily stop time 1 The time can be changed in 2 00 00 00 second steps 00 00 00 hours minutes seconds 23 59 58 Example If parameter value is set to 18 00 00 the timed function is deactivated at 18 00 6 p m 3604 START DAY 1 ONDAY
300. ser s Manual 3AUA0000035974 English With a parameter setting it is possible to choose what information to indicate through the relay output Ready running fault alarm etc The update time for the relay output is 2 ms A value can be written to a relay output through a serial communication link E Settings Additional information Group 14 RELAY OUTPUTS RO value selections and operation times E Diagnostics Additional information RO Control Word through fieldbus control RO 1 status RO 2 4 status With option MREL 01 only Frequency input Digital input DI5 can be programmed as a frequency input Frequency input 0 16000 Hz can be used as external reference signal source The update time for the frequency input is 50 ms Update time is shorter when information is transferred to the application program 50 ms gt 2 ms E Settings Parameter Additional information Group 18 FREQ IN 8 TRAN OUT Frequency input minimum and maximum values and filtering 1103 1106 External reference REF1 2 through frequency input 4010 4110 4210 Frequency input as PID reference source Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 124 Program features E Diagnostics Actual signal Additional information 0161 Frequency input value Transistor output The drive has one programmable transistor output The output can be used either as digital output or frequency output 0 16000 H
301. setting 3704 gt 3707 or 3707 gt 3710 or 3710 gt 3713 or 3713 gt 3716 or 3705 gt 3706 or 3708 gt 3709 or 3711 gt 3712 or 3714 gt 3715 or 3717 gt 3718 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 144 Program features Energy optimizer Energy optimizer optimizes the flux so that the total energy consumption and motor noise level are reduced when the drive operates below the nominal load The total efficiency motor and drive can be improved by 1 10 depending on load torque and speed Energy saving tools calculate energy saved in kWh and MWh energy saved in local currency as well as reduction in CO emission all compared to the situation when the pump is connected directly to the supply E Settings Additional information Group 45 ENERGY SAVING Energy saving settings E Diagnostics Actual signal Additional information Energy saved in kWh Mwh Energy saved in local currency 0178 Reduction in CO emission Pump cleaning Pump cleaning sequence consists of cyclic forward and reverse steps See the figure below The pump cleaning cycle can be activated at start up with a user defined period with a selectable digital input or by the Supervision function for example triggered by the motor input current Forward Reverse step Reverse i e y p Trigger Forward Off Reverse Off Forward Off time time time tim
302. short parameter list Parameters which are hidden by the FlashDrop device are not visible FlashDrop parameter values are activated by setting parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO to 31 LOAD FD SET SHORT VIEW Shows only a subset of all signals and parameters See section Actual signals in the short parameter view on page 152 and Parameters in the short parameter view on page 152 LONG VIEW Shows all signals section All actual signals on page 154 3 and parameters this table starting on page 161 O N lt gt Z ajl oo m a a Uadallsle ILOUL amp JESSIE 1801 FREQ INPUT Defines the minimum input value when DI5 is used as a O Hz MIN frequency input See section Frequency input on page 123 0 10000 Hz Minimum frequency 1 Hz 1802 FREQ INPUT Defines the maximum input value when DI5 is used as a 1000 Hz MAX frequency input See section Frequency input on page 123 0 10000 Hz Maximum frequency 1 Hz 1803 FILTER FREQ Defines the filter time constant for frequency input ie the IN time within 63 of a step change is reached See section Frequency input on page 123 0 0 10 0s Filter time constant 0 1s 1804 TO MODE Selects the operation mode for the transistor output TO DIGITAL See section Transistor output on page 124 DIGITAL Transistor output is used as a digital output DO FREQUENCY Transistor output is used as a frequency output FO Dh o a ep ep Na 1805 DO SIGNAL AUTE Ses parameter
303. source U 60 0 Hz signal oe 0 500 0 Hz Maximum value in Hz See the example for parameter 7704 1 0 1 Hz 00 600 0 Hz Mad MIN KEYPAD See parameter TOSREFI SELECT pau See parameter 1103 REF SELECT f comm See parameter 1103 REFT SELECT b COMMA See parameter 1109 REFY SELECT bo DIBUADINC See parameter 1103 REFT SELECT f2 Mena See parameter 1103 REF SELECT fa See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT o AI Al2 See parameter 1109 REFY SELECT e 40 PROCESS PID SET 1 and 41 PROCESS PID SET 2 1107 REF2 MIN Defines the minimum value for external reference REF2 0 0 Corresponds to the minimum setting of the used source signal 100 0 Value in percent of the maximum frequency maximum speed nominal torque See the example for parameter 1104 REF1 MIN for correspondence to the source signal limits 1108 REF2 MAX Defines the maximum value for external reference REF2 100 0 Corresponds to the maximum setting of the used source signal 0 0 100 0 Value in percent of the maximum frequency maximum speed nominal torque See the example for parameter 1104 REF1 MIN for correspondence to the source signal limits Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Actual signals and parameters 167 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 1201 CONST Activates the constant speeds drive output frequencies or DI3 4 SPEED SEL selects the activation signal N
304. ss lt Or if you want to return to the previous display w out making changes press wa 3 Hide cloc EXIT 1100 00 SEL e To specify the date format select DATE FORMAT on LOC wDATE FORMAT 1 the menu press SS and select a suitable format Press y to save or 7 to cancel your changes e To specify the time format select TIME FORMAT on LOC WTI ME FORMAT 1 the menu press QV a and select a suitable format 4 Press to save or to cancel your chan 12 wil EP y ges CANCEL 1 00 00 SEL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 94 Control panels Display e To set the time select SET TIME on the menu and LOC WSET TIME press al Specify the hours with keys 4 and we and press wl Then specify the minutes Press 41 CA to save or wa to cancel your changes CANCEL 100 00 OK To set the date select SET DATE on the menu and LOC OSET DATE press Specify the first part of the date day or month depending on the selected date format with 0 3 0 5 keys As and SY 7 and press wi Repeat for the second part After specifying the year press Sul To cancel your changes press 7 CANCEL 00 00 OK To enable or disable the automatic clock transitions LOC WDAYLIGHT SAV 1 according to the daylight saving changes select DAYLIGHT SAVING on the menu and press SS Pressing opens the help that shows the beginning and end dates of the period
305. st environment includes establishments connected to a low voltage network which supplies buildings used for domestic purposes Second environment includes establishments connected to a network not directly supplying domestic premises Drive of category C2 drive of rated voltage less than 1000 V and intended to be installed and commissioned only by a professional when used in the first environment Note A professional is a person or organization having necessary skills in installing and or commissioning power drive systems including their EMC aspects Category C2 has the same EMC emission limits as the earlier class first environment restricted distribution EMC standard IEC EN 61800 3 does not any more restrict the distribution of the drive but the using installation and commissioning are defined Drive of category C3 drive of rated voltage less than 1000 V intended for use in the second environment and not intended for use in the first environment Category C3 has the same EMC emission limits as the earlier class second environment unrestricted distribution E Category C2 The emission limits are complied with the following provisions 1 The optional EMC filter is selected according to the ABB documentation and installed as specified in the EMC filter manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Technical data 319 2 The motor and control cables are selected as specified
306. stant Control Panel only Before you start ensure that you have the motor nameplate data on hand Apply input power The Basic Control Panel powers up into the Output mode The Assistant Control Panel asks if you want to REM W CHOI CE EXIT Do you want to run the Start up Assistant If you press 7 the e et he start up Start up Assistant is not run and you can assistant continue with manual start up in a similar manner 0 as described below for the Basic Control Panel EXIT 100 00 OK O If you have an Assistant Control Panel select the REM OPAR EDIT language the Basic Control Panel does not 9901 LANGUAGE support languages See parameter 9901 for the ENGLISH values of the available language alternatives 0 CANCEL 100 00 SAVE For instructions on how to set parameters with the Assistant Control Panel see section Assistant Control Panel on page 78 O Enter the motor data from the motor nameplate Note Set the motor data to exactly the same value as on the motor nameplate For example if the motor nominal speed is 1440 rpm on the nameplate setting the value of parameter 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED to 1500 rpm results in the wrong operation of the drive 690Y 50 30 1475 325 083 30 0 83 400D 50 30 1475 56 083 660 Y 50 30 1470 34_ 0 83 0 83 E supply 415D 50 30 1475 54 083 voltage 440D 60 35 1770 59 083 Ll Cat no
307. start up the drive depends on the control panel you have if any e Ifyou have no control panel follow the instructions given in section How to start up the drive without a control panel on page 58 If you have a Basic Control Panel follow the instructions given in section How to perform a manual start up on page 59 e If you have an Assistant Control Panel you can either run the Start up Assistant see section How to perform a guided start up on page 62 or perform a manual start up see section How to perform a manual start up on page 59 The Start up Assistant which is included in the Assistant Control Panel only guides you through all essential settings to be done In the manual start up the drive gives no guidance you go through the very basic settings by following the instructions given in section How to perform a manual start up on page 59 E How to start up the drive without a control panel Apply input power and wait for a moment Check that the red LED is not lit and the green LED is lit but not blinking Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Start up and control with VO 59 E How to perform a manual start up For the manual start up you can use the Basic Control Panel orthe Assistant Control Panel The instructions below are valid for both control panels but the displays shown are the Basic Control Panel displays unless the instruction applies to the Assi
308. t 0307 bit 1 0033 EFB 3 FF94 0307 bit 2 0034 MOTOR PHASE Motor circuit fault due Check motor and motor cable FF56 to missing motor Check motor thermistor relay if used 0306 bit 14 phase or motor thermistor relay used in motor temperature measurement fault 0035 OUTP WIRING Incorrect input power Check input power connections FF95 ir ail Check fault function parameters 0306 bit 15 power cable is programmable fault connected to drive function 3023 motor connection The fault can be erroneously declared if the input power is a delta grounded system and the motor cable capacitance is large This fault can be disabled using parameter 3023 WIRING FAULT 0036 INCOMPATIBLE Loaded software is not Contact your local ABB SW compatible representative 630F 0307 bit 3 0038 USER LOAD Condition defined by See parameter group 37 USER LOAD CURVE 3701 USERLOADC CURVE FF6B MODE has been valid 0307 bit 4 longer than the time set by 3703 USER LOAD C TIME 0039 UNKNOWN Option module not Check connections EXTENSION supported by the drive 7086 firmware is connected 0307 bit 5 to the drive 0040 INLET VERY LOW Pressure at pump fan Check for a closed valve on the inlet 8A81 inlet too low side of the pump fan 0307 bit 6 Check piping for leaks See parameter group 44 PUMP PROTECTION Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Faul
309. t every start up DI1 INV When DI1 is inactive 0 Precharge function is active when 1 the drive is started If DI1 becomes active 1 before Precharge is finished normal PID control is enabled INV See selection DIN INV See selection DON DISUNV See selection DNN SSS 4422 PIPEFILL Defines the speed step used in Precharge The PID 0 STEP reference ramp time is specified by parameter 4032 PID REF ACC TIME The speed step is added to the reference after the time defined by parameter 4424 ACT CHANGE DLY has elapsed and the change in feedback defined by parameter 4423 REQ ACT CHANGE has not been reached 0 0 100 0 Speed step in percent of the maximum speed output 1 0 1 4423 REQ ACT Defines the requested change in process feedback during CHANGE the time that is set by parameter 4424 ACT CHANGE DLY If the requested change in the feedback is not reached 4422 PIPEFILL STEP is added to the speed reference 0 0 100 0 Value in percent of the maximum speed 1 0 1 4424 ACT CHANGE Defines the time that is waited after the feedback value is DELAY compared with the old feedback value If parameter 4423 REQ ACT CHANGE is measured in the feedback value the speed reference stays as it is If REQ ACT CHANGE is not seen in the feedback value the value of parameter 4422 PIPEFILL STEP is added to the speed reference 0 1 6000 0s Delay time 0 1s 4425 PID ENABLE Defines the level when Precharge is disabled and PID is 1
310. t of all parameters 1202 CONST Defines constant drive output frequency 1 SPEED 1 1203 CONST Defines constant drive output frequency 2 SPEED 2 1204 CONST Defines constant drive output frequency 3 SPEED 3 13 ANALOG INPUTS Analog input signal processing See group 13 ANALOG INPUTS in the list of all parameters cm cm 1301 MINIMUM Al1 Defines the minimum value that corresponds to minimum 1 0 mA V signal for analog input Al 14 RELAY OUTPUTS Status information indicated through relay output and relay operating delays See group 14 RELAY OUTPUTS in the list of all parameters 1611 PARAMETER Selects the parameter view ie which parameters are shown VIEW on the control panel VI 20 LIMITS Drive operation limits See group 20 L MITS in the list of all parameters 1401 RELAY Selects a drive status indicated through relay output RO 1 OUTPUT 1 2008 MAXIMUM Defines the maximum limit for the drive output frequency e FREQ 5 6 cm 16 SYSTEM Parameter view Run Enable parameter lock etc See group CONTROLS 16 SYSTEM CONTROLS in the list of all parameters 21 START STOP Start and stop modes of the motor See group 21 START STOP in the list of all parameters 2102 STOP Selects the motor stop function FUNCTION Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Actual signals and parameters 153 Parameters in the short parameter view No Name Value Description Default 2202 AC
311. t tracing 299 CODE FAULT CAUSE WHAT TO DO 0041 OUTLET VERY Pressure at pump fan Check piping for blocks HIGH outlet too high See parameter group 44 PUMP 8A83 PROTECTION 0307 bit 7 0042 INLET LOW Pressure at pump fan Check for a closed valve on the inlet 8A80 inlet too low side of the pump fan 0307 bit 8 Check piping for leaks See parameter group 44 PUMP PROTECTION 0043 OUTLET HIGH Pressure at pump fan Check piping for blocks 8A82 outlet too high See parameter group 44 PUMP 0307 bit 9 PROTECTION 0101 SERF CORRUPT FF55 0307 bit 14 0103 SERF MACRO FF55 0307 bit 14 0201 DSP T1 OVERLOAD 6100 Drive internal error Write down fault code and contact 0307 bit 13 your local ABB representative 0202 DSP T2 OVERLOAD 6100 0307 bit 13 0203 DSP T3 OVERLOAD 6100 0307 bit 13 0204 DSP STACK ERROR 6100 Ml 0307 bit 12 0206 CB ID ERROR 5000 0307 bit 11 1000 PAR HZRPM Incorrect frequency Check parameter settings Check that 6320 limit parameter setting following applies 0307 bit 15 e 2007 MINIMUM FREQ lt 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ e 2007 MINIMUM FREQ 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ and 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ are within range Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 300 Fault tracing CODE FAULT CAUSE WHAT TO DO 1001 PAR PFC REF NEG Incorrect PFC Check parameter group 87 PFC 6320 parameters CONTROL se
312. ta and noise on page 372 and Ambient conditions on page 376 The drive is fixed properly on an even vertical non flammable wall See Mechanical installation on page 29 The cooling air will flow freely See Mechanical installation Free soace around the drive on page 30 The motor and the driven equipment are ready for start See Planning the electrical installation Checking the compatibility of the motor and drive on page 36 as well as Technical data Motor connection data on page 314 For ungrounded and corner grounded systems The internal EMC filter is disconnected EMC screw removed The capacitors are reformed if the drive has been stored over a year The drive is grounded properly The input power voltage matches the drive nominal input voltage The input power connections at U1 V1 and W1 are OK and tightened with the correct torque Appropriate input power fuses and disconnector are installed OO OOOO o The motor connections at U2 V2 and W2 are OK and tightened with the correct torque Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 56 Installation checklist The motor cable input power cable and control cables are routed separately The external control I O connections are OK The input power voltage cannot be applied to the output of the drive with a bypass connection Terminal cover and for NEMA 1 hood and connection box are in place Phone 8
313. tance of the sensor increases sharply as the motor temperature rises over the PTC reference temperature Tref as does the voltage over the resistor The temperature measurement function reads the voltage through analog input Al1 2 and converts it into ohms The figure below shows typical PTC sensor resistance values as a function of the motor operating temperature Noma 0 15kohm 1 2 4 5 0 The function is active Motor temperature is monitored using a PTC sensor see selection PTC connected to drive via a normally closed thermistor relay connected to a digital input 0 motor overtemperature THERM 1 The function is active Motor temperature is monitored using a PTC sensor see selection PTC connected to drive via a normally open thermistor relay connected to a digital input 1 motor overtemperature 3502 INPUT Selects the source for the motor temperature measurement Al1 SELECTION signal Analog input Al1 Used when PT100 or PTC sensor is selected for the temperature measurement Analog input Al2 Used when PT100 or PTC sensor is selected for the temperature measurement Digital input DI1 Used when parameter 3507 SENSOR TYPE value is set to THERMI 0 1 DI2 Digital input DI2 Used when parameter 3507 SENSOR TYPE value is set to THERMI 0 1 DI3 Digital input DI3 Used when parameter 3507 SENSOR TYPE value is set to THERMI 0 1 Digital input DI4 Used when parameter 3507 SENSOR TYPE valu
314. tart forward Pulse start reverse through digital input DI2 O gt 1 Start reverse In order to start the drive digital input DI3 must be activated prior to the pulse fed to DI1 DI2 Pulse stop through digital input DI3 1 gt 0 Stop To control the direction parameter 1003 DIRECTION setting must be REQUEST Note When the stop input DI3 is deactivated no input the control panel start and stop buttons are disabled KEYPAD Start stop and direction commands through control panel when EXT1 is active To control the direction parameter 1003 DIRECTION setting must be REQUEST DI1F 2R Start stop and direction commands through digital inputs DI1 and DI2 oe a aae Parameter 1003 DIRECTION setting must be REQUEST DI1P 2P 3 Pulse start through digital input D11 O gt 1 Start In order to start the drive digital input DI2 must be activated prior to el pulse fed to D11 Pulse stop through digital input DI2 1 gt 0 Stop Direction through digital input DI3 O forward 1 reverse To control direction parameter 1003 DIRECTION setting must be REQUEST Note When the stop input DI2 is deactivated no input the control panel start and stop buttons are disabled Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 162 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description COMM Fieldbus interface as the source for the start and stop commands ie control
315. tate diagram below describes the start stop function of Control Word CW and Status Word SW bits for the ABB Drives profile From any state From any state Emergency Stop OFF3 CW Bit2 0 ei OFF3 SW Bit5 0 CTE n f 0 1 0 Emergency Off From any state OFF CW Bit0 0 OFF1 INPUT POWER OFF SW Bit1 0 ACTIVE n f 0 1 0 Power ON gt A B C D CW Bit3 0 e e OPERATION di INHIBITED OPERATION INHIBITED gt B C D CW Bit4 0 C D A CW Bit5 0 State a ma State change mam Path described in example D CW Control Word CW Bit6 0 B SW Status Word gt RFG Ramp Function Generator From any state Fault OFF2 CW Bit 1 0 OFF2 eins FAULT SW Bit3 1 ACTIVE M SW Bit 4 0 CW Bit7 1 SWITCH ON l INHIBITED SW Bit6 1 CW Bit0 0 NOT READY TO SWITCH ON CW xxxx x1 xx xxxx x110 READY TO SWITCH ON CW xxxx X1 XX XXXX x111 READY TO OPERATE CW Bit3 1 and SW Bit12 1 OPERATION ENABLED L CW xxxx x1 xx xxx1 1111 ie Bit4 1 RFG OUTPUT ENABLED L CW xxxx x1 xx xx11 1111 ie Bit5 1 SW Bit0 0 SW Bit0 1 SW Bit1 1 SW Bit2 1 RFG ACCELERATOR Par 0104 CURRENT f Par 0103 OUTPUT FREQ n Speed Supported only by ABB DRV FULL profile State transition also occurs if the fault is reset from any other source eg digtal input D ENABLED C LI CW xxxx x1 xx x111 1111 ie Bit6 1 OPERATING lt
316. teger used in serial communication Refers to types 03E with European parametrization Refers to types 03U with US parametrization Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 150 Actual signals and parameters Fieldbus equivalent Example If 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ see page 183 is set from an external control system an integer value of 1 corresponds to 0 1 Hz All the read and sent values are limited to 16 bits 32768 32767 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Actual signals and parameters 151 Default values with different macros When application macro is changed 9902 APPLIC MACRO the software updates the parameter values to their default values The table below includes the parameter default values for different macros For other parameters the default values are the same for all macros See the parameter list starting on page 167 Name ABB 3 WIRE ALTERNA MOTOR _ HAND PID PFC SPFC Selection STANDARD TE POT AUTO CONTROL CONTROL CONTROL 9902 APPLIC 1 ABB 2 3 WIRE 3 ALTER 4 MOTOR 5 6 PID 7 PFC 15 SPFC MACRO STANDARD NATE POT eee CONTROL CONTROL CONTROL 1001 EXT1 DI1 2 DI1P 2P3 DI1F 2R Pe 2 pra 2 COMMANDS 1002 EXT2 NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL wall SEL a 4 a SEL 1103 REF1 DI3U SELECT 4D NC 1106 REF2 Al2 PID1OUT PID1OUT PID1OUT SELECT 1201 CONST DI3 4 DI4 5 DI3 4 DIS NOT SEL DIS NOT SEL NOT SE
317. ternal fault 1 Check external devices for faults 9000 Check parameter 3003 EXTERNAL 0305 bit 13 FAULT 1 setting programmable fault function 3003 0015 EXT FAULT 2 External fault 2 Check external devices for faults 9001 Check parameter 3004 EXTERNAL 0305 bit 14 FAULT 2 setting programmable fault function 3004 0016 EARTH FAULT Drive has detected Check motor 2330 earth ground fault in Check fault function parameters motor or motor cable 0305 bit 15 Check motor cable Motor cable length programmable fault must not exceed maximum function 3017 specifications See section Motor connection data on page 314 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 0018 0021 0022 0024 0026 0027 0028 0029 0030 FAULT THERM FAIL 5210 0306 bit 1 CURR MEAS 2211 0306 bit 4 SUPPLY PHASE 3130 0306 bit 5 OVERSPEED 7310 0306 bit 7 DRIVE ID 5400 0306 bit 9 CONFIG FILE 630F 0306 bit 10 SERIAL 1 ERR 7510 0306 bit 11 programmable fault function 3018 3019 EFB CON FILE 6306 0306 bit 12 FORCE TRIP FF90 0306 bit 13 Drive internal fault Thermistor used for drive internal temperature measurement is open or short circuited Drive internal fault Current measurement is out of range Intermediate circuit DC voltage is oscillating due to missing input power line phase or blown fuse Trip occurs when DC
318. th embedded fieldbus 273 E Fieldbus reference scaling Fieldbus references REF1 and REF2 are scaled as shown in the following table Note Any correction of the reference see section Reference selection and correction on page 273 is applied before scaling Reference Range Reference type 32767 Frequency oo par 1105 Final reference limited by 0 1104 1105 Actual motor 0000 par 1105 speed limited by 20000 corresponds to 100 2007 2008 32767 Frequency 10000 par 1108 Final reference limited by a 0 0 1107 1108 Actual motor 10000 par 1108 speed limited by 10000 corresponds to 100 2007 2008 PID 10000 par 1108 Final reference limited by reference 0 0 4012 4013 PID set1 or 10000 par 1108 4112 4113 PID set2 10000 corresponds to 100 Note The settings of parameters 7704 REF1 MIN and 7707 REF2 MIN have no effect on the reference scaling Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 274 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus E Reference handling The control of rotation direction is configured for each control location EXT1 and EXT2 using the parameters in group 10 START STOP DIR Fieldbus references are bipolar ie they can be negative or positive The following diagrams illustrate how group 10 parameters and the sign of the fieldbus reference interact to produce the reference REF1 REF2 Direction determined by Dire
319. the same For details on the path for starting see the diagram at 8109 START FREQ 1 Note 8772 LOW FREQ 1 value must be between 2007 MINIMUM FREQ 1 HZ and 8109 START FREQ 1 f Hz MAX 8112 8112 1 MIN 0 0 0 500 0 Hz Frequency 8113 LOW FREQ 2 Sets the frequency limit used to stop the second auxiliary E 25 0 Hz motor See 8112 LOW FREQ 1 for a complete description of U 30 0 Hz the operation The second auxiliary motor stops if e two auxiliary motors are running e drive output frequency drops below limit 8773 1 Hz e output frequency stays below the relaxed limit 8773 1 Hz for at least time 8776 AUX MOT STOP D 8114 LOW FREQ 3 Sets the frequency limit used to stop the third auxiliary motor See 8772 LOW FREQ 1 for a complete description of the operation The second auxiliary motor stops if e three auxiliary motors are running e drive output frequency drops below limit 8774 1 Hz e output frequency stays below the relaxed limit 8774 1 Hz for at least time 8776 AUX MOT STOP D 8115 AUX MOT Sets the Start Delay for the auxiliary motors START D The output frequency must remain above the start frequency limit parameter 8709 8110 or 8111 for this time period before the auxiliary motor starts See 8109 START FREQ 1 for a complete description of the operation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Actual signals and parameters 247 Al
320. thin tolerance limits e the difference between the output frequency and the frequency reference is less than or equal to 4 1 of the nominal motor frequency Asymmetric hysteresis 4 when frequency enters the reference area 1 when frequency exits the reference area Actual value differs from reference value is outside tolerance limits REMOTE Drive control location REMOTE EXT1 or EXT2 Drive control location LOCAL O ABOVE_LIMIT 1 Supervised parameter value exceeds the supervision high limit Bit value is 1 until the supervised parameter value falls below the supervision low limit See parameter group 32 SUPERVISION Supervised parameter value falls below the supervision low limit Bit value is O until the supervised parameter value exceeds the supervision high limit See parameter group 32 SUPERVISION Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 281 ABB Drives profile EFB Status Word parameter 5320 Value STATE Description Correspond to states boxes in the state diagram 11 EXTCTRLLOC External control location EXT2 selected External control location EXT1 selected EXT RUN ENABLE External Run Enable signal received io No External Run Enable received 13 Reserved 15 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 282 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus The s
321. tion DI1 INV its ROE eS AAN EN O 0 m E oO i i Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 178 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 1606 LOCAL LOCK Disables entering local control mode or selects the source NOT SEL for the local control mode lock signal When local lock is active entering the local control mode is disabled LOC REM key of the panel NOT SEL Local control is allowed Local control mode lock signal through digital input DI1 Rising edge of digital input DI1 Local control disabled Falling edge of digital input DI1 Local control allowed LE ia See selection DI1 O8 o See selection DI1 See selection DI1 Local control is disabled COMM Fieldbus interface as the source for the local lock ie control word 0307 FB CMD WORD 1 bit 14 The control word is sent by the fieldbus controller via the fieldbus adapter or embedded fieldbus Modbus to the drive For the control word bits see section DCU communication profile on page 283 Note This setting applies only for the DCU profile DI1 INV Local lock through inverted digital input DI1 Rising edge of 1 inverted digital input DI1 Local control allowed Falling edge of inverted digital input DI1 Local control disabled DI2 INV See selection DI1 INV DI3 INV See selection DI1 INV DI4 INV See selection DI1 INV DI5 INV See selection
322. tion selected DI1 The function is activated deactivated through digital input 1 DI1 1 activation O deactivation The internal sleep criteria set by parameters 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL and 4025 WAKE UP DEV are not effective The sleep start and stop delay parameters 4024 PID SLEEP DELAY and 4026 WAKE UP DELAY are effective Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Actual signals and parameters 221 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq DI2 SUPRV1 The function is activated when parameter 3207 SUPERV 1 OVER PARAM stays over the high limit defined by parameter 3203 SUPERV 1 LIM HI The internal sleep criteria set by parameters 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL and 4025 WAKE UP DEV are not effective The sleep start and stop delay parameters 4024 PID SLEEP DELAY and 4026 WAKE UP DELAY are effective SUPRV2 See selection SUPRV1 OVER 10 OVER 1 SUPRV3 See selection SUPRV1 OVER OVER DI1 INV The function is activated deactivated through inverted digital 1 input DI1 1 deactivation O activation The internal sleep criteria set by parameters 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL and 4025 WAKE UP DEV are not effective The sleep start and stop delay parameters 4024 PID SLEEP DELAY and 4026 WAKE UP DELAY are effective SUPRV1 The function is activated when parameter 3207 SUPERV 1 UNDER PARAM stays below the low limit defined by parameter 3202 SUPERV 1 LIM LO The internal sleep criter
323. tional area as the phase conductors when they are made of the same metal To effectively suppress radiated and conducted radio frequency emissions the shield conductivity must be at least 1 10 of the phase conductor conductivity The requirements are easily met with a copper or aluminium shield The minimum requirement of the motor cable shield of the drive is shown below It consists of a concentric layer of copper wires The better and tighter the shield the lower the emission level and bearing currents Insulation jacket Copper wire screen Cable core Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 38 Planning the electrical installation E Additional US requirements Type MC continuous corrugated aluminium armor cable with symmetrical grounds or shielded power cable is recommended for the motor cables if metallic conduit is not used The power cables must be rated for 75 C 167 F Conduit Where conduits must be coupled together bridge the joint with a ground conductor bonded to the conduit on each side of the joint Bond the conduits also to the drive enclosure Use separate conduits for input power motor and control wiring Do not run motor wiring from more than one drive in the same conduit Armored cable shielded power cable Six conductor three phases and three ground type MC continuous corrugated aluminium armor cable with symmetrical grounds is available from the
324. tool Standard O With SREA 01 Ethernet Adapter Module it is possible to use Modbus TCP IP with the Ethernet For more information see SREA 01 Ethernet Adapter Module User s Manual 83AUA0000042896 English Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 116 Program features E Local control The control commands are given from the control panel keypad when the drive is in local control LOC indicates local control on the panel display Assistant panel Basic panel The control panel always overrides the external control signal sources when used in local mode E External control When the drive is in external control the commands are given through the standard I O terminals digital and analog inputs and or the fieldbus interface In addition it is also possible to set the control panel as the source for the external control External control is indicated with REM on the panel display Assistant panel Basic panel 49 1 0 r 5 10 7 DIR 1100 00 MENU The user can connect the control signals to two external control locations EXT1 or EXT2 Depending on the user selection either one is active at a time This function operates on a 2 ms time level E Settings Panel key Additional information LOC REM Selection between local and external control Parameter 1102 Selection between EXT1 and EXT2 1001 1002 Start stop direction source for EXT1 EXT2 1103 1106 R
325. tr com 104 Application macros Alternate macro This macro provides an I O configuration adapted to a sequence of DI control signals used when alternating the rotation direction of the motor To enable the macro set the value of parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO to 3 ALTERNATE For the parameter default values see section Default values with different macros on page 757 If you use other than the default connections presented below see section I O terminals on page 49 E Default I O connections X1A neve GND Analog input circuit common fF NN Ta tov Reference voltage 10 V DC max 10 mA Not in use by default 0 10 V max 500 a 6 GND Analog input circuit common 7 ao Motor speed vate 0 20 mA Aa eee 1 eav auar votage output 24 V DO max 200 mA 10 GND Auxiliary voltage output common m DCOM Digital input common 12 DHt_ Start forward If D11 DI2 the drive stops X1B ROCOM Relay output 1 ONE No fault Fault 1 p82 RONG a Digital output max 100 mA a DOOUT Y No fault Fault 1 DOGND mi 1 See parameter group 12 CONSTANT 2 0 ramp times according to parameters SPEEDS 2202 and 2203 DI3 DI4 Operation parameter 1 ramp times according to parameters lO 0 Set speed through Al1 2205 and 2206 1 0 _ Speed 1 1202 3 360 degree grounding under a clamp me oan Tightening torque 0 4 N m 3 5 Ibf in Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 We
326. trol Note With group 77 REFERENCE SELECT you can allow the reference modification in remote control REM If the panel is not in the Reference mode rEF not visible press key 45 or SY until you see rEF and then press 37 Now the display shows the current reference value with under the value 491 SN F WD e To decrease the reference value press Cv The value changes immediately when you press the ag FWD key It is stored in the drive permanent memory and restored automatically after power switch off e To increase the reference value press 435 5 0 f Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 74 Control panels E Parameter mode In the Parameter mode you can e view and change parameter values e select and modify the signals shown in the Output mode e start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control How to select a parameter and change its value sep Action Cy Go to the Main menu by pressing 37 if you are in the Output mode otherwise by pressing CZ repeatedly until you see MENU at the bottom If the panel is not in the Parameter mode PAr not visible press key CA or SY until you see PAr and then press 37 The display shows the number of one of the parameter groups Use keys 4 and SY to find the desired parameter group Press 537 The display shows one of the parameters in the se
327. tructions given in section Connecting the embedded fieldbus on page 54 The communication through the fieldbus link is initialised by setting parameter 9802 COMM PROT SEL to STD MODBUS or MODBUS RS232 The communication parameters in group 53 EFB PROTOCOL must also be adjusted See the table below Parameter Alternative Setting for Function Information settings fieldbus control COMMUNICATION INITIALISATION 9802 COMM PROT NOT SEL STD MODBUS Initializes embedded fieldbus SEL STD MODBUS _ with RS 485 communication MODBUS RS232 MODBUS RS232 with RS 232 ADAPTER MODULE CONFIGURATION 5302 EFB STATION ID 0 65535 Any Defines the station ID address of the RS 232 485 link No two stations on line may have the same address 5304 EFB PARITY 8 NONE 1 8 NONE 2 8 EVEN 1 8 ODD 1 5305 EFB CTRL ABB DRV LIM Selects the communication PROFILE DCU PROFILE profile used by the drive See section Communication ABB DRY FULL profiles on page 278 5310 5317 EFB PAR 0 65535 Any Selects an actual value to be 10 17 mapped to Modbus register 400xx After the configuration parameters in group 53 EFB PROTOCOL have been set the Drive control parameters on page 268 must be checked and adjusted when necessary Selects the parity setting The same settings must be used in all on line stations 5303 EFB BAUD 1 2 kbit s Defines the communication RATE 2 4 kbit s speed of the RS 232 485 link 4 8 kbit s 9 6 kbit s 19 2 kbit s 38 4
328. ttings Check that 0307 bit 15 following applies e 2007 MINIMUM FREQ gt 0 when 8123 is ACTIVE or SPFC ACTIVE 1003 PAR Al SCALE Incorrect analog input Check parameter group 13 ANALOG 6320 Al signal scaling INPUTS settings Check that following 0307 bit 15 applies e 1301 MINIMUM Al1 lt 1302 MAXIMUM Al e 1304 MINIMUM Al2 lt 1305 MAXIMUM Al2 1004 PAR AO SCALE Incorrect analog output Check parameter group 15 ANALOG 6320 AO signal scaling OUTPUTS settings Check that 0307 bit 15 following applies e 1504 MINIMUM AO1 lt 1505 MAXIMUM AO1 1005 PAR PCU 2 Incorrect motor Check parameter 9909 setting 6320 nominal power setting Following must apply 0307 bit 15 e 1 1 lt 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR 9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT 1 73 Pu lt 3 0 where Py 1000 9909 MOTOR NOM POWER if units are in kW or Px 746 9909 MOTOR NOM POWER if units are in hp 1006 PAR EXT RO Incorrect extension Check parameter settings Check that 6320 relay output following applies 0307 bit 15 parameters e Relay Output Extension Module MREL 0 is connected to the drive e 1402 1403 RELAY OUTPUT 2 3 and 1410 RELAY OUTPUT 4 have non zero values See MREL 01 Relay Output Extension Module User s Manual 3AUAO0000035974 English 1007 PAR FBUSMISS Fieldbus control has Check fieldbus parameter settings 6320 not been activated 0307 bit 15 1009 PAR PCU 1 Incorrect motor Check parameter settings Following 63
329. ual value of the counter exceeds the value defined by parameter 2907 a maintenance notice is displayed on the panel 0 0 6553 5 Megawatt hours Parameter is reset by setting it to zero 1 0 1 MWh MWh ILT Prog AM l 1 TU i 3001 AI lt MIN Selects how the drive reacts when an analog input signal NOT SEL FUNCTION falls below the set minimum limit NOT SEL Protection is inactive FAULT The drive trips on fault Al1 Al2 LOSS and the motor coasts 1 to stop Fault limit is defined by parameter 3021 3022 Al1 Al2 FAULT LIMIT CONST SP7 The drive generates alarm Al1 Al2 LOSS and sets the speed to the value defined by parameter 7208 CONST SPEED 7 Alarm limit is defined by parameter 3021 3022 AI1 Al2 FAULT LIMIT WARNING Make sure that it is safe to continue operation in case the analog input signal is lost LAST SPEED The drive generates alarm Al1 Al2 LOSS and freezes the speed to the level the drive was operating at The speed is determined by the average speed over the previous 10 seconds Alarm limit is defined by parameter 3021 3022 Al1 Al2 FAULT LIMIT WARNING Make sure that it is safe to continue operation in case the analog input signal is lost 3002 PANEL COMM Selects how the drive reacts to a control panel ERR communication break FAULT Drive trips on fault PANEL LOSS and the motor coasts to 1 stop CONST SP 7 The drive generates alarm PANEL LOSS and sets the speed to the speed defined by parameter 7208 CONST
330. uency exceeds 20 Hz or when it is equal to the reference value See parameter 2110 TORQ BOOST CURR Note Starting to a rotating machine is not possible when TORQ BOOST is selected WARNING The drive will start after the set pre magnetizing time has passed although the motor magnetization is not completed Ensure always in applications where a full break away torque is essential that the constant magnetizing time is long enough to allow generation of full magnetization and torque SCAN START Frequency scanning flying start starting to a rotating machine Based on frequency scanning interval 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ 2007 MINIMUM FREQ to identify the frequency If frequency identification fails DC magnetization is used see selection DC MAGN SCAN Combines scanning start starting to a rotating machine BOOST and torque boost See selections SCANSTART and TORQ BOOST If frequency identification fails torque boost is used RAMP Stop along a ramp See parameter group 22 ACCEL DECEL 2103 DC MAGN Defines the pre magnetizing time See parameter 2101 TIME START FUNCTION After the start command the drive automatically pre magnetizes the motor the set time 0 00 10 00s Magnetizing time Set this value long enough to allow full 1 0 01s motor magnetization Too long time heats the motor excessively 2106 DC CURR REF Defines the DC brake current If parameter 2707 DC 30 BRAKE TIME is not zero the DC brake current is injected to th
331. unction parameters mene fault insufficient motor 3010 3012 power 7 AUTORESET Automatic reset alarm Check parameter group 37 0308 bit 12 AUTOMATIC RESET settings 2014 AUTOCHANGE PFC Autochange See parameter group 87 PFC 1 0308 bit 13 function is active CONTROL section PFC Control macro on page 108 and section SPFC Control macro on page 109 2015 PFCILOCK PFC interlocks are Drive cannot start 0308 bit 14 active e any motor when Autochange is used e the speed regulated motor when Autochange is not used See parameter group 87 PFC ONTROL PID SLEEP Sleep function has See parameter groups 40 PROCESS 0309 bit 1 entered sleeping PID SET 1 mode 41 PROCESS PID SET 2 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Fault tracing 291 CODE ALARM CAUSE WHAT TO DO 2021 START ENABLE 1 No Start Enable 1 Check parameter 1608 START MISSING signal received ENABLE settings 0309 bit 4 Check digital input connections Check fieldbus communication settings 2022 START ENABLE 2 No Start Enable 2 Check parameter 1609 START MISSING signal received ENABLE 2 settings 0309 bit 5 Check digital input connections Check fieldbus communication settings 2023 EMERGENCY Drive has received Check that it is safe to continue STOP emergency stop operation 0309 bit 6 command and ramps Return emergency stop push button to to stop according to normal position ra
332. upply voltage is cut off the drive will continue to operate by utilizing the kinetic energy of the rotating motor The drive will be fully operational as long as the motor rotates and generates energy to the drive The drive can continue the operation after the break if the main contactor remained closed UN Uinput power Im fout Ube N m Hz Vdc 160 80 520 120 60 390 80 40 260 40 20 130 0 0 0 Upc Intermediate circuit voltage of the drive fut Output frequency of the drive Tm Motor torque Loss of supply voltage at nominal load fut 40 Hz The intermediate circuit DC voltage drops to the minimum limit The controller keeps the voltage steady as long as the input power is switched off The drive runs the motor in generator mode The motor speed falls but the drive is operational as long as the motor has enough kinetic energy E Settings Parameter 2006 UNDERVOLT CTRL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 126 Program features DC Magnetizing When DC Magnetizing is activated the drive automatically magnetizes the motor before starting This feature guarantees the highest possible breakaway torque up to 180 of the motor nominal torque By adjusting the paramagnetism time it is possible to synchronize the motor start The Automatic Start feature and DC Magnetizing cannot be activated at the same time E Settings Par
333. urrent Power limit Field weakening point Switching frequency Maximum recommended motor cable length 0 to U 3 phase symmetrical Umax at the field weakening point The motor output is short circuit proof by IEC 61800 5 1 and UL 508C 0 500 Hz 0 01 Hz See section Ratings on page 308 1 5 Py 10 500 Hz 4 8 12 or 16 kHz RO 30 m 100 ft R1 R4 50 m 165 ft With output chokes the motor cable length may be extended to 60m 195 ft for RO and 100 m 330 ft for R1 R4 To comply with the European EMC Directive use the cable lengths specified in the table below for 4 kHz switching frequency The lengths are given for using the drive with the internal EMC filter or an optional external EMC filter 4 kHz switching Internal EMC filter Optional external frequency EMC filter Second environment 30 m 100 ft 30 m 100 ft category C3 minimum First Environment 30 m 100 ft category C2 1 See the new terms in section Definitions on page 318 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Control connection data Analog inputs X1A 2 and 5 Analog output X1A 7 Auxiliary voltage X1A 9 Digital inputs X1A 12 16 frequency input X1A 16 Relay output X1B 17 19 Digital output X1B 20 21 RS 485 interface X1C 23 26 Efficiency Voltage signal unipolar bipolar Current signal unipolar bipolar Potentiometer reference va
334. utput for the PFC that is in use One motor is in sleep when the other is rotating The table below shows the PFC motor assignments for some typical settings in the relay output parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 where the settings are either 31 PFC or X anything but 31 and where the Autochange function is enabled 8778 AUTOCHNG INTERV gt 0 Parameter setting Relay assignment Autochange enabled PFC apar PEC BFC PROTX Spa BRC No auxiliary motors but the autochange function is in use Working as a standard PID control Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 250 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 8118 AUTOCHNG Controls operation of the Autochange function and sets the NOT SEL INTERV interval between changes The Autochange time interval only applies to the time when the speed regulated motor is running See parameter 8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL for an overview of the Autochange function The drive always coasts to stop when autochange is performed Autochange enabled requires parameter 8120 INTERLOCKS gt 0 WARNING When enabled the Autochange function requires the interlocks 8720 INTERLOCKS gt 0 enabled During autochange the power output is interrupted and the drive coasts to stop preventing damage to the contacts PFC with Autochange mode 0 1 TEST 0 1 Test mode Forces the interv
335. w 30 C 86 F ambient temperature and below 1000 m 3300 ft altitude When the ambient temperature exceeds 30 C 86 F or the installation altitude is over 1000 m 3300 ft decrease the parameter 3007 value according to the motor manufacturer s recommendation Example If the constant protection level needs to be 115 of the motor nominal current set parameter 3007 value to 91 115 127 100 Output current relative to 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR 150 Par 3007 100 127 Par 3008 50 Par 3009 50 150 Allowed continuous motor load relative to the nominal motor 1 1 current 3008 ZERO SPEED Defines the load curve together with parameters 3007 MOT 70 LOAD LOAD CURVE and 3009 BREAK POINT FREQ 25 150 Allowed continuous motor load at zero speed in percent of 1 1 the nominal motor current Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Actual signals and parameters 197 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 3009 BREAK POINT Defines the load curve together with parameters 3007 MOT 35 Hz LOAD CURVE and 3008 ZERO SPEED LOAD Example Thermal protection trip times when parameters 3006 3008 have default values ly Output current In Nominal motor current fo Output frequency fark Break point frequency A Trip time 1 250 Hz Drive output frequency at 100 load 1 1 Hz 3010 STALL Selects how the drive
336. xample if 1103 REF is listed under Ain1 Analog input 1 that is parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT has value Al1 you can change its value to eg Al2 You cannot however set the value of parameter 1106 REF2 SELECT to Alt e start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control How to edit and change parameter settings related to I O terminals O ey Go to the Main menu by pressing if you are in the Output mode otherwise by pressing repeatedly wa until you get to the Main menu CHANGED PAR EXIT 100 00 CENTER Go the I O Settings mode by selecting I O SETTINGS on the menu with keys 4 5 and SY 7 and pressing al Select the I O group eg DIGITAL INPUTS with keys Ch and SY and press s After a brief pause the display shows the current settings for the selection EXTT 100 00 keys AS and CY and press lt q 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS l 1 Specify a new value for the setting with keys a Nand IOC uUPAR EDIT TC Pressing the key once increments or decrements the value Holding the key down changes the value faster Pressing the keys simultaneously replaces the displayed value with the default value 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS e To save the new value press S FO SETIINGS 1 Jo Cancel the new value and keep the original press TARTI STOP EL 7 DIR E1 Select the setting line with a parameter number with LOC uUPAR EDIT _ Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 W
337. y of the Control Word in hexadecimal Modbus register Information O SSS S SS shows a copy of the Control Word in hexadecimal 4 4 Status Word Supported only by ABB Drives profile format Actual value 1 8 Use parameter 5310 5317 to selects an actual value to be mapped to Modbus register 40005 40012 0031 Control Word LSW R W 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 ie the least significant word of the DCU profile 32 bit Control Word 003 Status Word 40005 Actual 1 8 40012 Supported only by DCU profile ie when 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE setting is DCU PROFILE 40032 Control Word MSW R W 0302 FB CMD WORD 2 ie the most significant word of the DCU profile 32 bit Control Word Supported only by DCU profile ie when 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE setting is DCU PROFILE 40033 Status Word LSW 0303 FB STS WORD 1 ie the least significant word of the DCU profile 32 bit Status Word Supported only by DCU profile ie when 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE setting is DCU PROFILE 40034 ACS310 STATUS 0304 FB STS WORD 2 ie the most significant word of the DCU profile 32 bit Status Word Supported only by DCU profile ie when 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE setting is DCU PROFILE Note Parameter writes through standard Modbus are always volatile ie modified values are not automatically stored to permanent memory Use parameter 1607 PARAM SAVE to save all changed values Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com
338. ys START DAY 1 4 STOP DAY 1 4 e four timed functions for collecting the selected time periods 1 4 together TIMED FUNC 1 4 e booster time an additional booster time connected to timed functions A timed function can be connected to multiple time periods TIME PERIOD 1 3602 START TIME 1 3603 STOP TIME 1 3604 START DAY 1 3605 STOP DAY 1 TIME PERIOD 2 3606 START TIME 2 3607 STOP TIME 2 TIMED FUNC 1 3608 START DAY 2 Sang CEA 3626 TIMED FUNC 1 SRC TIME PERIOD 3 SN talado 3627 TIMED FUNC 2 SRC 3610 START TIME 3 3611 STOP TIME 3 3612 START DAY 3 TIMED FUNC 3 3613 STOP DAY 3 3628 TIMED FUNC 3 SRC TIME PERIOD 4 TIMED FUNC 4 3614 START TIME 4 3629 TIMED FUNC 4 SRC 3615 STOP TIME 4 3616 START DAY 4 3617 STOP DAY 4 BOOSTER 3622 BOOSTER SEL 3623 BOOSTER TIME Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 142 Program features A parameter which is triggered by a timed function can be connected to only one timed function at a time TIMED FUNC 1 1001 EXT 1 COMMANDS 3626 TIMED FUNC 1 SRC 1002 EXT 2 COMMANDS 1102 EXT1 EXT2 SE TIMED FUNC 2 1201 CONST SPEED SEL 3627 TIMED FUNC 2 SRC 1209 TIME MODE SEL 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 4027 PID PARAM SET 4228 ACTIVATE E Example Air conditioning is active on weekdays from 8 00 to 15 30 8 a m to 3 30 p m and on Sundays from 12 00 to 15 00 12 to 3 p m By pressing the extension time switch the
339. z The update time for the transistor frequency output is 2 ms E Settings Additional information Group 18 FREQ IN amp TRAN OUT Transistor output settings E Diagnostics Additional information Transistor output status Transistor output frequency Actual signals Several actual signals are available e Drive output frequency current voltage and power e Motor speed and torque e Intermediate circuit DC voltage e Active control location LOCAL EXT1 or EXT2 e Reference values e Drive temperature e Operating time counter h kWh counter e Digital I O and analog I O status e PID controller actual values Three signals can be shown simultaneously on the assistant control panel display one signal on the basic panel display It is also possible to read the values through the serial communication link or through the analog outputs E Settings Additional information 1501 Selection of an actual signal to AO 1808 Selection of an actual signal to frequency output Group 32 SUPERVISION Actual signal supervision Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Program features 125 Additional information Group 34 PANEL DISPLAY Selection of an actual signals to be displayed on the control panel E Diagnostics Actual signal Additional information Group 07 OPERATING DATA 04 Lists of actual signals FAULT HISTORY Power loss ride through If the incoming s

ABB ACS310 Drives User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents